Tavistock – The Best Kept Secret In America

The Best Kept Secret In America

 

Formed in 1947, the Tavistock Institute
is an independent not-for-profit organization which seeks to combine
research in the social sciences with professional practice. Problems
of institution-building and organizational design and change are
being tackled in all sectors – government, industry and commerce,
health and welfare, education, etc. – nationally and
internationally, and clients range from multinationals to small
community groups. A growth area has been the use of a developmental
approach to evaluation of new and experimental programmes,
particularly in health, education and community development. This
has also produced new training events alongside the regular
programme of group relations conferences. The Institute owns and
edits the monthly journal Human Relations (published by Plenum
Press
) which is now in its 48th year, and has recently launched (in
conjunction with Sage Publications) a new journal Evaluation.

Three elements combine to make the Institute unusual, if not unique:
it has the independence of being entirely self-financing, with no
subsidies from the government or other sources; the action research
orientation places it between, but not in, the worlds of academia
and consultancy; and its range of disciplines include anthropology,
economics, organizational behavior, political science,
psychoanalysis, psychology and sociology.

So reads the opening paragraphs of the Tavistock Institute home page
at
www.tavinstitute.org

The ideology of American foundations was created by the Tavistock
Institute of Human Relations
in London. In 1921, the Duke of
Bedford, Marquess of Tavistock, the 11th Duke, gave a building to
the Institute to study the effect of shellshock on British soldiers
who survived World War I. Its purpose was to establish the “breaking
point” of men under stress, under the direction of the British Army
Bureau of Psychological Warfare, commanded by Sir John
Rawlings-Reese
.

Tavistock Institute is headquartered in London. Its prophet,
Sigmond
Freud
, settled in Maresfield Gardens when he moved to England. He
was given a mansion by Princess Bonaparte. Tavistock’s pioneer work
in behavioral science along Freudian lines of “controlling” humans
established it as the world center of foundation ideology. Its
network now extends from the University of Sussex to the U.S.
through the

The personnel of the corporations are required to
undergo indoctrination at one or more of these Tavistock controlled
institutions.
A network of secret groups, the

Mont Pelerin Society
,

Trilateral Commission
,

Ditchley Foundation
, and

the Club of Rome
is
conduit for instructions to the Tavistock network.

Statue Of *Sigmund
Freud* in front of
The Tavistock Institute of mind control

 

Tavistock Institute developed the
mass brain-washing techniques which were first used experimentally
on American prisoners of war in Korea. Its experiments in crowd
control methods have been widely used on the American public, a
surreptitious but nevertheless outrageous assault on human freedom
by modifying individual behavior through topical psychology. A
German refugee, Kurt Lewin, became director of Tavistock in 1932. He
came to the U.S. in 1933 as a “refugee”, the first of many
infiltrators, and set up the Harvard Psychology Clinic, which
originated the propaganda campaign to turn the American public
against Germany and involve us in World War II.

 

In 1938, Roosevelt executed a secret
agreement with Churchill which in effect ceded U.S. sovereignty to
England, because it agreed to let Special Operations Executive
control U.S. policies. To implement this agreement, Roosevelt sent
General Donovan to London for indoctrination before setting up
OSS
(now the CIA) under the aegis of SOE-SIS. The entire OSS program, as
well as the CIA has always worked on guidelines set up by the
Tavistock Institute.


Tavistock Institute originated the mass civilian bombing raids
carried out by Roosevelt and Churchill purely as a clinical
experiment in mass terror, keeping records of the results as they
watched the “guinea pigs” reacting under “controlled laboratory
conditions”. All Tavistock and American foundation techniques have a
single goal—to break down the psychological strength of the
individual and render him helpless to oppose the dictators of the
World Order. Any technique which helps to break down the family
unit, and family inculcated principles of religion, honor,
patriotism and sexual behavior, is used by the Tavistock scientists
as weapons of crowd control.

 

The methods of Freudian psychotherapy
induce permanent mental illness in those who undergo this treatment
by destabilizing their character. The victim is then advised to
“establish new rituals of personal interaction”, that is, to indulge
in brief sexual encounters which actually set the participants
adrift with no stable personal relationships in their lives,
destroying their ability to establish or maintain a family.

Tavistock Institute has developed such power in the U.S. that no one
achieves prominence in any field unless he has been trained in
behavioral science at Tavistock or one of its subsidiaries. Henry
Kissinger
, whose meteoric rise to power is otherwise inexplicable,
was a German refugee and student of Sir John Rawlings-Reese at
SHAEF.
Dr. Peter Bourne, a Tavistock Institute psychologist, picked
Jimmy
Carter
for President of the U.S. solely because Carter had undergone
an intensive brainwashing program administered by Admiral Hyman Rickover at Annapolis.

The “experiment” in compulsory racial integration in the U.S. was
organized by Ronald Lippert, of the OSS and the American Jewish
Congress, and director of child training at the Commission on
Community Relations
. The program was designed to break down the
individual’s sense of personal knowledge in his identity, his racial
heritage. Through the Stanford Research Institute, Tavistock
controls the National Education Association. The Institute of Social
Research at the National Training Lab brain washes the leading
executives of business and government. Such is the power of Tavistock that our entire space program was scrapped for nine years
so that the Soviets could catch up. The hiatus was demanded in an
article written by Dr. Anatol Rapport, and was promptly granted by
the government, to the complete mystification of everyone connected
with NASA. Another prominent Tavistock operation is the

Wharton
School of Finance
, at the University of Pennsylvania.

A single common denominator identifies the common Tavistock
strategy
—the use of drugs. The infamous

MK Ultra program of the
CIA
, in which unsuspecting CIA officials were given
LSD, and their
reaction studied like “guinea pigs”, resulted in several deaths. The
U.S. Government had to pay millions in damages to the families of
the victims, but the culprits were never indicted. The program
originated when Sandoz AG, a Swiss drug firm, owned by S.G. Warburg
Co. of London, developed Lysergic Acid. Roosevelt’s advisor,
James
Paul Warburg
, son of Paul Warburg who wrote the Federal Reserve Act,
and nephew of Max Warburg who had financed Hitler, set up the
Institute for Policy Studies to promote the drug. The result was the
LSD “counter-culture” of the 1960s, the “student revolution”, which
was financed by $25 million from the CIA.

One part of MK Ultra was the Human Ecology Fund; the
CIA also paid
Dr. Herbert Kelman of Harvard to carry out further experiments on
mind control. In the 1950s, the CIA financed extensive LSD
experiments in Canada. Dr. D. Ewen Cameron, president of the
Canadian Psychological Association, and director of Royal Victorian
Hospital, Montreal, received large payments from the CIA to give 53
patients large doses of LSD and record their reactions; the patients
were drugged into weeks of sleep and then given electric shock
treatments. One victim, the wife of a member of the Canadian
Parliament, is now suing the U.S. companies who provided the drug
for the CIA. All the records of the CIA’s drug testing program were
ordered destroyed by the head of MK Ultra.


Because all efforts of the Tavistock Institute are directed toward
producing cyclical collapse, the effect of the CIA programs are
tragically apparent. R. Emmett Tyrell Jr., writing in the Washington
Post August 20, 1984
, cites the “squalid consequences of the 60s
radicals in SDS” as resulting in “the growing rate of illegitimacy,
petty lawlessness, drug addiction, welfare, VD, and mental illness”.

This is the legacy of the Warburgs and the CIA. Their principal
agency, the Institute for Policy Studies, was funded by James Paul
Warburg;
its co-founder was Marcus Raskin, protégé of McGeorge
Bundy, president of the Ford Foundation. Bundy had Raskin appointed
to the post of President Kennedy’s personal representative on the
National Security Council, and in 1963 funded Students for
Democratic Society, through which the CIA operated the drug culture.

Today the Tavistock Institute operates a $6 Billion a year network
of Foundations in the U.S., all of it funded by U.S. taxpayers’
money. Ten major institutions are under its direct control, with 400
subsidiaries, and 3000 other study groups and think tanks which
originate many types of programs to increase

the control of the
World Order
over the American people. The Stanford Research
Institute
, adjoining the Hoover Institution, is a $150 million a
year operation with 3300 employees. It carries on program
surveillance for Bechtel, Kaiser, and 400 other companies, and
extensive intelligence operations for the CIA. It is the largest
institution on the West Coast promoting mind control and the
behavioral sciences.

One of the key agencies as a conduit for secret instructions from
Tavistock is the Ditchley Foundation, founded in 1957. The American
branch of the Ditchley Foundation is run by Cyrus Vance, former
Secretary of State, and director of the Rockefeller Foundation, and
Winston Lord, president of the

Council on Foreign Relations
.

One of the principal but little known operations of the Rockefeller
Foundation
has been its techniques for controlling world
agriculture. Its director, Kenneth Wernimont, set up

Rockefeller

controlled agricultural programs throughout Mexico and Latin
America. The independent farmer is a great threat to the World
Order,
because he produces for himself, and because his produce can
be converted into capital, which gives him independence. In Soviet
Russia, the Bolsheviks believed they had attained total control over
the people; they were dismayed to find their plans threatened by the
stubborn independence of the small farmers, the Kulaks. Stalin
ordered the OGPU to seize all food and animals of the Kulaks, and to
starve them out. The Chicago American, February 25, 1935 carried a
front page headline,

SIX MILLION PERISH IN SOVIET FAMINE

Peasants’
Crops Seized, They and their Animals Starve

To draw attention from
this atrocity, it was later alleged that the Germans, not the
Soviets, had killed six million people, the number taken from the
Chicago American headline by a Chicago publicist.

The Communist Party, the Party of the Peasants and Workers,
exterminated the peasants and enslaved the workers. Many
totalitarian regimes have found the small farmer to be their biggest
stumbling block. The French Reign of Terror was directed, not
against the aristocrats, many of whom were sympathetic to it, but
against the small farmers who refused to turn over their grain to
the revolutionary tribunals in exchange for the worthless assignats.
In the United States, the foundations are presently engaged in the
same type of war of extermination against the American farmer. The
traditional formula of land plus labor for the farmer has been
altered due to the farmer’s need for purchasing power, to buy
industrial goods needed in his farming operations.

 

Because of this need for capital, the
farmer is especially vulnerable to the World Order’s manipulation of
interest rates, which is bankrupting him. Just as in the Soviet
Union, in the early 1930s, when Stalin ordered the Kulaks to give up
their small plots of land to live and work on the collective farms,
the American small farmer faces the same type of extermination,
being forced to give up his small plot of land to become a hired
hand for the big agricultural trusts.
The Brookings Institution and
other foundations originated the monetary programs implemented by

the Federal Reserve System
to destroy the American farmer, a replay
of the Soviet tragedy in Russia, with one proviso that the farmer
will be allowed to survive if he becomes a slave worker of the giant
trusts.

Once the citizen becomes aware of the true role of the foundations,
he can understand the high interest rates, high taxes, the
destruction of the family, the degradation of the churches into
forums for revolution, the subversion of the universities into CIA
cesspools of drug addiction, and the halls of government into sewers
of international espionage and intrigue. The American citizen can
now understand why every agent of the federal government is against
him; the alphabet agencies, the FBI, IRS, CIA and
BATF must make war
on the citizen in order to carry out the programs of the
foundations.

The foundations are in direct violation of their charters, which
commit them to do “charitable” work, because they make no grants
which are not part of a political goal. The charge has been made,
and never denied, that the Heritage-AEI network has at least two
KGB
moles on its staff. The employment of professional intelligence
operatives as “charitable” workers, as was done in the Red Cross
Mission
to Russia in 1917, exposes the sinister political economic
and social goals which the World Order requires the foundations to
achieve through their ” bequests “.

Not only is this tax fraud, because the foundations are granted tax
exemption solely to do charitable work, but it is criminal
syndicalism, conspiracy to commit offenses against the United States
of America, Constitutional Law 213, Corpus Juris Secundum 16. For
the first time, the close interlocking of the foundation “syndicate”
has been revealed by the names of its principle
incorporators—Daniel Coit Gilman, who incorporated the Peabody
Fund
and the John Slater Fund, and became an incorporator of the
General Education Board (now the Rockefeller Foundation); Gilman,
who also incorporated the Russell Trust in 1856, later became an
incorporator of the Carnegie Institution with Andrew Dickson White
(Russell Trust) and Frederic A. Delano. Delano also was an original
incorporator of the Brookings Institution and the Carnegie Endowment
for International Peace
.

 

Daniel Coit Gilman incorporated the
Russell Sage Foundation with Cleveland H. Dodge of the National City
Bank. These foundations incorporators have been closely linked with
the Federal Reserve System, the War Industries Board of World War I,
the OSS of World War II and the CIA. They have also been closely
linked with the American International Corporation, which was formed
to instigate the Bolshevik Revolution in Russia. Delano, an uncle of
Franklin Delano Roosevelt, was on the original Board of Governors of
the Federal Reserve System in 1914. His brother-in-law founded the
influential Washington law firm of Covington and Burling. The Delanos and other ruling families of
the World Order trace their
lineage directly back to

William of Orange
and the regime which
granted the charter of the Bank of England.
 


Back to Top

 


Tavistock
Institutions In The United States

  • Flow Laboratories
    Gets contracts from the National Institutes of Health.

     

  • Merle Thomas Corporation
    Gets contracts from the U.S. Navy, analyzes data from
    satellites.
     

  • Walden Research
    Does work in the field of pollution control.
     

  • Planning Research
    Corporation, Arthur D. Little, G.E. “TEMPO”, Operations
    Research Inc.
    Part of approximately 350 firms who conduct research and
    conduct surveys, make recommendations to government. They
    are part of what President Eisenhower called “a possible
    danger to public policy that could itself become captive of
    a scientific-technological elite.”
     

  • Brookings Institution
    (1)
    Dedicates its work to what it calls a “national agenda.”
    Wrote President Hoover’s program, President Roosevelt’s “New
    Deal”, the Kennedy Administration’s “New Frontiers” program
    (deviation from it may have cost John F. Kennedy his life),
    and President Johnson’s “Great Society.” Brookings has been
    telling the United States Government how to conduct its
    affairs for the past 70 years and is still doing so.
     

  • Hudson Institute
    This institution has done more to shape the way
    Americans react to political and social events, think, vote
    and generally conduct themselves than perhaps any except the
    BIG FIVE. Hudson specializes in defense policy research and
    relations with the USSR. Most of its military work is
    classified as SECRET. (One idea during the Vietnam War was
    to build a moat around Saigon.) Hudson may be properly
    classified as one of the Committee of 300’s BRAINWASHING
    establishments. One of its largest clients is the U.S.
    Department of Defense which includes matters of civil
    defense, national security, military policy and arms
    control.
     

  • National Training
    Laboratories
    One of the key institutions established for this purpose
    in the United States was the National Training Laboratories
    (NTL). Founded in 1947 by members of the Tavistock network
    in the United States and located originally on an estate in
    Bethel, Maine, NTL had as its explicit purpose the
    brainwashing of leaders of the government, educational
    institutions, and corporate bureaucracies in the Tavistock
    method, and then using these “leaders” to either themselves
    run Tavistock group sessions in their organizations or to
    hire other similarly trained group leaders to do the job.
    The “nuts and bolts” of the NTL operation revolves around
    the particular form of Tavistock degenerate psychology known
    as “group dynamics,” developed by German Tavistock operative
    Kurt Lewin, who emigrated to the United States in the 1930s
    and whose students founded NTL.

     

    In a Lewinite brainwashing
    group, a number of individuals from varying backgrounds and
    personalities, are manipulated by a “group leader” to form a
    “consensus” of opinion, achieving a new “group identity.”
    The key to the process is the creation of a controlled
    environment, in which stress is introduced (sometimes called
    dissonance) to crack an individual’s belief structure. Using
    the peer pressure of other group members, the individual is
    “cracked,” and a new personality emerges with new values.
    The degrading experience causes the person to deny that any
    change has taken place. In that way, an individual is
    brainwashed without the victim knowing what has taken place.

    This method is the same, with some minor modification, used
    in all so-called “sensitivity groups” or “T-groups,” or in
    the more extreme rock-drug-sex counterculture form,
    “touchy-feely groups,” such as the kind popularized from the
    1960s onward by the Esalen Institute, which was set up with
    the help of NTL.

    From the mid-1950s onward, NTL put the majority of the
    nation’s corporate leaderships through such brainwashing
    programs, while running similar programs for the State
    Department, the Navy, the Department of Education, and other
    sections of the federal bureaucracy. There is no firm
    estimate of the number of Americans who have been put
    through this process in last 40 years at either NTL, or as
    it is now known the NTL Institute for Applied Behavioral
    Sciences, which is based in Rosslyn, Virginia, or its West
    Coast base of operations, the Western Training Laboratories
    in Group Development, or in various satellite institutions.
    The most reliable estimate is in the several millions.

    One of the groups that went through the NTL mill in the
    1950s was the leadership of the National Education
    Association, the largest organization of teachers in the
    United States. Thus, the NEA’s outlook has been “shaped” by
    Tavistock, through the NTL. In 1964, the NTL Institute
    became a direct part of the NEA, with the NTL setting up
    “group sessions” for all its affiliates. With funding from
    the Department of Education, the NTL Institute drafted the
    programs for the training of the nation’s primary and
    secondary school teachers, and has a hand as well in
    developing the content of educational “reforms,” including
    OBE.

    Also known as the International Institute for Applied
    Behavioral Sciences. This institute is a brainwashing center
    in artificial stress training whereby participants suddenly
    find themselves immersed in defending themselves against
    vicious accusations. NTL takes in the National Education
    Association (1), the
    largest teacher group in the United States. While officially
    decrying “racism”, it is interesting to note that NTL,
    working with NEA, produced a paper proposing education
    vouchers which would separate the hard-to-teach children
    from the brighter ones, and funding would be allocated
    according to the number of difficult children who would be
    separated from those who progressed at a normal rate. The
    proposal was not taken up.
     

  • University of Pennsylvania,
    Wharton School of Finance & Commerce Founded by Eric Trist
    One of the “brain trusts” of Tavistock, Wharton has
    become one of the more important Tavistock in so far as
    “Behavioral Research” is concerned. Wharton attracts clients
    such as the U.S. Department of Labor—which teaches how to
    produce “cooked” statistics at the Wharton Econometric
    Forecasting Associates Incorporated. This method was very
    much in demand as we came to the close of 1991 with millions
    more out of work than was reflected in USDL statistics.
    Wharton’s ECONOMETRIC MODELING is used by every major
    Committee of 300 company in the United States, Western
    Europe, the International Monetary Fund, the United Nations,
    and the World Bank.
     

  • Institute for Social Research
    Among its clients are The Ford Foundation, U.S.
    Department of Defense, U.S. Postal Service and the U.S.
    Department of Justice. Among its studies are “The Human
    Meaning Of Social Change”, “Youth in Transition” and “How
    Americans View Their Mental Health”.
     

  • Institute For The Future
    This is not a typical Tavistock institution in that it
    is funded by the Ford Foundation, yet it draws its
    long-range forecasting from the mother of all think tanks.
    Institute for the Future projects what it believes to be
    changes that will be taking place in time frames of fifty
    years. So called “DELPHI PANELS” decide what is normal and
    what is not, and prepare position papers to “steer”
    government in the right direction to head off such groups as
    “people creating civil disorder.”

     

    (This could be patriotic groups
    demanding abolition of graduated taxes, or demanding that
    their right to bear arms is not infringed.)

     

    This institute recommends action
    such as liberalizing abortion laws, drug usage and that cars
    entering an urban area pay tolls, teaching birth control in
    public schools, requiring registration of firearms, making
    use of drugs a non-criminal offense, legalizing
    homosexuality, paying students for scholastic achievements,
    making zoning controls a preserve of the state, offering
    bonuses for family planning and last, but most frightening,
    a Pol Pot Cambodia-style proposal that new communities be
    established in rural areas, (concentration camp compounds).
    As can be observed, many of their goals have already been
    more than fully realized.

1.-
These institutions are among those that fund The
UNIFORM LAW FOUNDATION, whose function is to ensure that the
Uniform Commercial Code remains the instrument for
conducting business in the United States.

 


Back to Top

 

 

INSTITUTE FOR POLICY
STUDIES (IPS)


One of the “Big Three”,

IFS
has shaped and reshaped United States
policies, foreign and domestic, since it was founded by James P.
Warburg and the

Rothschild
entities in the United States. Its
networks in America include the League for Industrial Democracy.
Lead players in the League for Industrial Democracy have included Jeane Kirkpatrick, former U.S. Ambassador to the United Nations,
Irwin Suall of the ADL, Eugene Rostow, Arms control negotiator,
Lane
Kirkland,
Labor Leader, and Albert Shanker. IFS was incorporated in
1963 by Marcus Raskin and Richard Barnett, both highly trained
Tavistock Institute graduates.

 

The objectives of IFS came from an
agenda laid down for it by the Tavistock Institute, one of the most
notable being to create the “New Left” as a grass roots movement in
the U.S. Its been said that Barnett and Raskin controlled such
diverse elements as the Black Panthers, Daniel Ellsberg, National
Security Council staff member Halprin, The Weathermen Underground,
the Venceramos and the campaign staff of candidate George McGovern.
No scheme was too big for IFS and its controllers to take on and
manage.

Through its many powerful lobbing groups on Capitol Hill, IFS
relentlessly used its “Big Stick” to beat Congress. IFS has a
network of lobbyists, all supposedly operating independently but in
actual fact acting cohesively, so that Congressmen are pummeled from
all sides by seemingly different and varied lobbyists, In this way,
IFS was, and is still, able to successfully sway individual
Representatives and Senators to vote for “the trend, the way things
are going.” By using key point-men on Capitol Hill, IFS was able to
break into the very infrastructure of our legislative system and the
way it works.

IFS became, and remains to this day, one of the most prestigious
“think tanks” controlling foreign policy decisions, which we, the
people, foolishly believe are those of our law makers.

By sponsoring militant activism at home and with links to
revolutionaries abroad, by engineering such victories as “The
Pentagon Papers
,” besieging the corporate structure, bridging the
credibility gap between underground movements and acceptable
political activism, by penetrating religious organizations and using
them to sow discord in America, such as radical racial policies
under the guise of religion, using establishment media to spread
IFS
ideas, and then supporting them, IFS has lived up to the role which
it was founded to play.
 


Back to Top

 


STANFORD
RESEARCH INSTITUTE


Jesse Hobson, the first president of
Stanford Research Institute, in
a 1952 speech made it clear what lines the institute was to follow.
Stanford can be described as one of the “jewels” in Tavistock’s
Crown in its rule over the United States. Founded in 1946
immediately after the close of WWII, it was presided over by Charles
A. Anderson
, with emphasis on mind control research and “future
sciences.” Included under the Stanford umbrella was Charles F.
Kettering Foundation
which developed the “Changing Images of Man”
upon which the Aquarian Conspiracy rests.

Some of Stanford’s major clients and contracts were at first
centered around the defense establishment but, as Stanford grew, so,
did the diversity of its services:

  • Applications of Behavioral
    Sciences to Research Management, Office of Science and
    Technology

  • SRI Business Intelligence
    Program

  • U.S. Department of Defense
    Directorate of Defense Research and Engineering

  • U.S. Department of Defense
    Office of Aerospace Research

Among corporations seeking Stanford’s
services were Wells Fargo Bank, Bechtel Corporation, Hewlett
Packard, Bank of America, McDonnell Douglas Corporation, Blyth,
Eastman Dillon and TRW Company. One of Stanford’s more secret
projects was extensive work on chemical and bacteriological warfare
(CAB) weapons.

Stanford Research is plugged into at least 200 smaller “think tanks”
doing research into every facet of life in America. This is ARPA
networking
and represents the emergence of probably the most far
reaching effort to control the environment of every individual in
the country. At present Stanford’s computers are linked with 2500
“sister” research consoles which include:

  • the CIA

  • Bell Telephone
    Laboratories

  • U.S. Army Intelligence

  • The Office of Naval
    Intelligence (ONI)

  • Rand

  • MIT

  • Harvard

  • UCLA

Stanford plays a
key role in that it is the “library”, cataloging all ARPA
documentation.

“Other agencies”…..one can use one’s imagination here, are allowed
to search through SRI’s “library” for key words, phrases, look
through sources and update their own master files with those of
Stanford Research Center. The Pentagon uses SRI’s master files
extensively, and there is little doubt that other U.S. Government
agencies do the same. Pentagon “command and control” problems are
worked out by Stanford.

While ostensibly these apply only to weapons and soldiers, there is
absolutely no guarantee that the same research could not , and will
not be turned to civilian applications. Stanford is known to be
willing to do anything for anyone.
 


Back to Top

 



MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY


ALFRED P. SLOAN SCHOOL
OF MANAGEMENT
.

This major institute
is not generally recognized as being a part of Tavistock U.S.A. Most
people look upon it as being a purely American institution, but that
is far from the truth.

MIT- Alfred Sloan
can be roughly divided into
the following groups:

  • Contemporary Technology

  • Industrial Relations

  • NASA-ERC Computer Research
    Lavatories

  • Office of Naval Research
    Group, Psychology

  • Systems Dynamics

Some of MIT’s clients are:

  • American Management
    Association

  • Committee for Economic
    Development (1)

  • GTE

  • Institute for Defense
    Analysis (IDA)

  • NASA

  • National Academy of Sciences

  • National Council of Churches

  • Sylvania

  • TRW

  • U.S. Army

  • U.S. Department of State

  • U.S. Navy

  • U.S. Treasury

  • Volkswagen Company

1.-
These institutions are among those that fund The
UNIFORM LAW FOUNDATION, whose function is to ensure that the
Uniform Commercial Code remains the instrument for
conducting business in the United States.

 


Back to Top

 

 

RAND RESEARCH AND
DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION


Without a doubt,
RAND
is THE think tank most beholden to
Tavistock Institute
and certainly the RIIA’s most prestigious
vehicle for control of United States policies at every level.
Specific RAND policies that became operative include our ICBM
program, prime analyses for U.S. foreign policy making, instigator
of space programs, U.S. nuclear policies, corporate analyses,
hundreds of projects for the military, the Central Intelligence
Agency (CIA) in relation to the use of mind altering drugs like
peyote, LSD (the covert MK-ULTRA operation which lasted for 20
years).

Some of RAND’s clients include:

  • American Telephone and
    Telegraph Company (AT&T)

  • Chase Manhattan Bank

  • International Business
    Machines (IBM)

  • National Science Foundation

  • Republican Party

  • TRW

  • U.S. Air Force

  • U.S. Department of Health

  • U.S. Department of Energy

There are literally THOUSANDS of highly
important companies, government institutions and organizations that
make use of RANDS’s services. To list them all would be impossible.
Among RAND’s specialties is a study group that predicts the timing
and the direction of a thermonuclear war, plus working out the many
scenarios based upon its findings. RAND was once accused of being
commissioned by the USSR to work out terms of surrender of the
United States Government, an accusation that went all the way to the
United States Senate, where it was taken up by Senator Symington and
subsequently fell victim to scorn poured out by the establishment
press. BRAINWASHING remains the primary function of RAND.

Posted in Uncategorized | 1 Comment

Conspirators’ Hierarchy: The Story of the Committee of 300 – 3

 

 

 

 

 

INSTITUTIONS THROUGH WHICH…

CONTROL IS EXERCISED

 

 

 

Section 1


Profiling is a technique developed in 1922 on command of the
Royal
Institute for International Affairs
(RIIA). Major John Rawlings
Reese, a British Army technician, was instructed to set up the
largest brainwashing facility in the world at the

Tavistock
Institute for Human Relations
as a part of Sussex University.

 

This
became the core of Britain’s Psychological Warfare Bureau. When I
first introduced the names of Reese and Tavistock into the United
States in 1970, very little interest was shown. But over the years,
as I revealed more and more about Tavistock and its vital role in
the conspiracy, it has become popular to imitate my earlier
research.


Britain’s Psychological Warfare Bureau made extensive use of the
work done by Reese on his 80,000 British Army guinea pigs, captive
soldiers who underwent many forms of testing. It was Tavistock-designed methods that got the United States into the
Second World War and which, under the guidance of Dr. Kurt Lewin,
established the OSS, the forerunner of the CIA.


Lewin became the director of the Strategic Bombing Survey,
which was a plan for the Royal Air Force to concentrate on bombing
German worker housing while leaving military tar-gets, such as
munition plants, alone. The munition plants on both sides belonged
to the international bankers who had no wish to see their assets
destroyed.


Later, after the war was over, NATO ordered Sussex University to
establish a very special brainwashing center which became part of
Britain’s Psychological Warfare Bureau, only now, its research was
directed toward civilian rather than military applications. We
shall return to that super secret unit which was called Science
Policy Research Institute
(SPRI) under our chapters on drugs.


The idea behind saturation bombing of civilian worker housing was to
break the morale of the German worker. It was not designed to affect
the war effort against the German military machine. Lewin and his
team of actuaries reached a target figure, that if 65% of German
worker housing was destroyed by nightly RAF bombing, the morale of
the civilian population would collapse. The actual document was
prepared by the Prudential Assurance Company.


The RAF, under the command of “Bomber” Harris, carried out Lewin’s
plans, culminating in the terror firestorm bombing of Dresden, in
which over 125,000, mainly old men, women and children, were killed.
The truth of “Bomber” Harris’s horror raids on German civilians was
a well kept secret until long after the end of WW II.


Tavistock provided most of the detailed programs that led to he establishing of the Office of Naval Intelligence, (ONI) the
number one intelligence service in the United States, one which
wharfs the CIA in size and scope.

 

Contracts worth billions of
dollars were given to Tavistock by the United States Government
and Tavistock’s strategic planners provide most of what the Pentagon uses for our defense establishment, even today. Here
again is illustrated the grip the Committee of 300 has on the
United States, and the majority of our institutions. Tavistock
runs over 30 research institutions in the United States, all of
which we will name in our charts at the end of the book.


These Tavistock-U.S. institutions have in many cases grown into
gargantuan monsters, penetrating every aspect of our government
agencies and taking command of all policy making. One of Tavistock’s
chief wreckers of our way of life was Dr. Alexander King, a founder
member of NATO and a favorite with the Committee of 300, as well as
an outstanding member of the Club of Rome.

 

Dr. King was assigned by
the Club of Rome to destroy America’s education by taking control of
the National Teachers Association and working in close conjunction
with certain law makers and judges. If it was not generally known
how all-pervading is the influence of the Committee of 300, this
book should dispel every vestige of that doubt.


The trial run for the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA)
a Club of Rome creation came in a test run against the nuclear power
station at Three Mile Island, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. Termed “an
accident” by the hysterical media, this was not an accident but a
deliberately designed crisis test for FEMA. An additional benefit
was the fear and hysteria created by the news media which had people
fleeing the area when in fact they were never in any danger.


It was considered a success by FEMA and it scored a lot of points
for the anti-nuclear forces. TMI became the rallying point for the
so-called “environmentalists,” a highly financed and controlled
group run out of Aspen Institute on behalf of the Club of Rome.
Coverage was provided free of charge by William Paley of CBS
television, a former British intelligence agent.


FEMA is a natural successor to the Strategic Bombing Survey
of WW II. Dr. Kurt Lewin, theoretician for what the Tavistock
conspirators called crisis management, was deeply involved in
the study. There is an unbroken chain between Lewin and
Tavistock that stretches back for thirty-seven years. Lewin incorporated the Strategic Bombing Survey into
FEMA, with only
a few small adjustments proving necessary, one of the changes
being the target, WHICH WAS NO LONGER GERMANY BUT THE UNITED STATES
OF AMERICA. Forty-five years after the end of WW II it is still
Tavistock that has its hands on the trigger, and the weapon is
pointed at the United States.


The late Margaret Mead conducted an intensive study of the German
and Japanese population, under the aegis of Tavistock, on how they
reacted to stress caused by aerial bombardment. Irving Janus was an
associate professor on the project which was supervised by Dr. John
Rawlings Reese, promoted to Brigadier-General in the British Army.

 

The test results were given to FEMA. The Irving Janus report was of
great value in formulating FEMA policies. Janus used it in a book
which he later wrote entitled AIR WAR AND STRESS. The ideas in his
book were followed TO THE LETTER BY FEMA DURING THE THREE MILE
ISLAND “CRISIS.” Janus had a really simple idea: Simulate a
succession of crises and manipulate the population following the
Lewin terror tactics and they will do exactly as required.


In carrying out this exercise, Lewin discovered something new, that
social control on a wide scale can be achieved by using the news
media to bring home the horrors of a nuclear war via the television
media. It was discovered that women’s magazines were very effective
in dramatizing the terrors of a nuclear war. A trial run conducted
by Janus had Betty Bumpers, wife of Senator Dale Bumpers of
Arkansas, “writing” for McCalls magazine on that subject.


The article appeared in McCalls January 1983 issue. Actually,
Mrs.
Bumpers did not write the article, it was created for her by a group
of writers at Tavistock whose specialty such subject matters are.
It was a collection of untruths, non-facts, innuendoes and
conjectures based entirely upon false premises. The Bumpers article
was typical of the kind of psychological manipulation at which Tavistock is so very good. Not one of the ladies who read McCalls
could have failed to be impressed by the terror-horror story of what
a nuclear war looks like.

The Committee of 300 has a major bureaucracy at its disposal made
up of hundreds of think tanks and front organizations that run the
whole gamut of private business and government leaders. I will
mention as many as I can fit in, starting with the German Marshall
Fund.

 

Its members, and remember they are also members of NATO and
the Club of Rome, consist of,

  • David Rockefeller of Chase Manhattan
    Bank

  • Gabriel Hague of the prestigious
    Manufactures Hanover Trust and Finance Corporation

  • Milton Katz of the Ford Foundation

  • Willy Brandt, leader of
    Socialist International, KGB agent and member of the Committee of 300

  • Irving Bluestone, chairman of the United Auto
    Workers Executive Board

  • Russell Train, U.S. president of the Club
    of Rome and Prince Philip’s World Wildlife Fund

  • Elizabeth Midgely,
    CBS programs producer

  • B. R. Gifford, director of the Russell Sage
    Foundation

  • Guido Goldman of the Aspen Institute the late Averill
    Harriman, Committee of 300 extraordinary member

  • Thomas L. Hughes of
    the Carnegie Endowment Fund

  • Dennis Meadows and Jay Forrestor of MIT
    “world dynamics”

The Committee of 300, although in existence for over 150 years, did
not take on its present form until around 1897.

 

It was always given
to issuing orders through other fronts, such as the Royal Institute
for International Affairs
. When it was decided that a super-body
would control European affairs, the RIIA founded the
Tavistock
Institute
, which in turn created NATO.

 

For Five years
NATO was
financed by the German Marshall Fund. Perhaps the most important
member of

the Bilderbergers
, a foreign policy body of the Committee,
was Joseph Rettinger, said to have been its founder and organizer,
whose annual meetings have delighted conspiracy hunters for several
decades.


Rettinger was a well-trained Jesuit priest and a 33rd Degree
Freemason. Mrs. Katherine Meyer Graham who is suspected of
having murdered her husband in order to get control of the
Washington Post, was another ranking member of the Club of
Rome
, as was Paul G. Hoffman of the New York Life Insurance
Company, one of the largest insurance companies in the United
States and a leading Rank company, with ties directly to Queen
Elizabeth of England’s immediate family.

 

John J. McCloy, the man who
attempted to wipe post-World War II Germany off the map and last but
not least, James A. Perkins of the Carnegie Corporation, were also
founding members of the Bilderbergers and the Club of Rome.


What a star-studded cast! Yet strangely enough, few if any outside
of genuine intelligence agencies had ever heard of this organization
until recent times. The power exercised by these important
personages and the corporations, television stations newspapers,
insurance companies and banks they represent matches the power and
prestige of at least two European countries, and still this is only
the tip of The Committee of 300’s enormous crossgridding and
interfaced interests.


Not mentioned in the foregoing line-up is Richard Gardner who,
although an early member of the Committee of 300, was sent to Rome
on a special assignment. Gardner married into one of the
oldest
Black Nobility families of Venice
, thus providing the Venetian
aristocracy a direct line to the White House. The late Averill
Harriman was another of the committee’s direct links with the
Kremlin and the White House, a position which
Kissinger inherited
after the death of Harriman.


The Club of Rome is indeed a formidable agency of the Committee of
300
. Although ostensibly working on American affairs, the group
overlaps other Committee of 300 agencies and its United States
members are often found working with “problems” in Japan and
Germany.

 

Some of the front organizations operated by the above
committee include the following, although not limited to them:

  • LEAGUE OF INDUSTRIAL DEMOCRACY
    Officials: Michael Novak, Jeane Kirkpatrick, Eugene Rostow, IRWIN
    SUALL, Lane Kirkland, Albert Schenker.
    Purpose: To disrupt and
    disturb normal labor relations between workers and employees by brain washing labor unions to make impossible demands with special attention to steel, auto-mobile
    and housing industries.
     

  • FREEDOM HOUSE
    Officials: Leo Churn and Carl Gershman.
    Purpose: To spread socialist disinformation among American blue collar workers, spread dissension and dissatisfaction. Now
    that these objectives have been largely realized, Gershman has been
    drafted by Lawrence Eagleburger to CEDC, a newly created body to
    stop a united Germany from expanding its trade into the Danube
    Basin.
     

  • COMMITTEE FOR A DEMOCRATIC MAJORITY
    Officials: Ben Wattenburg, Jean Kirkpatrick, Elmo Zumwa and Midge
    Dector.
    Purpose: To provide a connecting link between the
    educated
    socialist class and minority groups with the intent of setting up a
    solid block of voters who can be counted on to vote for leftwing
    candidates at election time. It was really a Fabianist operation
    from start to finish.
     

  • FOREIGN POLICY RESEARCH INSTITUTE
    Officials: Robert Strausz Hupe.
    Purpose: To undermine and eventually end NASA space
    program.
     

  • SOCIAL DEMOCRATS U.S.A.
    Officials: Bayard Rustin, Lane Kirkland, Jay Lovestone, Carl
    Gershman, Howard Samuel, Sidney Hook.
    Purpose: To spread radical socialism, especially among minority
    groups, and forge links between similar organizations in socialist
    countries. Lovestone was for decades the leading advisor to U.S.
    presidents on Soviet affairs and a strong direct link with Moscow.
     

  • INSTITUTE FOR SOCIAL RELATIONS
    Officials: Harland Cleveland, Willis Harmon.
    Purpose: Change the way America thinks.
     

  • THE CITIZENS LEAGUE
    Officials: Barry Commoner.
    Purpose: To bring “common cause” legal suits against various government agencies, especially in the defense industries.
     

  • WAR RESISTERS LEAGUE
    Officials: Noam Chomsky and David McReynolds.
    Purpose: To organize resistance to the Vietnam War among
    leftwing groups, students and the Hollywood “in crowd.”
     

  • THE DEMOCRATIC SOCIALIST ORGANIZING
    COMMITTEE OF THE INSTITUTE FOR
    DEMOCRATIC SOCIALISM
    Officials: Frank Zeider, Arthur Redier and David McReynolds.
    Purpose: A clearing house for leftwing socialist ideas and
    activities in the U.S and Europe.
     

  • ANTI-DEFAMATION LEAGUE FACT FINDING
    DIVISION
    Officials: IRWIN SUALL, also known as John Graham.
    Purpose: A joint FBI-British intelligence operation designed
    to single out rightwing groups and their leaders and put them out of
    business before they grow too large and too influential.
     

  • INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF MACHINISTS
    Purpose: A labor oriented front for the Socialist
    International and a hot-bed of organized labor unrest polarizing
    workers and
    management.
     

  • AMALGAMATED CLOTHING WORKERS
    Officials: Murray Findley, IRWIN SUALL and Jacob Scheinkman.
    Purpose: Much the same as the Machinists Union, to
    socialize and
    polarize workers in the garment trade.
     

  • A. PHILIP RANDOLPH INSTITUTE
    Officials: Bayard Rustin.
    Purpose: To provide a means of coordinating organizations
    with a common purpose, an example of which would be the spread of
    socialist ideas among college students and workers.
     

  • CAMBRIDGE POLICY STUDIES INSTITUTE
    Officials: Gar Apelrovitz.
    Purpose: To expand on the work being done at the Institute
    for Policy Studies. Founded in February 1969 by international
    socialist, Gar Apelrovitz, former assistant to Senator Gaylord
    Nelson. Apelrovitz wrote the controversial book ATOMIC DIPLOMACY
    for the Club of Rome which work was financed by the German Marshall
    Fund. It concentrates on research and action projects, with a stated
    goal of fundamentally changing American society, i.e., to create a
    Fabianist United States in preparation of the coming One World
    Government.
     

  • ECONOMIC COMMITTEE OF THE NORTH
    ATLANTIC INSTITUTE
    Officials: Dr. Aurellio Peccei.
    Purpose: NATO think-tank on global economic issues.
     

  • CENTER FOR THE STUDY OF DEMOCRATIC
    INSTITUTIONS
    Officials: Founder Robert Hutchins of the Committee of 300, Harry Ashmore, Frank Kelly and a large group of “Fellows.”
    Purpose: To spread ideas that will bring on social reforms
    of the liberal kind with democracy as an ideology. One of its
    activities is to draft a new constitution for the U.S. which will be
    strongly monarchical and socialistic as found in Denmark.

The Center is an “Olympian” stronghold. Located in Santa Barbara, it
is housed in what is affectionately called “the Parthenon.” Former
Representative John Rarick called it “an outfit loaded with
Communists.” By 1973 work on a new United States Constitution was in
its thirty-fifth draft which proposes an amendment guaranteeing
“environmental right,” the thrust of which is to reduce the
industrial base of the U.S. to a mere whisper of what it was in
1969. In other words, this institution is carrying out Club of Rome
zero-growth post-industrial policies laid down by the Committee of
300.


Some of its other aims are control of economic cycles, welfare,
regulation of business and national public works, con-trol of
pollution. Speaking on behalf of the Committee of 300, Ashmore says
the function of the CSDI is to find ways and means of making our
political system work more effectively. “We must change education
and we must consider a new U.S Constitution and a Constitution for
the world,” Ashmore says.


Further goals enunciated by Ashmore are as follows:

(1)   Membership of the U.N. must be made universal.
(2)   The U.N. must be strengthened.
(3)
  South East Asia must be neutralized. (For neutralized, read
“Communized.”)
(4)   Cold War must be ended.
(5)   Racial discrimination must be abolished.
(6)   Developing nations must be assisted. (Meaning assisted to
destruct.)
(7)   No military solutions to problems. (Pity they didn’t tell George
Bush that before the Gulf War.)
(8)   National solutions are not adequate.
(9)   Coexistence is necessary.

  • HARVARD PSYCHOLOGICAL CLINIC
    Officials: Dr. Kurt Lewin and staff of 15 new-science scientists.
    Purpose: To create a climate where the Committee of 300 can take
    unlimited power over the U.S.
     

  • INSTITUTE FOR SOCIAL RESEARCH
    Officials: Dr. Kurt Lewin and staff of 20 new-science scientists.
    Purpose: To devise a whole new set of social programs to steer
    America away from industry.
     

  • SCIENCE POLICY RESEARCH UNIT
    Officials: Leland Bradford, Kenneth Dam, Ronald Lippert.
    Purpose: A “Future Shocks” research institution at Sussex
    University in England and part of the Tavistock network.
     

  • SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION
    Officials: Sheldon Arenberg and a staff of hundreds, too numerous to
    mention here.
    Purpose: To coordinate all elements of the intelligence
    communities of the U.S.A. and Britain. It analyzes what “players” have to be assigned the role of a national entity; for example,
    Spain would come under a supine watered-down Catholic
    Church, the U.N. under the Secretary General and so forth. It
    developed the system of “X RAY 2” where think tank personnel,
    military installations and law enforcement centers are all linked
    to the Pentagon through a nation-wide network of Teletypes and
    computers: To apply surveillance techniques on a nation-wide
    scale. Arenberg says his ideas are non-military, but his techniques
    are mainly those he learned from the military. He was responsible
    for the New York State Identification and Intelligence System, a
    typical George Orwell “1984” project, which is completely
    illegal under our Constitution. The NYSIIS system is in the
    process of being adopted nationwide. It is what Brzezinsk
    referred to as the ability to almost instantaneously retrieve data
    about any person.

NYSIIS shares data with all law enforcement and govern-ment agencies
in the state. It provides storage and rapid retrieval of individual
records, criminal and social. It is a TYPICAL Committee of 300
project. There is a crying need for a full investigation to be
conducted into just what it is that Systems Development Corporation
is doing, but that is beyond the scope of this book. One thing is
sure, SDC is not there to preserve freedom and liberty guaranteed by
the U.S. Constitution. How convenient that it should be located in
Santa Barbara in easy reach of Robert Hutchins “Parthenon.”

 

Some
publications put out by these Club of Rome institutions are as
follows:

“Center Magazine”
“Counterspy”
“Coventry”
“Covert Action Information Bulletin”
“Dissent”
“Human Relations”
“Industrial Research”
“Inquiry”
“Mother Jones”
“One”
“Progressive”
“Raconteur”
“The New Republic”
“Working Papers for a New Society”

These are by no means all of the publications issued under the
auspices of the Club of Rome. There are many hundreds more, in fact
each of the foundations puts out its own publication. Given the
number of foundations run by the Tavistock Institute and the
Club of
Rome
, a partial listing is all we can include here. Some of the more
important foundations and think tanks are in the following list,
which includes Army think tanks.


The American public would be astounded if it only knew
how deeply the Army is involved in “new war tactics” research with
Committee of 300 “think tanks.” Americans are not aware that in 1946
the Club of Rome was ordered by the Committee of 300 to further the
progress of think tanks which it said offered a new means of
spreading the Committee’s philosophy.

 

The impact of these think
tanks upon our military, just since 1959 when they suddenly
proliferated, is truly astounding. There is no doubt that they will
play an even greater role in the daily affairs of this nation as we
come to the close of the 20th century.

  • THE MONT PELERIN SOCIETY
    Mont Pelerin is an economic foundation devoted to issuing misleading
    economic theories and influencing economists in the Western world to
    follow models it lays out from time to time. Its leading
    practitioners are Von Hayek and Milton Friedman.
     

  • THE HOOVER INSTITUTION
    Founded originally to fight Communism, the institution has slowly
    but surely turned toward Socialism. It has an annual budget of $2
    million, funded by companies under the umbrella of the Committee of
    300. It now concentrates on “peaceful changes” with emphasis on arms
    control and domestic U.S. problems. It is Frequently used by the
    news media as a “conser-vative” organization whose views they seek
    when a conservative viewpoint is needed. The Hoover Institution is
    far from that, and following the 1953 take-over of the Institution
    by a group allied to the Club of Rome, it has become a One World-New
    World Order
    outlet for “desirable” policies.
     

  • HERITAGE FOUNDATION
    Founded by brewery magnate Joseph Coors to act as a
    conservative think tank, Heritage was soon taken over by
    Fabianists
    Sir Peter Vickers Hall, Stuart Butler, Steven Ayzlei,
    Robert Moss and Frederich Von Hayek under the direction of
    the Club of Rome. This institute played a major role in carrying
    out British Labour leader Anthony Wedgewood Benn’s order to
    “Thatcherize Reagan.” Heritage is certainly not a conservative
    operation although at times it may look and sound like one.
     

  • HUMAN RESOURCES RESEARCH OFFICE.
    This is an Army research establishment dealing in
    psychotechnology.” Most of its personnel are Tavistock-trained.
    “Psychotechnology” covers GI motivation, morale and music used by
    the enemy. In fact a lot of what George Orwell wrote about in his
    book “1984” appears to be remarkably similar to what is taught at HUMRRO. In 1969, the
    Committee of 300 took over this important
    institution and turned it into a private non-profit organization run
    under the auspices of the Club of Rome. It is the largest behavioral
    research group in the U.S.


    One of its specialties is the study of small groups under stress
    and HUMRRO teaches the Army that a soldier is merely an extension of
    his equipment and has brought great influence to bear on the
    “man/weapon” system and its “human quality control,” so widely
    accepted by the United States Army. HUMRRO has had a very pronounced
    effect on how the Army conducts itself. Its mind-bending techniques
    are straight out of Tavistock. HUMRRO’S applied psychology courses
    are sup-posed to teach Army brass how to make the human weapon work.
    A good example of this is the manner in which soldiers in the war
    against Iraq were willing to disobey their field manual standing
    orders and bury 12,000 Iraqi soldiers alive.


    This type of brainwashing is terribly dangerous because
    today, it is applied to the Army, the Army applies it to brutally
    destroy thousands of “enemy” soldiers, and tomorrow the Army
    could be told that civilian population groups opposed to government policies are “the enemy.” We are already a mindless
    brainwashed flock of sheep, yet it seems that HUMRRO can
    take mind bending and mind control a step further. HUMRRO is
    a valuable adjunct to Tavistock and many of the lessons taught
    at HUMRRO were applied in the Gulf War, which makes it a
    little easier to understand how it came to be that American soldiers
    behaved as ruthless and heartless killers, a far cry from the
    concept of the traditional American fighting man.
     

  • RESEARCH ANALYSlS CORPORATION.
    This is
    HUMRRO’S sister “1984” organization situated in McLean,
    Virginia. Established in 1948, it was taken over by the Committee of
    300
    in 1961 when it became part of the Johns Hopkins bloc. It has
    worked on over 600 projects, including integrating Negroes into the
    Army, the tactical use of nuclear weapons, psychological warfare
    programs and mass population control.

Obviously there are many more major think tanks, and we shall come
to most of them in this book.

 

One of the most important areas of
cooperation between what think tanks turn out and what becomes
government and public policy are the “pollsters.” It is the job of
the polling companies to mold and shape public opinion in the way
that suits the conspirators. Polls are constantly being taken by
CBS-NBC-ABC, the New York Times, the Washington Post. Most of these
efforts are coordinated at the National Opinion Research Center
where, as much as it will amaze most of us, a psychological profile
was developed for the entire nation.


Findings are fed into the computers of Gallup Poll and Yankelovich,
Skelley and White for comparative evaluation. Much of what we read
in our newspapers or see on television has first been cleared by the
polling companies. WHAT WE SEE IS WHAT THE POLLSTERS THINK WE SHOULD
SEE.


This is called “public opinion making.”

 

The whole idea behind
this bit of social conditioning is to find out how responsive the
public is to POLICY DIRECTIVES handed down by the Committee of 300. We are called “targeted population groups” and
what is measured by the pollsters is how much resistance is
generated to what appears in the “Nightly News.” Later, we
shall learn exactly how this deceptive practice got started and
who is responsible for it.


It is all part of the elaborate opinion-making process created at,
Tavistock. Today our people believe they are well-informed but what
they do not realize is that the opinions they believe are their own
were in fact created in the research institutions and think tanks of
America and that none of us are free to form our own opinions
because of the information we are provided with by the media and the
pollsters.


Polling was brought to a fine art just before the United States
entered the Second World War. Americans, unbeknown to themselves,
were conditioned to look upon Germany and Japan as dangerous enemies
who had to be stopped. In a sense, this was true, and that makes
conditioned thinking all the more dangerous, because based on the
INFORMATlON fed to them, the enemy did indeed appear to be Germany
and Japan. Just recently we saw how well Tavistock’s conditioning
process works when Americans were conditioned to perceive Iraq as a
threat and Saddam Hussein as a personal enemy of the United States.


Such a conditioning process is technically described as “the message
reaching the sense organs of persons to be influenced.” One of the
most respected of all pollsters is Committee of 300 member Daniel Yankelovich, of the company,
Yankelovich, Skelley and White. Yankelovich is proud to tell his students that polling is a tool to
change public opinion, although this is not original, Yankelovich
having drawn his inspiration from David Naisbett’s book “TREND
REPORT” which was commissioned by the Club of Rome.


In his book Naisbett describes all of the techniques used by
public opinion makers to bring about the public opinion desired
by the Committee of 300. Public opinion making is the jewel in the
crown of the OLYMPIANS, for with their thousands of new-science social scientists at their beck and call, and with the news
media firmly in their hands, NEW public opinions on almost
any subject can be created and disseminated around the world in
a matter of two weeks.
 

This is precisely what happened when their servant George Bush
was
ordered to make war on Iraq. Within two weeks, not only the U.S. but
almost the entire world public opinion was turned against Iraq and
its President Saddam Hussein.

 

These media change artists and news
manipulators report directly to the Club of Rome which in turn
reports to the Committee of 300 at whose head sits the Queen of
England ruling over a vast network of closely-linked corporations
who never pay taxes and are answerable to no one, who fund their
research institutions through foundations whose joint activities
have almost total control over our daily lives.


Together with their interlocking companies, insurance business,
banks, finance corporations, oil companies, newspapers, magazines,
radio and television, this vast apparatus sits astride the United
States and the world. There is not a politician in Washington D.C.
who is not, somehow, beholden to it. The Left rails against it,
calling it “imperialism” which indeed it is, but the left is run by
the same people, the very same ones who control the right, so that
the left is no more free than we are!


Scientists engaged in the process of conditioning are called “social
engineers
” or “new-science social scientists” and they play an
integral part in what we see, hear and read. The “old school” social
engineers were Kurt K. Lewin, Professor Hadley Cantril,
Margaret
Meade, Professor Derwin Cartwright and Professor Lipssitt who,
together with John Rawlings Reese, made up the backbone of
new-science scientists at Tavistock Institute.


During the Second World War, there were over 100 re-searchers at
work under the direction of Kurt Lewin, copying slavishly the
methods adopted by Reinhard Heydrich of the S.S.


The OSS was based on Heydrich’s methodology and, as we
know, the OSS was the forerunner of the Central Intelligence
Agency. The point of all this is that the governments of Britain
and the United States already have the machinery in place to
bring us into line in a New World Order with only a slight modicum
of resistance materializing, and this machinery has been in place
since 1946. Each passing year has added new refinements.


It is this Committee of 300 which has established control networks
and mechanisms far more binding than anything ever seen in this
world. Chains and ropes are not needed to restrain us.

 

Our fear of
what is to come does that job far more efficiently than any physical
means of restraint. We have been brainwashed to give up our
Constitutional right to bear arms; to give up our Constitution
itself; to allow the United Nations to exercise control over our
foreign policies and the IMF to take control of our fiscal and
monetary policies; to permit the President to break United States
law with impunity and to invade a foreign country and kidnap its
head-of-state. In short we have been brainwashed to the extent where
we, as a nation, will accept each and every lawless act carried out
by our government almost without question.


I for one know that we will soon have to fight to reclaim our
country from the Committee, or lose it forever. BUT when it comes
right down to it, how many will actually take up arms? In 1776 only
3% of the populace took up arms against King George III.

 

This time
around, 3% will be woefully inadequate. We should not allow
ourselves to be led down dead-end roads, for that is what our mind
controllers have planned for us by confronting us with such a
complexity of issues that we simply succumb to long range
penetration and make no decisions at all on many vital issues.


We shall be looking at the names of those who make up the
Committee of 300 but, before we do that, we should examine
the massive interfacing of all important institutions, companies
and banks under the Committee’s control. We must mark them
well because these are the people who are deciding who shall
live and who shall be eliminated as “useless eaters”; where we
will worship God, what we must wear and even what we shall
eat. According to Brzezinski, we shall be under endless
surveillance around the clock for 365 days a year ad infinitum.


That we have been betrayed from within is being accepted by more and
more people each year, and that is good, because it is through
knowledge, a word translated from the word BELIEF, that we shall be
able to defeat the enemies of all mankind. While we were being
distracted by the bogeymen in the Kremlin, the Trojan Horse was
moved into position in Washington D.C.

 

The greatest danger free
people face today is not from Moscow but from Washington D.C. We
need first to conquer the DOMESTIC ENEMY, and after that we will be
strong enough to mount an offensive to remove Communism from the
earth together with all of its attendant “isms.”


The Carter Administration accelerated the collapse of our economy
and our military strength, the latter begun by Club of Rome and

Lucis Trust
member Robert Strange McNamara. In spite of his
promises, Reagan continued to undermine our industrial base,
starting where Carter left off. While we need to keep our defenses
strong, we cannot do that from a weak industrial base for, without
a well-run military-industrial complex, we cannot have a viable
defense system. The Committee of 300 recognizes this and planned
from 1953 its zero-growth post-industrial policies now in full
flower.


Thanks to the Club of Rome our technology potential has
dropped below that of Japan and Germany, nations we are
supposed to have defeated in the Second World War. How has
this come about? Because of men like Dr. Alexander King and
our blindfolded state of mind, we have failed to recognize the
destruction of our educational institutions and systems of
teaching.

 

As a result of our blindness, we are no longer training
engineers and scientist in sufficient numbers to keep us among
the industrialized nations of the world. Thanks to Dr. King, a
man very few people in America know about, education in the
U.S. is at its lowest level since 1786. Statistics produced by the
Institute for Higher Learning show that the reading and writing
capabilities of high school children the United States are LOWER
than they were among high school children in 1786.


What we face today is not only the loss of our freedom and the very
fabric of our nation, but far worse, the possibility of the loss of
our souls. The steady chipping away at the foundation upon which
this republic rests has left an empty void, which satanists and
cultists are rushing to fill with their synthetic soul material.
This truth is difficult to accept and appreciate because there was
nothing SUDDEN about these events. If a sudden shock were to hit us,
a cultural and religious shock, we would be shaken out of our
apathy.


But gradualism – which is what Fabianism is, does nothing to raise the
alarm. Because the vast majority of Americans can see no MOTIVATION
for the things I have described, they cannot accept it, and so the
conspiracy is scorned and often mocked. By creating chaos through
presenting hundreds of daily choices our people have to make, we
have come down to a position where, unless motivation can be clearly
shown, all information is rejected.


This is both the weak and the strong link in the conspiratorial
chain. Most thrust aside anything that has no motive, so the
conspirators feel safe behind the ridicule poured upon those who
point to the coming crisis in our nation and our individual lives.
However, if we can get enough people to see the truth, the
motivation block gets weaker until it will eventually be forced
aside as more and more people become enlightened and the notion that
“this cannot happen in America” is dispensed with.


The Committee of 300 is counting on our maladaptive responses to govern our reaction to created events, and it will not
be disappointed as long as we as a nation continue in the present
way we respond. We must turn responses to created crises into
ADAPTIVE responses by identifying the conspirators and exposing their plans for us, so that these things become public
knowledge.

 

The

Club of Rome
has already made THE TRANSITION TO BARBARISM. Instead of waiting to be “raptured,”
we must stop the Committee of 300 before it can accomplish its goal
of making us prisoners of the” New Dark Age” planned for us. It is
not up to God, IT IS UP TO US. We have to take the necessary action.


All information that I provide in this book comes from years of
research backed up by impeccable intelligence sources. Nothing is
exaggerated. It is factual and precise so do not fall into the trap
set by the enemy that this material is “disinformation.”

 

For the
past two decades I have provided information which has proved to be
highly accurate and which has explained a lot of puzzling events. My
hope is that through this book, a better, clearer and wider
understanding of the conspiratorial forces ranged against this
nation will come about. That hope is being realized as more and more
young people are beginning to ask questions and seek information
about what is REALLY going on.


It is difficult for people to comprehend that these conspirators
are real and that they have the power I and many others have
attributed to them. Many have written to ask how it is that our
government does nothing about the terrible threat to civilization?
The problem is that our government is PART of the problem, part of
the conspiracy, and nowhere and at no time has this become more
clearly evident than during the Bush Presidency. Of course
President Bush knows precisely what the Committee of 300 is doing to
us. HE WORKS FOR THEM. Others have written to say, “We thought we
were fighting the government.” Of course we are, but behind
government stands a force so powerful and all-encompassing that
intelligence agencies are even afraid to mention the name
“Olympians.”


Proof of the Committee of 300 is found in the vast number of
powerful institutions owned and controlled by it.

 

Listed here are
some of the more important ones, all of which come under the MOTHER
OF ALL THINK TANKS AND RESEARCH INSTITUTIONS, THE TAVISTOCK
INSTITUTE OF HUMAN RELATIONS with its far-flung network of hundreds
of “branches.”

 

 

 

STANFORD RESEARCH CENTER

Stanford Research Center (SRC) was founded in 1946 by the

Tavistock
Institute For Human Relations
.

 

Stanford was created to help Robert
0. Anderson and his ARCO oil company, who had secured for the
Committee of 300 the oil rights on the North Slope of Alaska.
Basically, the job was too large for Anderson’s Aspen Institute to
handle, so a new center had to be founded and funded. That new
center was Stanford Research Center.

 

Alaska sold its rights on a downpayment of $900 million, a relatively small amount for the
Committee of 300. The governor of Alaska was steered to SRI for help
and advice. This was no accident but the result of judicious
planning and a process of long-range conditioning.


Following the governor’s call for help, three SRI scientists set up
shop in Alaska where they met with the Alaskan Secretary of State
and the State Planning Office. Francis Greehan, who headed the SRI
team, assured the Governor that his problem of how to handle the
rich oil find would be safe in the hands of SRI. Naturally Greehan
did not mention the Committee of 300 or the Club of Rome. In less
than a month Greehan assembled a team of economists, petroleum
scientists and new-science scientists numbering in the hundreds.
The report SRI gave to the Governor ran to eighty-eight pages.


The proposal was adopted virtually without change by the Alaska
legislature in 1970. Greehan had indeed done a remark-able job for
the Committee of 300. From this beginning SRI developed into an
institution employing 4000 people with an annual budget of $160
million plus. Its President, Charles A.
Anderson, has seen much of this growth during his tenure, as
has Professor Willis Harmon, director of the SRI Center for the
Study of Social Policies, employing hundreds of new-science
scientists, many of the top staffers having been transferred from Tavistock’s London base.

 

One of those was RCA board chairman and former British intelligence agent, David Sarnoff, who
was closely involved with Harmon and his team for twenty-five
years. Sarnoff was something of a “watchdog” for the mother
institute in Sussex.


Stanford claims to make no moral judgments on projects it accepts,
working for Israel and the Arabs, South Africa and Libya but, as one
would imagine, by adopting this attitude it ensures an “inside edge”
with foreign governments that the CIA has found most useful. In
Jim
Ridgeway’s book, “THE CLOSED CORPORATION,” SRI spokesman Gibson
brags about SRI’s non-discriminatory stance. Although not on the
Federal Contract Research Center lists, SRI is today the largest
military think tank, dwarfing Hudson and Rand. Among SRl’s specialty departments are chemical and biological warfare
experimental centers.


One of Stanford’s more dangerous activities is counter-insurgency
operations aimed at civilian populations – just the sort of “1984”
things government is already using against its own people. The U.S.
government pays SRI millions of dollars each year for this kind of
highly controversial “research.” Following student protests against
chemical warfare experiments conducted at Stanford, SRI “sold”
itself to a private group for just $25 million. Of course nothing
really changed, SRI was still a Tavistock project and the
Committee
of 300
still owned it, but the gullible appeared to be satisfied by
this meaningless cosmetic change.


In 1958 a startling new development arose. Advanced Re-search
Products Agency (ARPA), a contracting agency for the
Defense Department, approached SRI with a top secret
proposal. John Foster
at the Pentagon told SRI that what was needed was a program to
insure the United States against “technological surprise.” Foster
wanted to perfect a condition where the environment became a weapon;
special bombs to trigger volcanos and/or earthquakes, behavioral
research on potential enemies and minerals and metals with potential
for new weapons. The project was accepted by SRI and code-named
“SHAKY.”


The massive electronic brain in SHAKY was capable of carrying out
many commands, its computers having been constructed
by IBM for SRI. Twenty-eight scientists worked on what is called
“Human Augmentation.”

 

The IBM computer even has the capability to
solve problems by analogy and recognizes and identifies scientists
who work with it. The “special applications” of this tool can be
better imagined than described. Brzezinski knew what he was talking
about when he wrote “THE TECHNOTRONIC ERA.”


Stanford Research Institute works closely with scores of civilian
consulting firms, trying to apply military technology to domestic
situations. This has not always been a success, but as techniques
improve, the prospects for massive all-pervading surveillance, as
described by Brzezinski, daily becomes more real. IT ALREADY EXISTS
AND IS IN USE, EVEN THOUGH SLIGHT MALFUNCTIONS FROM TIME TO TIME
HAVE TO BE IRONED OUT. One such civilian consulting firm was
Schriever McKee Associates of McLean, Virginia, run by retired
General Bernard A. Schriever, a former chief of the Air Force
Systems Command, who developed the Titan, Thor, Atlas and Minuteman
rockets.


Schriever put together a consortium of Lockheed, Emmerson Electric,
Northrop, Control Data, Raytheon and TRW under the name of URBAN
SYSTEMS ASSOCIATES, INC. The purpose of the consortium? To solve
social and psychological “urban problems” by means of military
techniques using advanced electronic systems. It is interesting to
note that TRW became the largest credit information collecting
company in the credit-reporting business as a result and an outcome
of its work with Urban Systems Associates, Inc.


This should tell us a great deal about just how far this nation is
already under TOTAL SURVEILLANCE, which is the first requirement of
the Committee of 300. No dictatorship, especially not one on a
global scale, can function without total control over each and every
individual. SRI was well on its way to becoming a key Committee of
300
research organization.

By the 1980’s, 60% of SRl’s contracts were devoted to
“Futurism” with both military and civilian applications. Its major clients
were the,

  • U.S. Department of Defense-Directorate of Defense Research
    and Engineering

  • Office of Aerospace Re-search which dealt with
    “Applications of the Behavioral Sciences to Research Management”

  • Executive Office of the President

  • Office of Science and Technology

  • U.S. Department of Health

On behalf of the Department of Health,
SRI ran a program called “’Patterns in ESDEA Title I Reading
Achievement Tests.” Other clients were the,

  • U.S. Department of
    Energy

  • U.S. Department of Labor

  • U.S. Department of
    Transportation

  • National Science Foundation (NSF)

Of
significance was the paper developed for NSF, entitled “Assessment
of Future and International Problems.”


Stanford Research, under the tutelage of Tavistock Institute in
London
, put together a far reaching and chilling system it called
“Business Intelligence Program.” In excess of 600 companies in the
U.S. and abroad became subscribers. The program covered research in,

  • Japanese Foreign Business Relations

  • Consumer Marketing in a Period
    of Change

  • The Mounting Challenge of International Terrorism

  • Sensory Evaluation in Consumer Products

  • Electronic Funds Transfer
    System

  • Opto-Electric Sensing

  • Exploratory Planning Methods

  • U.S. Defense Industry and Capital Availability

Among the TOP
Committee of 300 companies
who became clients of this program were,

  • Bechtel Corporation (George Schultz was on its board)

  • Hewlett
    Packard

  • TRW

  • Bank of America

  • Shell Company

  • RCA

  • Blyth

  • Eastman
    Dillon

  • Saga Foods Corporation

  • McDonnell Douglas

  • Crown Zellerbach

  • Wells Fargo Bank

  • Kaiser Industries

But one of the most sinister of all SRI programs with the
possibilities of doing tremendous damage in altering the direction in which the United States will go, socially, morally and
religiously, was Stanford’s Charles F. Kettering Foundation’s
CHANGING IMAGES OF MAN” under Stanford official
reference “Contract Number URH (489)-2150 Policy Research
Report Number 4/4/74, Prepared by the SRI Center for the Study of
Social Policy, Director Willis Harmon.”

 

This is probably one of the
most far-reaching investigations into how man might be changed that
has ever been conducted.


The report, covering 319 pages, was written by 14 new science
scientists under the supervision of Tavistock and 23 top controllers
including B. F. Skinner, Margaret Meade, Ervin Lazlo and
Sir Geoffrey Vickers, a high-level British intelligence officer in M16.
It will be recalled that his son-in-law, Sir Peter Vickers Hall, was
a founding member of the so-called conservative “Heritage
Foundation
.” Much of the 3000 pages of “recommendations” given to
the Reagan administration in January 1981 were based upon material
taken from Willis Harmon’s “CHANGING IMAGES OF MAN.”


I was privileged to receive a copy of “THE CHANGING IMAGES OF MAN
from my intelligence colleagues five days after it was accepted by
the United States government. What I read shocked me, as I realized
I was looking at a blueprint for a future America, unlike anything I
had ever seen before.

 

The nation was to be programmed to change and
become so accustomed to such planned changes that it would hardly
be noticeable when profound changes did occur. We have gone downhill
so fast since “THE AQUARIAN CONSPIRACY” (the book title of
Willis
Harmon’s technical paper) was written, that today, divorce draws no
stigma, suicide is at an all time high and raises few eyebrows,
social deviations from the norm and sexual aberrations, once
unmentionable in decent circles, are now commonplace and excite no
special protest.


As a nation we have not noticed how “CHANGING IMAGES
OF MANKIND
” has radically altered our American way of life
forever. Somehow we were overcome by the “Watergate Syndrome.” For a while we were shocked and dismayed to learn
that Nixon was nothing but a cheap crook who hobnobbed with
Earl Warren’s Mafia friends at the beautiful home they built for
him adjoining the Nixon estate.

 

When too many “future shocks”
and news headlines demanded our attention, we lost our way, or
rather, the huge number of choices with which we were and still are
daily confronted, confused us to such a degree that we were no
longer able to make the necessary choices.


Worse yet, having been subjected to a barrage of crimes in high
places, plus the trauma of the Vietnam War, our nation seemed no
longer to want truths. Such reaction is carefully explained in
Willis Harmon’s technical paper, in short, the American nation was
reacting exactly as profiled. Worse yet, in not wishing to accept
truth, we took matters a step further: We looked to government to
shield us from the truth.


The corrupt stench of the Reagan-Bush Administrations we wanted
covered with six feet of earth. The crimes committed under the title
of Iran/Contra affair (or scandals), we didn’t want uncovered. We
let our President lie to us regarding his where abouts in the period
October 20-23rd, 1980. Yet these crimes far exceed in quantity and
scope anything Nixon did while he was in office. Do we as a nation
recognize it as going downhill with our brakes off?


No, we do not. When those whose business it is to bring the truth to
the American people that a private, well-organized little government
inside the White House was busy committing one crime after another,
crimes which attacked the very soul of this nation and the
republican institutions upon which it rested, we were told not to
bother the public with such things. “We really don’t want to know
about all this speculation,” became a standard response.


When the highest elected official of the land blatantly put U.N. law
above the Constitution of the United States – an impeachable offense,
the majority accepted it as “normal.” When the highest elected
official of the land went to war without a Congressional declaration
of war, the fact was censored out by the news media and, again, we
accepted it rather than face the truth.


When the Gulf War, which our President plotted and planned,
began, not only were we happy with censorship of the most
blatant kind, we even took it to our hearts, believing that it was
“good to the war effort.”

 

Our President lied, April Glaspie
lied,
the State Department lied. They said the war was justified because
President Hussein had been warned to leave Kuwait alone. When
Glaspie’s cables to the State Department were finally made public,
one United States Senator after another went charging to defend Glaspie, the harlot. It mattered not that they came from both the
Democrats and the Republicans.

 

We, the people, let them get away
with their vile lies.

 

 

 

Section 2

 

In this public attitude of the American people, the wildest dreams
of Willis Harmon and his teams of scientists became a reality.

 

The
Tavistock Institute was elated at its success in destroying the self
respect and self esteem of this once great nation. We are told that
we won the Gulf War. What is not yet perceived by the vast majority
of Americans is that, in winning the war, it cost the self respect
and honor of our nation.

 

That lies rotting in the desert sands of
Kuwait and Iraq, alongside the corpses of the Iraqi soldiers we
butchered in the agreed retreat from Kuwait and Basra – we could not
keep our word that we would abide by the Geneva Conventions and not
attack them. “What do you want,” our controllers asked us, “victory
or self respect? You can’t have both.”


One hundred years ago, this could not have happened, but now it has
happened and excites no comment. We have succumbed to the long
range penetration warfare waged against this nation by Tavistock.

 

Like the German nation, defeated by the Prudential Bombing Survey,
enough of us have succumbed to make this nation the kind that
totalitarian regimes of the past would have only envisaged in their
dreams.

“Here,” they would say, “is a nation, one of the largest in
the world, that doesn’t want the truth. All of our propaganda
agencies can be dispensed with. We don’t have to struggle to keep
the truth from this nation, they have willingly rejected it of their
own volition. This nation is a pushover.”

Our once proud Republic of the United States of America
became no more than a series of criminal front organizations, which
history shows is always the start of totalitarianism. This is the
stage of permanent alteration we are at in America as 1991 drew to a
close. We live in a throw-away society, programmed not to last. We
do not even flinch at the 4 million homeless nor the 30 million
jobless, nor the 15 million babies murdered thus far.

 

They are
“throw-aways” of the Age of Aquarius, a conspiracy so damnable that,
when first confronted with it, the majority will disavow its
existence, rationalizing these events as “times have changed.”


This is how the Tavistock Institute and Willis Harmon programmed us
to react. Dismantling of our ideals goes on without protest. The
spiritual and intellectual drive of our people has been destroyed!

 

On May 27th, 1991, President Bush made a very profound statement,
the thrust of which appears to have been totally misused by most
political commentators:

“The moral dimension of American policy requires us to chart a moral
course through a world of lesser evils. That is the real world, not
black and white. Very few moral absolutes.”

What else could we expect from a President who is most probably the
most evil man ever to occupy the White House?


Consider this in the light of his order to the military to bury
alive 12,000 Iraqi soldiers. Consider this in the light of his
ongoing war of genocide against the Iraqi people. President Bush was
delighted to characterize President Saddam Hussein as the “Hitler of
our times.” He never bothered to offer a single scrap of proof. It
was not needed. Because President Bush made the statement, we
accepted it without question. Consider this in the bright light of
truth, that he did all of these things in the name of the American
people while secretly taking his orders from the Committee of 300.


But, more than anything else, consider this: President Bush
and his controllers feel so secure that they no longer deem it
necessary to hide their evil control of the American people, or to
lie about it.

 

This is self-evident in the statement that he, as our
leader, will make all manner of compromises with truth, honesty and
decency if his controllers (and ours) deem it necessary. On May
27th, 1991, the President of the United States abandoned each and
every principle embodied in our Constitution and boldly proclaimed
that he was no longer bound by it. This is a great victory for the Tavistock Institute and the Prudential Bombing Survey, whose target
changed from German worker housing in 1945 to the soul of the
American people in a war that began in 1946 and runs through to
1992.


Increased pressure on this nation for change was applied by Stanford
Research Institute
in the early 1960’s. SRl’s offensive gathered
power and momentum. Switch on your television set and you will see
Stanford’s victory in front of your very eyes: talk shows featuring
heavy sexual details, special video channels where perversion, rock
and roll and drugs reign supreme. Where once John Wayne ruled, we
now have a made-over apology for a man (or is he?) called Michael
Jackson, a parody of a human being who is held up as a hero, as he
gyrates, shuffles, mumbles and screams his way across television
screens in millions of American homes.


A woman who has been through a series of marriages gets national
coverage. One filthy, half-washed drug-ridden decadent rock band
after another has hours of air time devoted to its inane sounds and
mad gyrations, clothes fashions and language aberrations. Soap
operas showing as near as “dammit” is to wearing pornographic scenes
draw no comment.

 

Whereas in early 1960 this would never have been
tolerated, today it is accepted as normal. We have been subjected
and we have succumbed to what Tavistock Institute calls “future
shocks” whose future is NOW and we are so numbed by one cultural
shock after another that to protest seems like a futile gesture and,
therefore, logically we think, it does no good to protest.

In 1986 the Committee of 300 ordered the pressure turned up.

 

The
U.S. was not going down fast enough. The United States began the
process of “recognizing” the butchers of Cambodia, the criminal Pol
Pot regime, self confessors to the murder of 2 million Cambodian
citizens. In 1991, the wheel turned the full circle. The United
States went to war against a friendly nation that had been
programmed to trust the Washington traitors. We accused President
Hussein of the small nation of Iraq of all manner of evil, NONE OF
WHICH WAS EVEN REMOTELY TRUE. We killed and maimed its children, we
left them to starve and to die of all manner of diseases.


In the same breath we sent the Bush emissaries of the Committee of
300 to Cambodia to RECOGNIZE THE EVIL MASS MURDERERS OF 2 MILLION
CAMBODIANS, who were sacrificed by the Committee of 300’s
depopulation of cities experiment, which the big cities of the
United States will experience in the not too distant future.

 

Now,
President Bush and his Committee of 300-ridden administration say,
in effect,

“Look people, what do you want from me? I told you that I
will compromise where I see fit, even when that means sleeping with
the Pol Pot murderers. SO WHAT – KISS MY HIPS.”

The level of pressure for change will reach its peak in 1993 and we
shall witness scenes such as we would never have thought possible.
Punch drunk America will react, but ever so slightly. Not even the
latest threat to our freedom, the personal computer card disturbs
us. Willis Harman’s “CHANGING IMAGES OF MAN” would have been too
technical for most so the service of Marilyn Ferguson was obtained
to make it more easily understood. “THE AGE OF AQUARIUS” heralded
nude stage shows and a song which made the top of the charts: “The
Dawning of the Age of the Aquarius” swept the globe.


The personal computer card which, when fully distributed, will deprive us of our familiar environment and, as we shall see,
environment means a lot more than the usually accepted meaning of the word. The United States has gone through a period of
intense trauma such as has never been visited on any other nation in
the history of the world, and the worst is yet to come.


Everything is going according to what Tavistock ordered and what the
social scientists at Stanford mapped out. Times do not change; they
are made to change. All changes are preplanned and come as the
result of careful action. We have been changed gradually at first,
but now the pace of change is picking up. The United States is being
transformed from One Nation Under God to a polyglot of nations under
several gods. The U.S. is no longer One nation under God. The
framers of the Constitution have lost the battle.


Our forebears spoke a common language and believed in a common
religion Christianity, and held common ideals. There were no aliens
in our midst; that came later in a deliberately planned attempt to
break up the United States into a series of fragmented
nationalities, cultures and beliefs. If you doubt this, go down to
the East Side of New York, or the West Side of Los Angeles on any
given Saturday and look around you.

 

The United States has become
several nations struggling to coexist under a common system of
government. When the floodgates of immigration were opened wide by Franklin D. Roosevelt, a cousin of the head of the Committee of 300,
the cultural shock caused great confusion and dislocation and made
“One Nation” an unworkable concept. The Club of Rome and
NATO have
exacerbated the situation. “Love thy neighbor” is an ideal that will
not work unless your neighbor “is as yourself.”


To the framers of our Constitution, the truths they laid out For
future generations were “self evident” – to themselves Being unsure that future generations would also find the truths to
which they bound this nation self evident, THEY SET ABOUT
SPELLlNG THEM OUT. IT SEEMS THAT THEY WERE
AFRAID OF A TIME THAT MIGHT COME WHEN THE
TRUTHS THEY ESPOUSED WOULD NO LONGER BE
SELF-EVIDENT.

 

The Tavistock Institute for Human Relations has made sure that what the framers feared might come to pass
has indeed come to pass. That time has arrived with Bush and his “no
absolutes” and his

New World Order
under the
Committee of 300.


This is part of the concept of social changes forced upon Americans
which Harmon and the Club of Rome said would make for severe trauma
and a great building up of pressure. The social upheavals that have
taken place since the advent of Tavistock, the Club of Rome and
NATO
will continue in the U.S. for as long as the limit of absorption is
ignored. Nations are made up of individuals and, like individuals,
there is a limit to their ability to absorb changes, no matter how
robust they may be.


This psychological truth was well proven by the Strategic Bombing
Survey which called for saturation bombing of Ger-man worker
housing. As mentioned earlier, the project was the work of the
Prudential Insurance Company and no one doubts today that Germany
suffered its defeat because of this operation. Many of the
scientists who worked on that project are working on saturation
bombing of America, or else they have passed on, leaving their
skilled techniques in the hands of others who followed behind them.


The legacy they left behind them can be found in the fact that we
have not so much lost our way as a nation, but that we have been
steered in a direction opposite to that which the framers of the
Declaration guided us for over 200 years. We have, in short, lost
contact with our historical genes, our faith, which inspired
countless generations of Americans to move forward as a nation,
benefiting from the patrimony left to us by the framers of the
Declaration of Independence and the United States Constitution. That
we are lost is clear to all who seek the truth, as unpleasant as it
may be.


With President Bush and his “no absolute morals” guiding us, we
blunder ahead as lost nations and individuals tend to do.


We are collaborating with the Committee of 300 for our own
downfall and our own enslavement. Some sense it – and feel a
strong sense of unease. The various conspiracy theories they are
80
familiar with do not seem to cover it all. This is because they know
nothing of the Conspirators’ Hierarchy, The Committee of 300.


These souls who feel a deep sense of unease and that some-thing is
radically wrong, yet cannot put their collective fingers on the
problem, walk in darkness.

 

They look to a future they see slipping
away from them. The American dream has become a mirage. They place
their faith in religion but take no steps to help that faith along
by ACTION. Americans will never experience a retracing of steps
such as the Europeans experienced when at the height of the Dark
Ages. By determined ACTlON, they awoke in themselves a spirit of
renewal which resulted in the glorious Renaissance.


The enemy that has directed them to this point decided to make a
strong move against the United States in 1980, so that Renaissance
of America would be impossible. Who is the enemy? The enemy is no
faceless “they.” The enemy is clearly identifiable as the Committee
of 300
, the Club of Rome, NATO and all of its affiliated
organizations, the think tanks and research institutions controlled
by Tavistock.

 

There is no need to use “they” or “the enemy” except
as shorthand. WE KNOW WHO “THEY,” THE ENEMY, IS. The Committee of
300 with its Eastern Liberal Establishment “aristocracy,” its banks,
insurance companies, giant corporations, foundations, communications
networks, presided over by a HIERARCHY OF CONSPIRATORS – THIS IS THE
ENEMY.


This is the power that brought to life the reign of terror in
Russia, the Bolshevik Revolution, World Wars I and II, Korea,
Vietnam, the fall of Rhodesia, South Africa, Nicaragua, and the
Philippines. This is the secret upper-level government that brought
into existence the controlled disintegration of the U.S. economy and
deindustrialized what was once the greatest indusrial power, for
good, that the world had ever known.


America today can be compared with a soldier who falls
asleep in the thick of battle. We Americans have fallen asleep,
given way to apathy caused by being confronted with a multiplicity
of choices which has confused us. These are the changes that alter
our environment, break down our resistance to change so that we
become dazed, apathetic and eventually fall asleep in the thick of
battle.


There is a technical term for this condition. It is called “long
range penetration strain.” The art of subjecting a very large group
of people to continued long range penetration strain was developed
by scientists working out of the Tavistock Institute of Human
Relations
and their U. S. subsidiaries, Stanford Research and Rand
Corporation, and at least another 150 research institutions here in
the U.S.


Dr. Kurt Lewin, the scientist who developed this fiendish warfare,
has caused the average American patriot to fret over various
conspiracy theories, leaving him or her with a feeling of
uncertainty and insecurity, isolated and perhaps even afraid, as he
searches, but fails to understand the decay and rot caused by “THE
CHANGING IMAGES OF MANKIND,” unable to identify or combat the
social, moral, economic and political changes he deems undesirable
and does not want, yet which increase in intensity on every hand.


Dr. Lewin’s name will not be found in any of our establishment
history books which, in any event, are a record of events mostly
from the side of the ruling class or the victors of wars. Therefore,
it is with pride that I introduce his name to you. As mentioned
before, Dr. Lewin organized the Harvard Psycho-logical Clinic and
the Institute for Social Research under the auspices of the
Tavistock Institute. The names do not give much indication of the
purpose of the two organizations.


This reminds me of the infamous bill to reform coinage and
mint laws passed in 1827. The title of the bill was harmless
enough or sounded harmless, which was the intention of its
backers. Through this Act, Senator John Sherman betrayed the
nation into the hands of the international bankers. Sherman
allegedly sponsored the bill “without reading it.”

 

As we know,
the bill’s true purpose was to demonetize silver and give the
thieving bankers unlimited power over the credit of our nation;
powers to which the bankers were clearly not entitled under the
clear and unmistakable terms of the U.S. Constitution.


Kurt Lewin gave the Tavistock Institute, the Club of
Rome
and NATO
unlimited power over America, to which no organization, entity or
society is entitled. These institutions have used the usurped powers
to destroy the will of the nation to resist the plans and intentions
of the conspirators to rob us of the fruits of the American
Revolution and steer us on a course leading directly to a New Dark
Ages under a One World Government.


Lewin’s colleagues in this long range penetration objective were:

  • Richard Crossman

  • Eric Trist

  • H. V. Dicks

  • Willis Harmon

  • Charles
    Anderson

  • Garner Lindsay

  • Richard Price

  • W. R. Bion

Again, these
names never appear in the evening news; in fact, they only appear in
scientific journals – so very few Americans are aware of them and not
at all aware of what the men behind the names have done and are
doing to the United States.


President Jefferson once said he pitied those who thought they knew
what was taking place through reading the newspaper. Disraeli, the
British prime minister, said much the same thing. Indeed, down
through the ages, rulers have delighted in running things from
behind the scenes. Man has always felt the need to dominate and
nowhere and at no time is the desire more prevalent than in this
modern era.


If it were not so, why all the need for secret societies? If we are
ruled by an open system run by democratically elected officials, why
the need for a secret Masonic order in every village, town and city
across the United States? How is it that Freemasonry can operate so
openly and yet keep its secrets so well hidden? We can’t ask the
Nine Unknown Men of the Nine Sisters Lodge in Paris that question,
nor can we ask it of their nine fellows in the Quatuar Coronati
Lodge
in London. Yet these eighteen men form part of an even
more secret government, the RIIA, and beyond that, the
Committee of 300.

How is it that the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry could brain-wash
John Hinckley to shoot President Reagan? Why do we have such secret
orders as the Knights of St. John of Jerusalem, the
Round Table
, the
Milner Group and so on down line upon line of

secret societies
?

 

They
form part of a world-wide chain of command and control running
through the Club of Rome, NATO, the RIIA and finally right up to the
Conspirators’ Hierarchy, The Committee of 300. Men need these secret
societies because their deeds are evil and must be hidden. Evil
cannot stand in the light of truth.


In this book we shall find an almost complete list of the
conspirators, their institutions, fronts and publications. In 1980
the Aquarian Conspiracy was in full swing and its success can be
seen in every facet of our private and national life. The
overwhelming rise in mindless violence, serial killers, teenage
suicides, the unmistakable signs of lethargy – “long range penetration” is a part of our new environment, as dangerous, if not
more so, than the polluted air that we breathe.


The coming of the Age of Aquarius caught America totally unprepared.
We as a nation were not prepared for the changes about to be forced
upon us. Who ever had heard of Tavistock, Kurt Lewin,
Willis Harmon and John Rawlings Reese?

 

They were not even on the American
political scene. What we would have noticed, if we bothered to look
at all, was a falling off of our ability to withstand futuristic
shock as we became more fatigued, distressed and eventually entered
a period of psycho-logical shock followed by widespread apathy as an
outward manifestation of long range penetration warfare.


The Age of Aquarius was best described by

Tavistock Institute

as the vehicle for delivering turbulence:

“There are three distinct
phases in the response and reaction to stress displayed by large
social groups. First, there is superficiality; the population under
attack will defend itself with slogans; this does not identify the
source of the crisis and therefore does nothing to address it,
hence the crisis will persist. The second is fragmentation.

 

This
occurs as the crisis continues and social order breaks down. Then,
there is the third phase where the population group goes into ‘self
realization’ and turns away from the induced crisis and there
follows a maladaptive response, accompanied with active synoptic
idealism and disassociation.”

Who can deny that with:

  • the huge increase in drug usage
    – 
    “crack” making thousands of instant new addicts each day

  • the
    shocking rise in the murder of infants each day (aborticide), which
    by now far exceeds casualties suffered by our armed forces in both
    World Wars, Korea and Vietnam

  • the open acceptance of homosexuality
    and lesbianism whose “rights” are protected by more and more laws
    each year

  • the terrible plague we call “AIDS” washing over our towns
    and cities

  • total failure of our education system

  • the stunning
    increase in the divorce rate

  • a murder rate that shocks the rest of
    the world into disbelief

  • satanic serial killings

  • the disappearance
    of thousands of young children, snatched off our streets by
    perverts

  • a virtual tidal wave of pornography accompanied by
    “permissiveness” on our television screens,

…who can deny that this
nation is in crisis, which we are not addressing and from which we
are turning away.


Well-meaning people who specialize in these things blame a lot of
the problem on education, or what passes for it in the United
States. Criminals now abound in the age groups 9-15. Rapists are
quite commonly as young as 10. Our social specialists, our
teacher’s unions, our churches say it is all due to a faulty
education system.

 

Witness how test scores keep drop-ping. The
specialists bewail the fact that the United States now ranks around
39th in the level of education in the world. Why do we bemoan what
is so obvious? OUR EDUCATlON SYSTEM WAS PROGRAMMED TO SELF-DESTRUCT.


THAT WAS WHAT DR. ALEXANDER KING WAS SENT
HERE BY NATO TO ARRANGE. THAT IS WHAT JUSTICE
HUGO BLACK WAS ORDERED TO ARRANGE. THE FACT
IS, THE COMMITTEE OF 300, WITH THE APPROVAL OF
OUR GOVERNMENT, DOES NOT WANT OUR YOUTH TO
BE PROPERLY EDUCATED.

 

The education that Freemason Justice Hugo
Black, Alexander King, Gunnar Myrdal and his wife came to give the
children of the United States is that CRIME PAYS, EXPEDIENCY IS WHAT
COUNTS.


They taught our children that United States law is unequally
applied, and that is perfectly in order. Our children were properly
educated by a decade of corrupt examples; Ronald Reagan and
George
Bush were ruled by greed and became totally corrupted by it. Our
education system hasn’t failed. Under the guidance of King, Black
and the Myrdals it is actually a great success, but it all depends
from whose point of view we look at it. The Committee of 300 is
DELIGHTED with our education system, and will not allow one comma of
it to be changed.


According to Stanford and Willis Harmon, the induced trauma of long
range penetration of which our education is a part, has been going
on for 45 years, yet how many are aware of the insidious pressures
being applied to our society and the constant exposure to
brainwashing that goes on every day? The mysterious gang wars that
broke out in New York in the 1950’s is an example of how the
conspirators can create and stage-manage any type of disruptive
elements they like. Where those gang wars came from nobody knew
until the 1980’s when researchers uncovered the hidden controllers
who directed the so-called “social phenomena.”


Gang wars were carefully planned at Stanford, deliberately designed
to shock society and cause ripples of disturbances. By 1958 there
were in excess of 200 of these gangs. They were made popular by a
musical and a Hollywood movie, “West Side Story.” After making the
news for a decade, suddenly, in 1966, they disappeared off the
streets of New York, Los Angeles New York, New Jersey, Philadelphia
and Chicago.


Throughout the near decade of gang violence, the public
reacted according to the profiled response Stanford expected;
society as a whole could not comprehend gang warfare and the
public responded in a maladaptive manner. Had there been
those wise enough to recognize in gang wars a Stanford experiment
in social engineering and brainwashing, the conspirator’s plot would
have been exposed.

 

Either we did not have trained specialists who
could see what was going on – which is highly unlikely – or else they
were threatened and remained silent. The cooperation with Stanford
by the news media brought to light a “new age” attack on our
environment just as predicted by the social engineers and
new-science scientists at Tavistock.


In 1989 gang warfare, as a social conditioning to change, was
reintroduced to the streets of Los Angeles. Within a few short
months of the first incidents, gangs began to proliferate –  first in
the scores, then in the hundreds on the streets of the East Side of
Los Angeles. Crack houses and rampant prostitution proliferated;
drug dealers dominated the streets. Anybody who got in their way was
gunned down. The outcry in the press was loud and long. Stanford’s
targeted large population group began defending itself with slogans.

 

This is what Tavistock called the first phase, with the targeted
group failing to identify the source of the crisis.


The second phase of the gang war crisis was “fragmentation.” People
not living in the areas frequented by gangs said, “Thank God they
are not in our neighborhood.” This ignored the fact that the crisis
continued with or without recognition and that social order in Los
Angeles had begun to break down. As profiled by Tavistock, those
groups not affected by gang war “broke away to defend themselves”
because the source of the crisis was not identified, the so called
“maladaptation” process the period of disassociation.


Apart from the proliferation of drug sales, what is the purpose
of gang wars? First, it is to show the targeted group that they are
not safe, i.e., insecurity is generated. Secondly, it is to show
that
organized society is helpless in the face of such violence and
thirdly to bring about a recognition of the fact that our social
order is collapsing.

 

The present wave of gang violence will go
away just as quickly as it started, once the three phases of the Stanford program are completed.


An outstanding example of social conditioning to accept change, even
when it is recognized as unwelcome change by the large population
group in the sights of Stanford Research Institute, was the
“advent” of the BEATLES. The Beatles were brought to the United
States as part of a social experiment which would subject large
population groups to brainwashing of which they were not even aware.


When Tavistock brought the Beatles to the United States nobody could
have imagined the cultural disaster that was to follow in their
wake. The Beatles were an integral part of “THE AQUARIAN
CONSPIRACY
,” a living organism which sprang From “THE CHANGING
IMAGES OF MAN
,” URH (489)-2150-Policy Research Report No. 4/4/74.
Policy Report prepared by SRI Center for the study of Social
Policy, Director, Professor Willis Harmon.


The phenomenon of the Beatles was not a spontaneous rebellion by
youth against the old social system. Instead it was a carefully
crafted plot to introduce by a conspiratorial body which could not
be identified, a highly destructive and divisive element into a
large population group targeted for change against its will. New
words and new phrases – prepared by Tavistock –  were introduced to
America along with the Beatles.

 

Words such as “rock” in relation to
music sounds, “teenager,” “cool,” “discovered” and “pop music” were
a lexicon of disguised code words signifying the acceptance of drugs
and arrived with and accompanied the Beatles wherever they went, to
be “discovered” by “teenagers.” Incidentally, the word “teenagers”
was never used until just before the Beatles arrived on the scene,
courtesy of the Tavistock Institute for Human Relations.


As in the case of gang wars, nothing could or would have
been accomplished without the cooperation of the media, especially the electronic media and, in particular, the scurrilous
Ed
Sullivan who had been coached by the conspirators as to the role
he was to play. Nobody would have paid much attention to the
motley crew from Liverpool and the 12-atonal system of “music” that
was to follow had it not been for an overabundance of press
exposure.

 

The 12-atonal system consisted of heavy, repetitive
sounds, taken from the music of the cult of Dionysus
and the Baal priesthood by Adorno and given a “modern” flavor by this special
friend of the Queen of England and hence the Committee of 300.


Tavistock and its Stanford Research Center created trigger words
which then came into general usage around “rock music” and its fans.

 

Trigger words created a distinct new break-away largely young
population group which was persuaded by social engineering and
conditioning to believe that the Beatles really were their favorite
group. All trigger words devised in the context of “rock music” were
designed for mass control of the new targeted group, the youth of
America.


The Beatles did a perfect job, or perhaps it would be more correct
to say that Tavistock and Stanford did a perfect job,
the Beatles
merely reacting like trained robots “with a little help from their
friends” – code words for using drugs and making it “cool.”

 

The
Beatles became a highly visible “new type” – more Tavistock jargon – and
as such it was not long before the group made new styles (fads in
clothing, hairstyles and language usage) which upset the older
generation, as was intended. This was part of the
“fragmentation-maladaptation” process worked out by Willis Harmon
and his team of social scientists and genetic engineering tinkerers
and put into action.


The role of the print and electronic media in our society is crucial
to the success of brainwashing large population groups.


Gang wars ended in Los Angeles in 1966 as the media withdrew
its coverage. The same thing will happen with the current wave
of gang wars in Los Angeles. Street gangs will wither on the
vine once media saturation coverage is toned down and then
completely withdrawn. As in 1966, the issue would become
“burned out.” Street gangs will have served their purpose of
creating turbulence and insecurity. Exactly the same pattern will
be followed in the case of “rock” music. Deprived of media
attention, it will eventually take its place in history.


Following the Beatles, who incidentally were put together by the
Tavistock Institute, came other “Made in England” rock groups, who,
like the Beatles, had Theo Adorno write their cult lyrics and
compose all the “music.” I hate to use these beautiful words in the
context of “Beatlemania”; it reminds me of how wrongly the word
“lover” is used when referring to the filthy interaction between two
homosexuals writhing in pigswill. To call “rock” music, is an
insult, likewise the language used in “rock lyrics.”


Tavistock and Stanford Research then embarked on the second phase of
the work commissioned by the Committee of 300. This new phase turned
up the heat for social change in America. As quickly as the Beatles
had appeared on the American scene, so too did the “beat
generation,” trigger words designed to separate and fragment
society.

 

The media now focused its attention on the “beat
generation.” Other Tavistock-coined words came seemingly out of
nowhere: “beatniks,” “hippies,” “flower children” became part of the
vocabulary of America. It became popular to “drop out” and wear
dirty jeans, go about with long unwashed hair. The “beat generation”
cut itself off from main-stream America. They became just as
infamous as the cleaner Beatles before them.


The newly-created group and its “lifestyle” swept millions
of young Americans into the cult. American youth underwent a
radical revolution without ever being aware of it, while the older
generation stood by helplessly, unable to identify the source of
the crisis, and thus reacting in a maladaptive manner against its
manifestation, which were drugs of all types, marijuana, and
later Lysergic acid, “LSD,” so conveniently provided for them
by the Swiss pharmaceutical company, SANDOZ, following the
discovery by one of its chemists, Albert Hoffman, how to make
synthetic ergotamine, a powerful mind-altering drug.

 

The Committee of 300 financed the project through one of their
banks, S. C. Warburg, and the drug was carried to America by the
philosopher, Aldous Huxley.


The new “wonder drug” was promptly distributed in “sample” size
packages, handed out free of charge on college campuses across the
United States and at “rock” concerts, which became the leading
vehicle for proliferating the use of drugs. The question that cries
out for an answer is, what was the Drug Enforcement Agency (DEA)
doing at the time? There is compelling circumstantial evidence that
would appear to indicate that the DEA knew what was going on but was
ordered not to take any action.


With very substantial numbers of new British “rock” bands arriving
in the U.S., rock concerts began to become a fixture on the social
calendar of American youth. In tandem with these “concerts,” the use
of drugs among the youth rose in proportion. The devilish bedlam of
discordant heavy beat sounds numbed the minds of listeners so that
they were easily persuaded to try the new drug on the basis that
“everybody is doing it.” Peer pressure is a very strong weapon. The
“new culture” received maximum coverage from the jackal media, which
cost the conspirators not one single thin dime.


Great anger was felt by a number of civic leaders and churchmen over
the new cult but their energies were misdirected against the RESULT
of what was going on and not against the CAUSE. Critics of the rock
cult made the same mistakes that had been made in the prohibition
era, they criticized law enforcement agencies, teachers, parents
anybody but the conspirators.


Because of the anger and resentment I feel toward the great
drug plague, I make no apology for using language which is not
customary for me to use. One of the worst drug slobs ever to
walk the streets of America was Alan Ginsberg. This Ginsberg
pushed the use of LSD through advertising which cost him
nothing, although under normal circumstances it would have
cost millions of dollars in TV advertising revenues.

 

This free
advertising for drugs, and LSD in particular, reached a new high
in the late 1960’s, thanks to the ever-willing cooperation of the
media. The effect of Ginsberg’s mass advertising campaign was
devastating; the American public was subjected to one cultural
future shock after another in rapid succession.


We became over-exposed and over stimulated and, again, may I remind
you that this is Tavistock jargon, lifted from the Tavistock
training manual, overwhelmed by its new development and, when we
reached that point, our minds began to lapse into apathy; it was
just too much to cope with, that is to say, “long range penetration
had taken hold of us.”

 

Ginsberg claimed to be a poet but no greater
rubbish was ever written by anyone who ever aspired to becoming a
poet. Ginsberg’s designated task had little to do with poetry; his
main function was to push the new subculture and force acceptance of
it upon the large targeted population group.


To assist him in his task, Ginsberg co-opted the services of
Norman
Mailer, a writer of sorts who had spent some time in a mental
institution. Mailer was a favorite of the leftwing Holly-wood crowd
and so had no problem with getting maximum television time for
Ginsberg. Naturally Mailer had to have a pretext – not even he could
blatantly come out with the true nature of Ginsberg’s television
appearances. So a charade was adopted: Mailer would talk “seriously”
on camera with Ginsberg about poetry and literature.


This method of getting wide television coverage at no cost to
themselves was followed by every rock group and concert promoter who
followed the example set by Ginsberg. The electronic media moguls
had big hearts when it came to giving free time to these dirty verminous creatures and their even dirtier products and filthy
ideas. Their promotion of horrible garbage spoke volumes and,
without abundant help from the print and electronic media, the drug
trade could not have spread as rapidly as it did in the late
1960’s-early 197O’s, and probably would have been confined to a few
small local areas.


Ginsberg was able to give several nationally televised performances extolling the virtues of LSD and marijuana, under
the guise of “new ideas” and “new cultures” developing in the art
and music world. Not to be outdone by the electronic media,
Ginsberg’s admirers wrote glowing articles about “this colorful man”
in the art and social columns of all of America’s largest newspapers
and magazines.

 

There had never been such an across-the-media-board
free advertising campaign in the history of newspaper, radio and
television and it cost the promoters of the Aquarian conspiracy,
NATO and the Club of Rome not one red cent. It was all absolutely
free advertising for LSD, only thinly disguised as “art” and
“culture.”


One of Ginsberg’s closest friends, Kenny Love, published a Five-page
report in the New York Times. This is in accordance with the
methodology used by Tavistock and Stanford Research: If something
is to be promoted which the public has not yet been fully
brainwashed to accept, then have someone write an article, covering
all sides of the subject matter.

 

The other method is to have live
television talk shows in which a panel of experts promotes the
product and or idea under the pretext of “discussing”, it. There are
point and counter-point, both pro and con participants airing their
support or opposition. When it is all over, the subject to be
promoted has been dinned into the public mind. While this was new in
the early 1970’s, today it is standard practice on which talk shows
thrive.


Love’s Five-page pro LSD pro Ginsberg article was duly
printed by the New York Times. Had Ginsberg tried to buy the
same amount of space in an advertisement, it would have cost
him at least $50,000. But Ginsberg didn’t have to worry; thanks
to his Friend Kenny Love, Ginsberg got the massive advertising
all for free.

 

With newspapers like the New York Times and the
Washington Post under the control of the Committee of 300, this
kind of free advertising is given to any subject matter, and more
especially to those promoting decadent life styles – drugs-hedonism
– anything that will confuse the American people. After
the trial run with Ginsberg and LSD, it became standard
Club of
Rome
practice to call upon major newspapers in America to
give free advertising on demand to people and ideas they were
promoting.


Worse yet – or better yet, depending upon the viewpoint – 
United Press (UP) picked up Kenny Love’s free advertising for
Ginsberg and LSD and telexed it to HUNDREDS of newspapers and
magazines around the country under the guise of a “news” story. Even
such highly respectable establishment magazines as “Harpers Bazaar”
and “TIME” made Mr. Ginsberg respectable.

 

If a nation-wide campaign
of this magnitude were presented to Ginsberg and the promoters of
LSD by an advertising agency, the price tag would have run into at
least $1 million in terms of 1970 dollars. Today the price tag would
be nothing less than $15-$16 million dollars. It is no wonder that I
refer to the news media as “jackals.”


I suggest that we try to find any media outlet to do an expose on
the Federal Reserve Board, which is what I did. I took my article,
which was a good expose of the greatest swindle on earth, to every
major newspaper, radio and television station, magazine house and
several talk-show hosts. A few made promises that sounded good – they
would definitely air the article and have me discuss it – give them
about a week and they would get back to me.

 

Not one of them ever
did, nor did my article ever appear in the pages of their newspapers
and journals. It was as if a blanket of silence had been thrown over
me and the subject I was endeavoring to promote, and indeed that was
precisely what had happened.


Without massive media hype, and without almost around the clock
coverage, the hippy-beatnik rock, drug cult would never have gotten
off the ground; it would have remained a localized oddity. The
Beatles, with their twanging guitars, silly expressions, drug
language and weird clothes, would not have amounted to a hill of
beans. Instead, because the Beatles were given saturation coverage
by the media, the United States has suffered one cultural shock
after another.


The men buried in the think tanks and research institutions,
whose names and faces are still not known to but a few people, made
sure that the press played its part. Conversely, the media’s
important role in not exposing the power behind the future cultural
shocks made certain that the source of the crisis was never
identified. Thus was our society driven mad through psychological
shocks and stress. “Driven mad” is taken from Tavistock’s training
manual. From its modest beginnings in 1921, Tavistock was ready in
1966 to launch a major irreversible cultural revolution in America,
which has not yet ended. The Aquarian Conspiracy is part of it.


Thus softened up, our nation was now deemed ripe for the
introduction of drugs which was to rival the prohibition era in
scope and the huge amounts of money to be made. This too was an
integral part of the Aquarian Conspiracy. The proliferation of drug
usage was one of the subjects under study at the Science Policy
Research Unit
(SPRU) at Tavistock’s Sussex University facility. It
was known as the “future shocks” center, a title given to so-called
future oriented psychology designed to manipulate whole population
groups to induce “future shocks.” It was the first of several such
institutions set up by Tavistock.


“Future shocks” is described as a series of events which come so
fast that the human brain cannot absorb the information. As I said
earlier, science has shown that there are clearly marked limits to
the amount of changes and the nature of them that the mind can deal
with. After continuous shocks, the large targeted population group
discovers that it does not want to make choices any more.

 

Apathy
takes over, often preceded by mindless violence such as is
characteristic of the Los Angeles street gangs, serial killers,
rapists and child kidnapers.


Such a group becomes easy to control and will docilely
follow orders without rebelling, which is the object of the
exercise. “Future shocks,” says SPRU, “is defined as physical
and psychological distress arising from the excess load on the
decision-making mechanism of the human mind.” That is
Tavistock jargon lifted straight from Tavistock manuals – which they don’t know I have.


Just as an overloaded electrical circuit will activate a trip
switch, so do humans “trip out,” which is a syndrome that medical
science is only now beginning to understand, although John Rawlings
Reese conducted experiments in this field as far back as the 1920’s.
As can be appreciated, such a targeted group is ready to “trip out”
and take to drugs as a means of escape from the pressures of so many
choices having to be made.

 

This is how Drug usage was spread so
rapidly through America’s “beat generation.” What started with the
Beatles and sample packages of LSD has grown into a flood-tide of
drug usage which is swamping America.



The drug trade is controlled by the Committee of 300 from the Top
down. The drug trade started with the British East India Company and
was closely followed by the Dutch East India Company. Both were
controlled by a “Council of 300.” The list of names of members and
stockholders of the BEIC read like something out of Debretts
Peerage. BEIC established the “China Inland Mission,” whose job it
was to get The Chinese peasants, or coolies, as they were called,
addicted to opium. This created the market for opium which the
BEIC

then filled.


In much the same way the Committee of 300 used “The “Beatles” to
popularize “social drugs” with the youth of America and The
Hollywood “in-crowd.” Ed Sullivan was sent to England To become
acquainted with The first Tavistock Instituterock group” to hit
the shores of the United States. Sullivan then returned to the
United States to draft the strategy for the electronic media on how
to package and sell the group. Without the full cooperation of the
electronic media and Ed Sullivan, in particular, “The Beatles” and
their “music” would have died on the vine. Instead, our national
life and the character of the United States was forever changed.


Now that we know, it is all too clear how successful the
“Beatles” campaign to proliferate the use of drugs became. The
fact that “The Beatles” had their music and lyrics written for
them by Theo Adorno was concealed from public view.

 

The prime
function to “The Beatles” was to be discovered by teen-agers, who
where then subjected to a non-stop barrage of “Beatle music,” until
they became convinced that they liked the sound and adopted it,
along with all that accompanied it. The Liverpool group performed up
to expectations, and with “a little help from their friends,” i.e.,
illegal substances we call drugs created a whole new class to young
Americans in the precise mold ordained by the Tavistock Institute.


Tavistock had created a highly visible “new type” to act as their
drug-runners. The China Inland Mission “Christian missionaries”
would not have fitted in with the 1960’s. “New type” is
social-science scientist jargon; what it meant was that the Beatles
created new social patterns, first and foremost being to normalize
and popularize the use of drugs, new tastes in clothes and hair
styles which really distinguished them from the older generation as
was intended by Tavistock.


It is important to note the deliberate fragmentation-inducing
language used by Tavistock. The “teenagers” never once dreamed that
all the “different” things they aspired to were the product of older
scientists working in think tanks in England and Stanford Research.
How mortified they would have been if they had discovered that most
of their “cool” habits and expressions were deliberately created for
their use by a group of older social science scientists!


The role of the media was, and remains, very important in promoting
the use of drugs on a nation-wide scale. When coverage of the
street warfare gangs was abruptly terminated by the media, they
became “burned out” as a social phenomena; the “new age” of drugs
followed. The media has always served as a catalyst and has always
pushed “new causes” and now media attention was focused on drug
usage and its supporters, the “beat generation,” yet another phrase
fashioned at Tavistock, in its determined efforts to bring about
social changes in The United States.

Drug usage now became an accepted part of everyday life in America.
This Tavistock-designed program took in millions of American youth,
and the older generation began to believe that America was
undergoing a natural social revolution, failing all the while to
realize that what was happening to their children was not a
spontaneous movement, but a highly artificial creation designed to
force changes in America’s social and political life.


The descendants of the British East India Company were delighted
with the success of their drug pushing program. Their disciples
became adept in the use of lysergic acid (LSD) so conveniently made
available by patrons of the drug trade like Aldous Huxley, courtesy
of the highly respected Sandoz company of Switzerland and financed
by the great Warburg banking dynasty. The new “wonder drug” was
promptly distributed at all rock concerts and on college campuses in
free sample packages.

 

The question that begs to be asked is,

“What
was the FBI doing while all this was going on?”

The purpose of the Beatles had become abundantly clear.

 

The
British
East India Company
’s descendants in the upper-class society in
London must have felt very good about the billions of dollars that
began rolling in. With the coming of “rock” which shall henceforth
be used as shorthand to describe Adorno’s fiendish satanic music, a
tremendous increase in the use of social drugs, especially
marijuana, was observed. The entire dope business was expanded under
the control and direction of the Science Policy Research Unit
(SPRU).


SPRU was run by Leland Bradford, Kenneth Damm and Ronald Lippert,
under whose expert guidance a large number of new-science scientists
were trained to promote “future shocks,” one of the chief being the
dramatic increase in the use of drugs by America’s teenagers. SPRU’s
policy papers, planted in various government agencies, including
the Drug Enforcement Agency (DEA), dictated the course of the
disastrous “drug war” allegedly waged by the Reagan and Bush
Administrations.


This was the forerunner of how the United States is run
today, by one committee and/or council after another, by an
inner-government fed on Tavistock papers which they firmly believe
are their own opinions. These virtual unknowns are making decisions
that will forever change our form of government and the quality of
life here in the United States. Through “crisis adaptation” we have
already been changed so much as to barely compare with what we were
in the 1950’s. Also, our environment has been changed.


There is much talk about environment these days and, while it mostly
refers to green surroundings, pure rivers and fresh air, there is
another, equally important environment, namely, the drug
environment. The environment of our life style has become polluted;
our thinking has become polluted. Our ability to control our
destiny has become polluted. We are confronted by changes that
pollute our thinking to the extent that we do not know what to make
of it all. The “Environment of Change” is crippling the nation; we
appear to have so little control that it has produced anxiety and
confusion.


We now look to group solutions instead of individual solutions to
our problems. We do not make use of our own resources to solve
problems. In this the prolific rise in drug usage is playing a
leading role. The strategy is a deliberate one, devised by the
new-science scientists, the social engineers and tinkerers, aimed at
the most vulnerable of all areas, our self-image, or how we perceive
ourselves, which leads us eventually to become like sheep being led
to the slaughter. We have become confused by the many choices we
have to make, and we have become apathetic.


We are manipulated by unscrupulous men without ever
being aware of it. This is particularly true of the drug trade and
we are now in the transition stage where we can be set up for a
change from the present constitutional form of government,
which has taken a giant step forward under the Bush administration. While there are those who still persist, in the face of all of
the evidence to the contrary in saying, “It can’t happen in
America,” the fact is: IT HAS ALREADY HAPPENED.

 

Our
will to resist events not to our liking has been steadily eroded and
undermined. We will resist, some of us say, but not so many of us
will do that, and we will be in the minority.


The drug trade has insidiously changed our environment. The alleged
“war on drugs” is a farce; it does not exist in qualitative measure
to make the slightest difference to the descendants of the British
East India Company
. Combined with computerization, we are almost
fully brainwashed, robbed of our ability to resist forced changes.
Which brings us to another environment, PEOPLE CONTROL, also known
as personal information control, without which governments cannot
play their numbers game.


As matters stand, we the people have absolutely no way of knowing
just what government does or does not know about us. Government
computer files are not subject to scrutiny by the public at large.
Do we foolishly believe that personal information sacrosanct?
Remember, in every society there are rich and powerful families who
control law enforcement agencies. I have proved the existence of
such families.

 

Do not think that if these families wanted to find
out about us, they could not do so.

 

These are the families who often
have a member in the Committee of 300.


Take Kissinger, for instance, who has his own private dossiers on
hundreds of thousands of people, not only in the U.S. but all over
the world. Are we on Kissinger’s enemy list? Is this far fetched?
Not at all. Take P2 Masonic and Committee Monte Carlo who have such
lists which run into tens of thousands of names. Incidentally,
Kissinger is one of them. There are other “private” intelligence
agencies, such as INTEL, whom we shall meet later.


One of the ways heroin is moved into Europe is through the
Principality of Monaco. The heroin comes from Corsica carried
in ferries that ply a busy trade between Corsica and Monte Carlo
during the summer. There is no check of what goes on or comes
off these ferries. As there is no border between France and
Monaco, drugs, and more especially heroin (partly processed opium), flows through the open border of Monaco into
laboratories
in France, or else if it has already been processed into heroin, it
goes directly to the distributors.


The Grimaldi family has been in the drug smuggling business for
centuries.

 

Because Prince Ranier got greedy and began skimming
heavily and would not desist after three warnings, his wife,
Princess Grace, was murdered in a car “accident.” Ranier
underestimated the power of the Committee of which he is a member.

 

The Rover car in which she was traveling had the brake fluid
chambers tampered with in such a way that each time the brakes were
depressed, fluid was released in measured amount, until by the time
the car reached the most dangerous of several hairpin bends, there
was no stopping power, and it sailed over a stone wall, hitting the
ground fifty feet below in a sickening smash.


Everything possible was done by the Committee of 300 operatives to
conceal the truth about the murder of Princess Grace. To this day
the Rover car remains in the custody of French police, shrouded
under a cover on a trailer which no one is allowed to approach, let
alone examine. The signal for the execution of Princess Grace was
picked up by the British Army listening post in Cyprus and it is
believed by well placed source that the Committee Monte Carlo and
P2
gave the order.


The drug trade, controlled by the Committee of 300, is a crime
against humanity, but having been conditioned and softened up by
years of incessant bombardment by Tavistock Institute, we have more
or less accepted our changed environment, regarding the drug trade
as a problem that is “too big” to handle.

 

This is not the case. If
we could marshal an entire nation, equip and send millions of
American soldiers to fight in a war in Europe in which he had no
business intervening, if we could defeat a major power, then we can
smash the drug trade, using the same WW II tactics.


The logistical problems that had to be solved when we entered the
Second World War are even today still mind-boggling.

 

 

 

Section 3

 

Yet we successfully overcame all problems.

 

Why then is it impossible
to defeat a well-defined enemy, far smaller and weaker than Germany,
given the immensely improved weapons and surveillance equipment we
have today? The real reason that the drug problem is not eradicated
is because it is being run by the highest families in the entire
world as part of a coordinated gigantic money-making machine.


In 1930, British capital invested in South America greatly exceeded
capital investment in British “dominions.” Graham, an authority on
British investments abroad, stated that British in-vestment in South
America “exceeded one trillion pounds.” Remember, this was 1930, and
one trillion pounds was a staggering sum of money in those days.
What was the reason for such heavy investment in South America? In a
word it was drugs.


The plutocracy controlling British banks held the purse strings and
then, as now, put up a most respectable facade to cover their true
business. No one ever caught them with dirtied hands. They always
had front men, even as they do today, willing to take the blame if
things went awry. Then as now the connections with the drug trade
were tenuous at best. No one was ever able to lay a finger on the
respectable and “noble” banking families of Britain, whose members
are on the Committee of 300.


There is great significance in that only 15 members of Parliament
were the controllers of that vast empire, of which the most
prominent were Sir Charles Barry and the Chamberlain family. These
overlords of finance were busy in places like Argentina,
Jamaica
and Trinidad, which became big money-spinners for them through the drug
trade. In these countries, British plutocrats kept “the locals” as
they were contemptuously called, at bare subsistence levels, hardly
above slavery.

 

The fortunes extracted from the drug trade in the
Caribbean were vast.


The plutocrats hid behind faces like Trinidad Leaseholds
Limited, but the REAL MEAT, then as now, was drugs. This is
true of today where we find that Jamaica’s Gross National Product (GNP) is made up almost entirely of sales of ganja, a very
potent form of marijuana. The mechanism for handling the ganja trade
was set up by David Rockefeller and Henry Kissinger under the title
Caribbean Basin Initiative.”


Up until a relatively short time ago, the true history of the China
opium trade was quite unknown, having been as well covered up as it
is possible to do. Many of my former students in the days when I was
lecturing, would come and ask me why the Chinese were so fond of
smoking opium? They were puzzled as are many still today, over
contradictory accounts of what had actually taken place in China.
Most thought it was merely a case of the Chinese workers buying
opium on an open market and smoking it, or going to some of the
thousands of opium dens and forgetting their terrible existence for
a while.


The truth is that the supply of opium to China was a British
monopoly, an OFFICIAL monopoly of the British government and
official British policy. The Indo-British opium trade in China was
one of the best kept secrets, around which many misleading legends
grew up, such as “Clive of India” and the tales of derring-do by the
British Army in India for the glory of “the Empire,” so well written
by Rudyard Kipling, and tales of “Tea Clippers” racing across the
oceans with their cargoes of China tea for the high society drawing
rooms of Victorian England.

 

In reality, the history of British
occupation of India and Britain’s Opium Wars are some of the most
dastardly blots on Western civilization.


Almost 13% of the income of India under British rule was derived
from the sale of good quality Bengal opium to the British-run opium
distributors in China. “The Beatles” of the day, the China Inland
Mission, had done a great job in proliferating the use of opium
among the poor Chinese laborers (coolies, as they were called).
These addicts did not suddenly materialize out of thin air, any more
than did teenager addicts in the U.S.


THE POINT TO REMEMBER IS THAT BOTH WERE CREATED. In China a market for opium was first created and then
filled by opium for Bengal. In the same way, a market for marijuana
and LSD was first created in the United States by methods already
described, and then filled by British plutocrats and their American
cousins with the help of the overlords of the British banking
establishment.


The lucrative drug trade is one of the worst examples of making
money out of human misery; the other being the legal drug trade run
by the pharmaceutical drug houses under Rockefeller ownership, in
the U.S. for the most part, but with substantial companies operating
in Switzerland, France and Britain and fully backed by the American
Medical Association (AMA).
The dirty dope transactions and the money
it generates flows through the City of London, together with Hong
Kong, Dubai and latterly, Lebanon, thanks to the invasion of that
country by Israel.


There will be those who doubt this statement. “Look at this business
columns of the Financial Times,” they will tell us. “Don’t tell me
that this is all related to drug money”? OF COURSE IT IS, but don’t
imagine for one minute that the noble lords and ladies of England
are going to advertise the fact. Remember the British East India
Company?
Officially, its business was trading in tea!


The London “Times” never dared tell the British public the it was
impossible to make VAST PROFITS from tea, nor did the illustrious
paper even hint at a trade in opium being plied by those who spent
their time in London’s fashionable clubs or playing a chukka of polo
at the Royal Windsor Club, or that the gentlemen officers who went
out to India in the service of the Empire were financed SOLELY by
the enormous income derived from the misery of the millions of
Chinese coolies addicted to opium.


The trade was conducted by the illustrious British East India
Company, whose meddling in political, religious and economic
affairs of the United States has cost us very dearly for over 200years. The 300 members of the British East India
Company’s board were a cut above the common herd.

 

They were so mighty,
as Lord Bertrand Russell once observed,

“They could even give God
advice when he had trouble in Heaven.”

Nor should we imagine that
anything has changed in the intervening years. EXACTLY the same
attitude prevails today among members of the Committee of 300, which
is why they often refer to them-selves as the “Olympians.”


Later the British Crown, i.e., the Royal Family, joined the British
East India Company
’s trade, and used it as a vehicle to produce
opium in Bengal, and elsewhere in India, controlling exports through
what was called “transit duties,” that is, the Crown levied a tax on
all producers of opium duly registered with the state authority, who
were sending their opium to China.


Prior to 1896, when the trade was still “illegal” – a word used to
extract greater tribute from the producers of opium –  there never
having been the slightest attempt to stop the trade, colossal
amounts of opium were shipped out of India on board “China Tea
Clippers,” those sailing ships around which legend and lore were
built, which supposedly carried chests of tea from India and China
to the London exchanges.


So audacious did the British East India Company lords and ladies
become that they tried to sell this lethal substance to the Union
and Confederate Armies in pill form as a pain killer. Is it
difficult to imagine just what would have happened had their plan
succeeded? All those hundreds of thousands of soldiers would have
left the battlefields totally hooked on opium. “The Beatles” were
much more successful in turning out millions of teenage addicts in
later years.


The Bengal merchants and their British controllers and
bankers grew fat and intolerant on the enormous amounts of
money that poured into the coffers of the British East India
Company from the wretched Chinese coolies opium trade. BEIC
profits, even in those years, far exceeded the combined profits
made in a single year by General Motors, Ford and Chrysler in
their heydays.

 

The trend in making huge profits out of drugs was
carried over into the 1960’s by such “legal” drug death merchants as
Sandoz, the makers of LSD and Hoffman la Roche,
manufacturers of Valium. The cost of the raw material and
manufacturing of Valium to Hoffman la Roche is $3 per kilo (2.2
pounds). It is sold to their distributors for $20,000 per kilo. By
the time it reaches the consumer, the price of Valium has risen to
$50,000 per kilo. Valium is used in huge quantities in Europe and
the United States. It is possibly the most used drug of its kind in
the world.


Hoffman la Roche does the same thing with Vitamin C, which costs
them less than 1 cent a kilo to produce. It is sold for a profit of
10,000 percent. When a friend of mine blew the whistle on this
criminal company, which had entered into a monopoly agreement with
other producers, in contravention of European Economic Community
laws, he was arrested on the Swiss-Italian border and hustled into
prison; his wife was threatened by the Swiss police until she
committed suicide.

 

As a British national he was rescued by the
British consul in Berne as soon as word of his plight was received,
removed from prison and flown out of the country. He lost his wife,
his job and his pension because he dared to disclose Hoffman La
Roche secrets. The Swiss take their Industrial Espionage law very
seriously.


Remember this the next time you see those lovely advertisements of
Swiss ski slopes, beautiful watches, pristine mountains and cuckoo
clocks. That is not what Switzerland is about. It is about dirty
multi-billion dollar money laundering which is carried out by major
Swiss banking houses. It is about the Committee of 300 “legal” drug
manufacturers. Switzerland is the Committee’s ultimate “safe haven”
for money and protection of their bodies in time of global calamity.


Now mind you, one could get into serious trouble with the Swiss
authorities for giving out any information on these nefarious
activities. The Swiss regard it as “industrial espionage” which
usually carries a 5-year term in prison. It is safer to pretend that
Switzerland is a nice clean country rather than look under the
covers or inside its garbage can banks.

In 1931 the managing directors of the so-called “big Five” British
companies were rewarded by being made Peers of the Realm for their
activities in drug money laundering. Who decided such matters and
bestows such honors? It is the Queen of England who bestows honors
upon the men in the top positions in the drug trade.

 

British banks
engaged in this terrible trade are too numerous to mention, but a
few of the top ones are:

  • The British Bank of the
    Middle East

  • Midland Bank

  • National and Westminster
    Bank

  • Barclays Bank

  • Royal Bank of Canada

  • Hong Kong and Shanghai
    Bank

  • Baring Brothers Bank

Many of the merchant banks are up to their hocks in pigswill
drug trade profits, banks such as Hambros for example, run by Sir
Jocelyn Hambro.

 

For a really interesting major study of the Chinese
opium trade, one would need access to India Office in London. I was
able to get in there because of my intelligence service and received
great assistance from the trustee of the papers of the late Professor
Frederick Wells Williamson, which provided much
information on the opium trade carried on by the British East India
Company in India and China in the 18th and 19th centuries. If only
those papers could be made public, what a storm would burst over the
heads of the crowned vipers of Europe.


Today the trade has shifted somewhat in that less expensive cocaine
has taken over a good part of the North American market. In the
1960’s the flood of heroin coming from Hong Kong, Lebanon and Dubai
threatened to engulf the United States and Western Europe. When
demand outpaced supply there was a switch to cocaine. But now, at
the end of 1991, that trend has been reversed; today it is heroin
that is back in favor, although it is true that cocaine still enjoys
great favor among the poorer classes.


Heroin, we are told, is more satisfying to addicts; the effects
are far more intense and last longer than the effects of cocaine and
there is less international attention on heroin producers than there
is on Colombian cocaine shippers. Besides which, it is hardly likely
that the U.S. would make any real effort to stop the production of
opium in the Golden Triangle which is under the control of the
Chinese military, a serious war would erupt if any country tried to
interdict the trade. A serious attack on the opium trade would bring
Chinese military intervention.


The British know this; they have no quarrel with China, except for
an occasional squabble over who gets the larger share of the pie.

 

Britain has been involved in the China opium trade for over two
centuries. No one is going to be so foolish as to rock the boat when
millions upon millions of dollars flow into the bank accounts of the
British oligarchists and more gold is traded on the Hong Kong gold
market than the combined total traded in London and New York.


Those individuals who fondly imagine they can do some
kind of a deal with a minor Chinese or Burmese overlord in the
hills of the Golden Triangle apparently have no idea of what is
involved. If they had known, they would never have talked
about stopping the opium trade.

 

Such talk reveals little knowledge of the immensity and complexity of
China’s opium trade, British plutocrats, the Russian KGB, the
CIA,
and U.S. bankers are
all in league with China. Could one man stop or even make a small
dent in the trade? It would be absurd to imagine it. What is heroin
and why is it favored over cocaine these days? According to the
noted authority on the subject Professor Galen, heroin is a
derivative of opium, a drug that stupefies the senses and induces
long periods of sleep. This is what most addicts like, it is called
“being in the arms of Morpheus.”

 

Opium is the most habit-forming
drug known to man. Many pharmaceutical drugs contain opium in
various degrees, and it is believed that paper used in the
manufacture of cigarettes is first impregnated with opium, which is
why smokers become so addicted to their habit.


The poppy seed from which it is derived was long known to the Moguls
of India, who used the seeds mixed in tea offered to a difficult
opponent. It is also used as a pain-killing drug which largely
replaced chloroform and other older anesthetics of a bygone era.
Opium was popular in all of the fashionable clubs of Victorian
London and it was no secret that men like the Huxley brothers used
it extensively.

 

Members of the Orphic-Dionysus cults of Hellenic
Greece
and the Osiris-Horus cults of Ptolemaic Egypt which Victorian
society embraced, all smoked opium; it was the “in” thing to do.


So did some of those who met at St. Ermins Hotel in 1903 to decide
what sort of a world we would have. The descendants of the St.
Ermins crowd are found today in the Committee of 300. It is these
so-called world leaders who brought about such a change in our
environment that enabled drug usage to proliferate to the point
where it can no longer be stopped by regular law enforcement tactics
and policies.

 

This is especially true in big cities where big
populations can conceal a great deal of what transpires.


Many in the circles of royalty were regular opium users. One of
their favorites was the writer Coudenhove-Kalergi who wrote a book
in 1932 entitled “REVOLUTION THROUGH TECHNOLOGY”  which was a
blueprint for the return of the world to a medieval society.

 

The
book, in fact, became a working paper for the Committee of 300’s
plan to deindustrialize the world, starting with the United States.
Claiming that pressures of over-population are a serious problem, Kalergi advised a return to what he called “open spaces.” Does this
sound like the Khmer Rouge and Pol Pot?

 

Here are some extracts from
the book:

“In its facilities, the city of the future will resemble
the city of the Middle Ages…and he who is not condemned to live in a city because of his occupation, will
go to the countryside. Our civilization is a culture of the major
cities; therefore it is a marsh plant, born by degenerated, sickly and decadent people, who have voluntarily, or involuntarily, ended up in this dead-end street of
life.”

Isn’t that very close to what “AnkarWat” gave as “his”
reasons for depopulating Phnom Penh?


The first opium shipments reached England from Bengal in 1683,
carried in British East India Company “Tea Clippers.” Opium was
brought to England as a test, an experiment, to see whether the
common folk of England, the yeomen and the lower classes, could be
induced into taking the drug. It was what we could call today “test
marketing” of a new product. But the sturdy yeomen and the much
derided “lower classes” were made of stern stuff, and the test
marketing experiment was a total flop. The “lower classes” of
British society firmly rejected opium smoking.


The plutocrats and oligarchists in high society in London began
casting about for a market that would not be so resistant, so
unbending. They found such a market in China. In the papers I
studied at the India Office under the heading “Miscellaneous Old
Records,” I found all the confirmation I could have wished for in
proving that the opium trade in China really took off following the
founding of the British East India Company-funded “China Inland
Mission,” ostensibly a Christian missionary society but in reality
the “promotion” men and women for the new product being introduced
into the market, that new product being OPIUM.


This was later confirmed when I was given access to the
papers of Sir George Birdwood in India Office records. Soon
after the China Inland Mission missionaries set out to give away
their sample packages and show the coolies how to smoke
opium, vast quantities of opium began to arrive in China.

 

“The
Beatles” could not have done a better job. (In both cases the
trade was sanctioned by the British royal family, who openly
supported the Beatles.) Where the British East India Company
had failed in England, it now succeeded beyond its wildest
expectations in China, whose teeming millions of poor looked
upon smoking opium as an escape from their life of misery.


Opium dens began proliferating all across China, and in the big
cities like Shanghai and Canton, hundreds of thousands of miserable
Chinese found that a pipe of opium seemingly made life bearable.

 

The
British East India Company had a clear run for over a 100 years
before the Chinese government woke up to what was happening. It was
only in 1729 that the first laws against opium smoking were passed.
The 300 board members of BEIC did not like it one bit and, never one
to back down, the company was soon engaged in a running battle with
the Chinese government.


The BEIC had developed poppy seeds that brought the finest quality
opium from the poppy fields of Benares and Bihar in the Ganges Basin
in India, a country they fully controlled this fetched top price,
while the lower grades of opium from other areas of India were sold
for less. Not about to lose their lucrative market, the British
Crown engaged in running battles with Chinese forces, and defeated
them.

 

In the same manner, the U.S. government is supposedly fighting
a running battle against today’s drug barons and, like the Chinese,
are losing heavily. There is however one big difference: The Chinese
government fought to win whereas the United States government is
under no compunction to win the battle which explains why staff
turnover in the Drug Enforcement Agency (DEA) is so high.


Latterly, high grade quality opium has come out of Pakistan via
Makra on the desolate coastline of the country from whence ships
take the cargo to Dubai where it is exchanged for gold. This is said
to account in part for heroin being favored over cocaine today.

 

The
heroin trade is more discreet, there is no murder of prominent
officials such as became an almost daily occurrence in Colombia.
Pakistani opium does not sell for as much as Golden Triangle or
Golden Crescent (Iranian) opium. This has greatly spurred heroin
production and sales which threaten to overtake cocaine as the
number one seller.


The vile opium trade was talked about in the upper-crust
circles of English society for many years as “the spoils of the
Empire.” The tall tales of valor in the Khyber Pass covered a vast
trade in opium. The British Army was stationed in the Khyber Pass to
protect caravans carrying raw opium from being pillaged by hill
tribesmen. Did the British royal family know this? They must have,
what else would induce the Crown to keep an army in this region
where there was nothing of much worth other than the lucrative opium
trade? It was very expensive to keep men under arms in a far away
country. Her Majesty must have asked why these military units were
there? Certainly not to play polo or billiards in the officers’
mess.


The BEIC was jealous of its monopoly in opium. Would-be competitors
received short shrift. In a noted trial in 1791, a certain Warren
Hastings was put on charges that he helped a Friend to get into the
opium trade at the expense of the BEIC.

 

The actual wording which I
found in the records of the case housed in India Office gives some
insight into the vast opium trade:

“The charge is that Hastings has
granted a contract for the Provision of Opium for four years to
Stephen Sullivan, without advertising for the same, on terms
glaringly obvious and wantonly profuse, for the purpose of creating
an INSTANT FORTUNE for the said William Sullivan Esq.” (Emphasis
added.)

As the BEIC-British government held the monopoly in opium trading,
the only people allowed to make instant fortunes were

the
“nobility,” the “aristocracy,” the plutocrats and oligarchical
families of England
, many of whose descendants sit on the Committee
of 300
just as their forbears sat on the Council of 300 who ran the
BEIC. Outsiders like Mr. Sullivan soon found themselves in trouble
with the Crown if they were so bold as to try and help themselves
get into the multi-billion pound Sterling opium business.


The honorable men of the BEIC with its list of 300
counselors were members of all the famous gentlemen’s clubs in
London and they were for the most part members of parliament, while
others, both in India and at home, were magistrates. Company
passports were required to land in China. When a few busybodies
arrived in China to investigate the British Crown’s involvement in
the lucrative trade, BEIC magistrates promptly revoked their
passports, thus effectively denying them entry into China.


Friction with the Chinese government was common. The Chinese had
passed a law, the Yung Cheny Edict of 1729, forbidding the
importation of opium, yet the BEIC managed to keep opium as an entry
in the Chinese Customs Tariff books until 1753, the duty being three
taels per chest of opium. Even when British special secret service
(the 007 of the day) saw to it that troublesome Chinese officials
were bought off, and in cases where that was not possible, they were
simply murdered.


Every British monarch since 1729 has benefited immensely from the
drug trade and this holds good for the present occupant of the
throne. Their ministers saw to it that wealth flowed into their
family coffers. One such minister of Victoria’s was Lord Palmerston.
He clung obstinately to the belief that nothing should be allowed to
stop Britain’s opium trade with China.

 

Palmerston’s plan was to
supply the Chinese government with enough opium to make individual
members become greedy. Then the British would withhold supplies and
when the Chinese government was on its knees, supplies would be
resumed – but at a much higher price, thus retaining a monopoly
through the Chinese government itself, but the plan failed.


The Chinese government responded by destroying large
cargoes of opium stored in warehouses, and British merchants
were required to sign INDIVIDUAL agreements not to import
any more opium into Canton. BEIC responded by sending scores
of fully-loaded opium carrying ships to lie in the roads of
Macao. Companies beholden to BEIC, rather than individuals,
then sold these cargoes.

 

Chinese Commissioner Lin said,

“There
is so much opium on board English vessels now lying in the
roads of this place (Macao) which will never be returned to the
country from which it came, and I shall not be surprised to hear
of its being smuggled in under American colors.”

Lin’s prophecy roved to be remarkably accurate.


The Opium Wars against China were designed to “put the Chinese in
their place” as Lord Palmerston once said, and the British Army did
that. There was simply no stopping the vast, lucrative trade which
provided the British oligarchical feudal lords with untold billions,
while leaving China with millions of opium addicts. In later years
the Chinese appealed to Britain for help with their immense problem
and received it.

 

Thereafter respective Chinese governments realized
the value in cooperating instead of fighting with Britain – and this
held good during the bloody rule of Mao Tse Tung – so that today, as I
have already mentioned, any quarrels that come about are only over
the share of the opium trade each is entitled to.


To advance to more modern history, the Chinese-British partnership
was solidified by the Hong Kong agreement which established an equal
partnership in the opium trade. This has proceeded smoothly, with an
occasional ripple here and there, but while violence and death,
robbery and murder marked the progression of the Colombian cocaine
trade
, no such baseness was allowed to disturb the heroin trade,
which, as I said earlier, is once again coming into the ascendancy
as we near the end of 1991.


The major problem that arose in Sino-British relations during the
past 60 years concerned China’s demand for a larger slice of the
opium-heroin pie. This was settled when Britain agreed to hand Hong
Kong over to full Chinese government control which will come into
effect in 1997. Other than that, the partners retain their former
equal shares of the lucrative opium trade based in Hong Kong.


The British oligarchical families of the Committee of 300
who were entrenched in Canton at the height of the opium trade
left their descendants in position.

 

Look at a list of prominent
British residents in China and you will see the names of members
of the Committee of 300 among them. The same holds good for
Hong Kong. These plutocrats of a feudal era, that they seek to
return to the world, control the gold and opium trade of which Hong Kong is THE center. Burmese and Chinese opium poppy growers get
paid in gold; they do not trust the U.S. paper $100 bill. This
explains the very large volume of gold trade in the Hong Kong
exchange.


The Golden Triangle is no longer the largest producer of opium. That
dubious title has since 1987 been shared by the Golden Crescent
(Iran), Pakistan and Lebanon. These are the principle opium
producers, although smaller quantities are once again coming out of
Afghanistan and Turkey. The drug trade, and more: especially the
opium trade, could not function without the help of banks as we
shall demonstrate as we proceed.


How do banks with their great air of respectability fit into the
drug trade with all of its attendant filth?

 

It is a very long and
complicated story, which could be the subject of a book on its own.
One way in which banks participate is by financing front companies
importing the chemicals needed to process raw opium into heroin. The
Hong Kong and Shanghai Bank with a branch office in London is right
in the middle of such trade through a company called TEJAPAIBUL,
which banks with Hong Kong and Shanghai Bank. What does this company
do?

 

It imports into Hong Kong most of the chemicals needed in the
heroin refining process.


It is also a major supplier of acetic anhydride For the Golden
Crescent and the Golden Triangle, Pakistan, Turkey and Lebanon. The
actual financing for this trading is hived off to the Bangkok
Metropolitan Bank
. Thus, the secondary activities connected with
processing opium, while not in the same category us the opium
trade, nevertheless generates substantial income for banks. But the
real income of the Hong Kong and Shanghai Bank and indeed all banks
in the region is financing the actual opium trade.


It took a lot of research on my part to link the price of gold to
the price of opium. I used to tell anyone who would listen,

“If
you want to know the price of gold find out what the price of a
pound or a kilo of opium is in Hong Kong.”

To my critics I
answered,

“Take a look at what happened in 1977, a critical year
for gold.”

The Bank of China shocked the gold pundits, and those
clever forecasters who are to be found in great numbers in America,
by suddenly and without warning, dumping 80 tons of gold on the
market.


That depressed the price of gold in a big hurry. All the experts
could say was,

“We never knew China had that much gold where could
it have come from?”

It came from the gold which is paid to China in
the Hong Kong Gold Market for large purchases of opium. The current
policy of the Chinese government toward England is the same as it
was in the 18th and 19th centuries.

 

The Chinese economy, tied to the
economy of Hong Kong – and I don’t mean television sets, textiles,
radios, watches, pirated cassette and video tapes – I mean
opium/heroin – would take a terrible beating if it were not for the
opium trade it shares with Britain. The BEIC is gone but the
descendants of the Council of 300 linger on in the membership of the
Committee of 300.


The oldest of the oligarchical British families who were leaders in
the opium trade for the past 200 years are still in it today. Take
the Mathesons, for instance. This “noble” family is one of the
pillars of the opium trade. When things looked a bit shaky a few
years ago, the Mathesons stepped in and gave China a loan of $300
million for real estate investment.

 

Actually it was billed as a
“joint venture between the People’s Republic of China and the Matheson Bank.”

 

When researching India Office papers of the 1700’s I
came across the name of Matheson, and it kept on cropping up
everywhere – London, Peking, Dubai, Hong Kong, wherever heroin and
opium are mentioned.


The problem with the drug trade is that it has become a threat to
national sovereignty.

 

Here is what the Venezuelan Ambassador to the
United Nations said about this world-wide threat:

“The problem of drugs was already ceased to be dealt with simply as
one of public health or a social problem. It has turned into
something far more serious and far-reaching which affects our national sovereignty; a problem of national security, because it strikes at the
independence of
a nation.

 

Drugs in all their manifestations of production,
commercialization and consumption, de-naturalizes us by injuring our
ethical, religious and political life, our historic, economic, and
republican values.”

This is precisely the way the Bank of
International Settlements
(BIS) and
the
IMF
are operating.

 

Let me say without hesitation that both these
banks are nothing more than bully-boy clearing houses for the drug
trade. The BIS undermines any country that the IMF wants to sink by
setting up ways and means for the easy outflow of flight capital.
Nor does BIS recognize nor make any distinction when it comes down
to what is flight capital and what is laundered drug money.


The BIS operates on gangster lines. If a country will not submit to
asset-stripping by the IMF, then it says in effect, “Right, then we
will break you by means of the huge cache of narco-dollars we are
holding.” It is easy to understand why gold was demonetized and
substituted with the paper “dollar” as the world’s reserve currency.
It is not as easy to blackmail a country holding gold reserves as it
is one having its reserves in paper dollars.


The IMF held a meeting in Hong Kong a few years ago which was
attended by a colleague of mine and he told me the seminar dealt
with this very question. He informed me that the IMF agents told the
meeting that they could literally cause a run on any country’s
currency, using narco-dollars, which would precipitate a flight of
capital. Rainer-Gut, a Credit Suisse delegate and member of the
Committee of 300, said he foresaw a situation where national credit
and national financing would be under one umbrella organization by
the turn of the century. While Rainer-Gut did not spell it out,
everybody at the seminar knew exactly what he was talking about.


From Colombia to Miami, from the Golden Triangle to the
Golden Gate, from Hong Kong to New York, from Bogota to
Frankfurt, the drug trade, and more especially the heroin trade,
is BIG BUSINESS and it is run from the top down by some of the most
“untouchable” families in the world, and each of those families have
at least one member who is on the Committee of 300.

 

It is not a
street corner business, and it takes a great deal of money and
expertise to keep it flowing smoothly. The machinery under control
of the Committee of 300 ensures this.


Such talents are not found on the street corners and subways of New
York. To be sure the pushers and peddlers are an integral part of
the trade, but only as very small part-time salesmen. I say
part-time because they are caught and rivalry gets some of them
shot. But what does that matter? There are plenty of replacements
available.


No, it is not anything the Small Business Administration would be
interested in. IT IS BIG BUSINESS, a vast empire, this dirty drug
business. Of necessity, it is operated from the top down in every
single country in the world. It is, in fact, the largest single
enterprise in the world today, transcending all others. That it is
protected from the top down is borne out by the fact that, like
international terrorism, it cannot be stamped out which should
indicate to a reasonable person that some of this biggest names in
royal circles, the oligarchy, the plutocracy are running it, even if
it is done through intermediaries.


The main countries involved in growing poppies and the cocoa bush
are Burma, Northern China, Afghanistan, Iran, Pakistan, Thailand,
Lebanon, Turkey, Peru, Ecuador, Bolivia.

 

Colombia does not grow the
cocoa bush but, next to Bolivia, is the main refiner of cocaine and
the chief financial center of the cocaine trade which, since General
Noriega was kidnapped and imprisoned by President Bush, is being
challenged by Panama for first place in money laundering and capital
financing of the cocaine trade.


The heroin trade is financed by Hong Kong banks, London
banks and some Middle East banks such as the British Bank of
the Middle East. Lebanon is fast becoming the “Switzerland of
the Middle East.” Countries involved in the distribution and routing
of heroin are Hong Kong, Turkey, Bulgaria, Italy, Monaco,
France (Corsica and Marseilles) Lebanon and Pakistan. The United
States is the largest consumer of narcotics, first place going to
cocaine, which is being challenged by heroin. Western Europe and
Southwest Asian countries are the biggest users of heroin. Iran has
a huge heroin addict population – in excess of 2 million as of 1991.


There is not a single government that does not know precisely what
is going on with regard to the drug trade, but individual members
holding powerful positions are taken, but of by the Committee of 300
through its world-wide network of subsidiaries. If any government
member is “difficult,” he or she is removed, as in the case of
Pakistan’s Ali Bhutto and Italy’s Aldo Moro.

 

No one is beyond the
reach of this all-powerful Committee, even though Malaysia has been
successful in holding out up until now. Malaysia has the strictest
anti-drug laws in the world. Possession of even small amounts is
punishable by the death penalty.


Like the Kintex Company of Bulgaria, most smaller countries have a
direct hand in these criminal enterprises. Kintex trucks regularly
ferried heroin through Western Europe in its own fleet of trucks
bearing the EEC marker Triangle Internationale Routier (TIR).

 

Trucks
bearing this marker and the EEC recognition number are not supposed
to be stopped at customs boarder posts. TlR trucks are allowed to
carry only perishable items. They are supposed to be inspected in
the country from whence they originated and documentation to this
effect is supposed to be carried by each truck driver.


Under international treaty obligations this is what happens, thus
Kintex trucks were able load their cargoes of heroin and certify it
as “fresh fruit and vegetables;” and then make their way through
Western Europe, even entering high-security NATO bases in Northern
Italy. In this manner, Bulgaria became one of the principal
countries through which heroin was routed.


The only way to stop the huge amounts of heroin and
cocaine presently finding their way to markets in Europe is to end
the TIR system. That will never happen. The international treaty
obligations I have just mentioned were set up by the Committee of
300, using its amazing networks and control mechanisms, to
facilitate passage of all manner of drugs to Western Europe.

 

Forget
perishable goods! A former DEA agent stationed in Italy told me,
“TIR=DOPE.”


Remember this the next time you read in the newspapers that a big
haul of heroin was found in a false-bottom suitcase at Kennedy
Airport, and some unlucky “mule” pays the price for his criminal
activity. This kind of action is only “small potatoes,” sand in the
eyes of the public, to make us think our government is really doing
something about the drug menace. Take for example, “The French
Connection
,” a Nixon program embarked upon without the knowledge and
consent of the committee of 300.


The entire amount of opium/heroin seized in that massive effort is
somewhat less than one quarter of what a single TIR truck carries.
The Committee of 300 saw to it that Nixon paid a heavy price for a
relatively small seizure of heroin. It was not the amount of heroin
involved, but a matter of one whom they had helped up the ladder to
the White House believing that he could now do without their help
and backing, and even go against direct orders from above.


The mechanics of the heroin trade go like this: wild Thai and
Burmese Hill tribesmen grow the opium poppy. At harvest time, the
seed-bearing pod is cut with a razor or sharp knife. A resinous
substance leaks through the cut and starts to congeal. This is raw
opium. The crop of raw opium is made up into sticky roundish balls.
The tribesman are paid in 1 kilo gold bars –  known as 4/10ths
– which
are minted by Credit Suisse.

 

These small bars are used ONLY to pay
the tribesman – the normal-weight gold bars are traded on the Hong
Kong market by the big buyers of raw opium or partly processed
heroin. The same methods are used to pay hill tribesman in India 
the
Baluchis – 
who have been in this business since the days of the Moguls.

 

The
Dope Season,” as it is called, sees a flood of gold traded on the
Hong Kong market.


Mexico has started producing relatively small amounts of heroin
called “Mexican Brown” which is much in demand by the Hollywood
crowd. Here again the heroin trade is run by top government
officials who have the military on their side. Some producers of
“Mexican Brown” are making a million dollars a month by supplying
their U.S. clients. On occasions when a few Mexican Federal police
are prodded into taking action against the heroin producers, they
are “taken out” by military units who seem to appear as if from
nowhere.


Such an incident occurred in November 1991 at an isolated airstrip
in Mexico’s opium producing region. Federal narcotics agents
surrounded the strip and were about to arrest people who were in the
act of loading heroin when a squad of soldiers arrived. The soldiers
rounded up the Federal narcotics police agents and systematically
killed all of them. This action posed serious threat to Mexican
President Goltarin, who is faced with loud demands for a full-scale
investigation into the murders. Goltarin is over a barrel; he can’t
back off from calling for an inquiry, and neither can he afford to
offend the military. It is the first such crack in the tight chain
of command in Mexico that stretches all the way back to the
Committee of 300.


Raw opium from the Golden Triangle is pipelined to the
Sicilian
Mafia
and the French end of the business for refining in the
laboratories that infest the French coastline from Marseilles to
Monte-Carlo. Nowadays, Lebanon and Turkey are turning out increasing
amounts of refined heroin and a large number of laboratories have
sprung up in these two countries in the past four years. Pakistan
also has a number of laboratories but it is not in the same league
as France, for example.


The route taken by the raw opium carriers of the Golden Crescent goes through Iran, Turkey and Lebanon. When the
Shah of Iran was in control of the country, he refused to allow
the heroin trade to continue and it was forcibly discontinued-up
until the time that he was “dealt with” by the Committee of 300. Raw
opium from Turkey and Lebanon finds it way to Corsica, from where it
is shipped to Monte Carlo with the connivance of the Grimaldi
family.

 

Pakistani laboratories, under the guise of “military defense
laboratories” are doing a bigger share of refining than they were
two years ago, but the best refining is still done along the French
Mediterranean coastline and in Turkey. Here again, banks play a
vital role in financing these operations.


Let us stop here for a moment. Are we to believe that with all the
modern and vastly improved surveillance techniques, including
satellite reconnaissance, available to law enforcement agencies in
these countries, that this vile trade cannot be pin-pointed and
stopped? How is it that law enforcement agencies cannot go in and
destroy these laboratories once they are discovered? If this IS the
case, and we still cannot interdict the heroin trade, then our
anti-narcotics services ought to be known as “The Geriatrics” and
not drug enforcement agencies.


Even a child could tell our alleged “drug watchers” what to do.
Simply keep a check on all factories making acetic anhydride, THE
most essential chemical component needed by laboratories to refine
heroin from raw opium. THEN FOLLOW THE TRAIL! It is as simple as
that! I am reminded of Peter Sellers in the “Pink Panther” series
when I think of law enforcement efforts to locate heroin-refining
laboratories. Even someone as bumbling as the imaginary inspector
would have had no trouble in following the route taken by acetic
anhydride shipments to their final destination.


Governments could make laws that would oblige manufacturers of
acetic anhydride to keep scrupulous records showing who buys the
chemical and for what purposes it is to be used. But do not hold
your breath on this one, remember Dope=Big Business and Big Business
is done by the oligarchical families of Europe and the United States
Eastern Liberal Establishment.


The drug business is not a Mafia operation, nor one run by the
Colombian cocaine cartels. The noble families of Britain and
America’s top people are not going to advertise their role in the
shop windows; they always have a layer of front men to do the dirty
work.


Remember British and AMERICAN “nobility” never dirtied their hands
in the China opium trade.

 

The lords and ladies were much too clever
for that, as were the American elite:

  • Delanos

  • Forbes

  • Appletons

  • Bacons

  • Boylestons

  • Perkins

  • Russells

  • Cunninghams

  • Shaws

  • Coolidges

  • Parkmans

  • Runnewells

  • Cabots

  • Codmans,

by no
means a complete list of families in America who grew immensely
wealthy from the China opium trade.


Since this is not a book about the drug trade, I cannot of
necessity, cover the subject in an in-depth manner. But its
importance to the Committee of 300 must be emphasized. America is
run not by 60 families but by 300 families and England is run by 100
families and, as we shall see, these families are intertwined
through marriage, companies, banks, not to mention ties to the
Black Nobility, Freemasonry,
the Order of St. John of
Jerusalem
and so on.

 

These are the people who, through their surrogates, find ways to
protect huge shipments of heroin from Hong Kong, Turkey, Iran and
Pakistan and ensure they reach the market places in the U.S. and
Western Europe with the minimum cost of doing business.


Shipments of cocaine are sometimes interdicted and seized. That is mere window dressing. Often times the shipments seized
belong to a new organization trying to break into the trade. Such
competition is put out of business by informing the authorities
exactly where it is going to enter the U.S. and who the owners
are. The big stuff is never touched; heroin is too expensive.

 

It is
worthy of note that U.S. Drug Enforcement Agency operatives
are not allowed into Hong Kong. They cannot examine any
ship’s manifest before it leaves the port. One wonders why, if
there is so much “international cooperation” going on – what
the media likes to characterize as “smashing the dope trade.”
Clearly the trade routes for heroin are protected by “a higher
authority. “


In South America, apart from Mexico, cocaine is king. The production
of cocaine is very simple, unlike heroin, and great fortunes are to
be made by those willing to take risks for and on behalf of the
“higher ups.”

 

As in the heroin trade, interlopers are not welcome
and often finish up as casualties, or victims of family feuds. In
Colombia the drug mafia is a closely knit family. But such has been
the bad publicity generated by the M19 guerrilla attack on the
Justice Building in Bogota (M19 is the private army of the cocaine
barons) and the murder of Rodrigo Lara Bonilla, a prominent
prosecutor and a judge, that the “higher authority” had to rearrange
matters in Colombia.


Accordingly, the Ochoas of the Medellin Cartel turned themselves in
after being assured that they would not suffer any loss of fortune,
harm of any kind, nor would they be extradited to the United States.
A deal was struck that, provided they repatriated the bulk of their
huge narco-dollar fortunes to Colombian banks, no punitive action
would be taken against them.

 

The Ochoas – Jorge, Fabio, and their top
man, Pablo Escobar, would be held in private jails that resemble a
luxury-class motel room, and then be sentenced to a maximum term of
two years –  to be served in the same motel jail. This deal is
ongoing. The Ochoas have also been guaranteed the right to continue
to manage their “business” from their motel-prison.


But that does not mean that the cocaine trade has come to a
screeching halt. On the contrary, it has simply been transferred to
the second-string Cali cartel, and it is business as usual. For some
strange reason the Cali cartel, which is equal in size to the
Medellin cartel, has been – at least up until now – largely ignored by
the DEA. Cali differs from the Medellin cartel in that it is run by
BUSINESSMEN, who eschew all forms of violence and never break
agreements.
Even more significant is that Cali does virtually no business
in Florida.

 

My source told me that the Cali cartel is run by shrewd
businessmen unlike any seen in the cocaine business. He believes
that they were “specially appointed,” but does not know by whom.

“They never call attention to themselves,” he said. “They do not go
around importing red Ferraris like Jorge Ochoa did, attracting
immediate attention, because it is forbid-den to import such cars
into Colombia.”

Cali cartel markets are in Los Angeles, New York and Houston, which
closely parallel the heroin markets. Cali has not shown any signs of
moving into Florida.

 

A former DEA operative who is a colleague of
mine said recently,

“These Cali people are sure smart. They are a
different breed to the Ochoa brothers. They act like professional
businessmen. They are now larger than the Medellin cartel and I
think we are going to see a lot more cocaine get into the United
States than ever before. The kidnapping of Manuel Noriega will
facilitate an easier flow through Panama of cocaine and money, what
with so many banks there.

 

So much for President George Bush’s
Operation Just Cause. All it did was make life a great deal easier
for Nicolas Ardito Barletta who used to be run by the Ochoa brothers
and who is fixing to front for the Cali cartel.”

Based on my experience with the heroin trade I believe that the
Committee of 300 has stepped in and taken over full control of the
South American cocaine trade.

 

There is no other explanation
for the
rise of the Cali cartel which is coupled with the kidnapping of
Noriega. Did Bush take his orders from London regarding
Noriega?
There is every indication that he was literally PUSHED into invading
Panama and kidnapping Noriega, who had become a serious impediment to
“trade” in Panama, especially in the banking business.


Several former intelligence agents have given me their opinions which coincide with my own. Like the Gulf War that
followed in the wake of Panama, it was only after several calls
from the British Ambassador in Washington that Bush finally
plucked up enough courage to make his totally illegal move on
General Noriega.

 

That he was supported by the British press and the
New York Times, a British intelligence run newspaper, speaks
volumes.


Noriega was formerly the darling of the Washington establishment.
He frequently hob-knobbed with William Casey and Oliver North and
even met with President George Bush on at least two occasions.
Noriega was often seen at the Pentagon where he was treated like one
of those Arab potentates, and the red carpet was always laid out for
him at CIA headquarters in Langley Virginia. U.S. Army Intelligence
and the CIA are on record as having paid him $320,000.


Then storm clouds began to appear on the horizon at about the same
time the Cali cartel was taking over the cocaine trade from the
Ochoa brothers and Pablo Escobar. Led by Senator Jesse Helms, who
sold out to Ariel Sharon and the Israeli Histradut Party in 1985,
there suddenly began an agitation for the removal of Noriega. Jesse
Helms and those of a like mind were backed up by Simon Hersh, a
British intelligence agent working for the New York Times, which has
been a British intelligence mouthpiece in the U.S. since the time
that M16 boss, Sir William Stephenson, occupied the RCA building in
New York.


It is very significant that Helms should have chosen to lead the
charge against Noriega. Helms is the darling of the Sharon faction
in Washington and Sharon was the principal gun-runner in Central
America and Colombia. Moreover, Helms has the respect of the
Christian fundamentalists who believe in the maxim: “Israel, my
country, right or wrong.” Thus a powerful momentum was created to
“get Noriega.” It is evident that Noriega could well prove a serious
impediment to the international drug merchants and their Committee
of 300
bankers, so he had to be removed before he could do some
significant damage.


Bush was pressured by his British masters to conduct an
illegal search and seizure operation in Panama that resulted in the
deaths of no less than 7,000 Panamanians and wanton destruction of property. Nothing to implicate
Noriega as a “drug
dealer” was ever found, so he was kidnapped and brought to the U.S.
in one of the most blatant examples of international brigandry in
history.

 

This illegal action probably best meets the Bush
philosophy:

“The moral dimensions of American (read
British royal
family-Committee of 300
) foreign policy require us to chart a moral
course through a world of lesser evils. That’s the real world, not
black and while. Very few absolutes.”

It was a “lesser evil” lo kidnap Noriega, rather than have him
up-end the banks in Panama working for the Committee of 300. The
Noriega case is a prototype of monstrous

One World Government

actions waiting in the wings. An emboldened Bush came right
out in the open, unafraid, because we, the people have put on a
spiritual mantle that accommodates LIES and wants no part of TRUTH.

 

This is the world we have decided to accept. If it were not so, a
firestorm of anger would have swept the country over the invasion of
Panama, which would not have stopped until Bush was hounded from
office. Nixon’s Watergate transgressions pale into
insignificance next to the many impeachable offenses committed by
President Bush when he ordered the invasion of Panama to kidnap
General Noriega.


The government case against Noriega is based upon perjured testimony
by a group of big men, for the most part, already convicted and
lying through their individual and collective teeth to gel their own
sentences lightened.

 

Their performance would have pleased Gilbert
and Sullivan immensely, were they alive today.

“They made them the
rulers of DEA,” might be apropos instead of, “They made them the
rulers of Queen’s Navy,” from ‘HMS Pinafore.’

It is an altogether
grotesque scene to see how these con-artists are performing like
not-so-well-trained seals for the U.S. Justice Department; that is
if we care to insult such a nice clean animal by such an unworthy
comparison.


Key dates conflict wildly, key details are altogether conspicuous by their absence, lapses of memory on crucial points
all add up to the obvious fact that the government has no case
against Noriega, but that does not matter; the Royal Institute for
International Affairs
(RIIA) says “convict him anyway” and that is
what poor Noriega can expect.

 

One of the Justice Department’s star
witnesses is one Floyd Carlton Caceres, a former pilot for the
Ochoa
brothers.

 

Following his arrest in 1986, Carlton tried to ease his
position at the expense of Noriega.

 

 

 

 

Section 4

 

He told his DEA interrogators that the
Ochoa brothers had paid
Noriega $600,000 to allow three planes loaded with cocaine to land
and refuel in Panama.

 

But once in court in Miami, it soon became
apparent that what was billed as the “star witness” for the
prosecution was at best damp squib. Under cross-examination the true
story emerged: Far from being paid to allow the flights, Noriega
wasn’t even approached by the Ochoas.

 

Worse yet, in December of
1983, Noriega had ordered that all flights to Panama from Medellin
be refused permission to land in Panama. Carlton is not the only
discredited witness.


One who is even a sorrier liar than Carlton is Carlos Lehder, who
was a kingpin in the Medellin Cartel until he was arrested in Spain
and sent to the U.S. Who gave the DEA the most vital information
that Lehder was in Madrid? The DEA reluctantly concedes that they
owe this important catch to Noriega. Now, however, the Justice
Department is using Lehder as a witness against Noriega. If nothing
else, this single witness demonstrates the wretchedness of the
United States government’s case against Manuel Noriega.


In return for services rendered, Lehder has been granted an easing
of his sentence and far nicer quarters – a room with a view and
television – and his family was given permanent residence in the U.S.
Robert Merkel, a former U.S. attorney who prosecuted Lehder in 1988
told the Washington Pose “I don’t think the government should be in
the business of dealing with Carlos Lehder, period. This guy is a
liar from beginning to end.


The Justice Department, purely a name which bears no
resemblance to what it is supposed to stand for, has pulled out
all its dirty tricks against Noriega: illegally wire-tapping his
conversations with his lawyer; appointing a government lawyer
to pretend he was serving Noriega but who quit in the middle of
everything; freezing his bank accounts so that Noriega is unable to
conduct a proper defense; kidnapping, illegal search and seizure. You
name it, the government has broken more laws than Noriega has ever
done – if indeed he has broken any laws at all.


It is the U.S. Justice Department that is on trial tenfold more than
General Noriega.

 

The Noriega case shows the glaringly evil system
that passes for “justice” in this country. The U.S. “war on drugs”
is on trial as is the Bush Administration’s so-called drug policy.
The Noriega trial, although it will end in a violent and flagrant
rape of justice, will nevertheless offer some compensation to those
who are not blind, deaf and dumb. It proves for once and for all
that Britain is in charge of our government and it will reveal the
utterly bankrupt ideology of the Bush Administration which ought to
have as its motto, “No Matter What, The End Always Justifies The
Means.

 

There Are Very Few Moral Absolutes.” Like the majority of
politicians, for Bush to have a standard of ABSOLUTE MORALITY WOULD
BE SUICIDAL. Only in this climate could we have allowed President
Bush to violate at least six United States laws and DOZENS OF
INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS in going to war against Iraq.


What we are witnessing in Colombia and Washington is a complete
revision of how the cocaine trade is to be run; no more wild stuff,
no more blazing guns. Let the gentlemen of the Cali cartel in
pin-stripe suits conduct the business in a gentlemanly way In short,
the Committee of 300 has taken a direct hand in the cocaine trade
which henceforth will go as smoothly as the heroin trade. The new
government of Colombia is geared to the change in tactics and
direction. It is on notice to perform ac-cording to the Committee’s
game plan.


There is need to mention U.S. participation in the China
opium trade which began in the southern United States prior to
the War Between The States. How can we tie the opium trade in
with the great cotton plantations of the South? To do that, we
have to start in Bengal, India, producers of the finest (if one can
call such a foul substance fine) opium which was much in demand.
Cotton was THE biggest trade in England, after opium sales through
the BEIC.


Most of the cotton from Southern plantations was worked in the slave
mills of Northern England, where women and children earned a
pittance for a 16-hour day’s work. The cloth mills were owned by the
wealthy socialites in London, the Barings, Palmerstons, Keswicks and
most of all the Jardine Mathesons who owned the Blue Star Shipping
Line
, on which the finished cotton cloth goods were shipped to
India.

 

They could care less about the hapless conditions endured by
Her Majesty’s subject. After all, that is what they were for, and
their husbands and sons were useful for fighting wars to preserve
Her Majesty’s far-flung empire as they had done for centuries, and
latterly, in the bloody Boer War. That was British tradition, wasn’t
it?


Cotton cloth finished goods exported to India undercut and destroyed
the long-standing Indian producers of cotton finished goods trade.
Terrible privation was endured by thousands of Indians thrown out of
work as a result of cheaper British goods taking over their markets.
India then became utterly dependent upon Britain to earn enough
currency to pay for its railroads and finished cotton goods imports.

 

There was only one solution to India’s economic woes. Produce more
opium and sell it for less to the British East India Company. This
was the rock upon which British trade grew and flourished. Without
its opium trade, Britain would have been as bankrupt.


Did the Southern plantation owners know about the ugly
secret of opium-for-cotton goods? It is unlikely that some of
them didn’t know what was going on.

 

Take, for instance, the Sutherland
family, one of the largest cotton plantation owners in the South.
The Sutherlands were closely related to the Matheson family – Jardine Matheson
– who in turn had as their business
partners the Baring Brothers, founders of the famous Peninsular
and Orient Navigation Line
(P&O), the largest of Britain’s many
merchant shipping lines.


The Barings were big investors in Southern plantations as they were
in the U.S. Clipper ships which plowed through the seas between
Chinese ports and all the important ports along the eastern seaboard
of the United States. Today the Barings run a number of very
substantial financial operations in the United States. All of those
names mentioned were, and their descendants still are, members of
the Committee of 300.


The majority of families who go to make up the Eastern Liberal
Establishment, among whom are the wealthiest to be found in this
country, derived their fortunes from either the cotton trade or the
opium trade and in some instances from both. Of these the Lehmans
are an outstanding example. When it comes to fortunes made solely
from the China opium trade, the first names that come to mind are
the Astors and the Delanos. President Franklin D. Roosevelt’s wife
was a Delano.


John Jacob Astor made a huge fortune out of the China opium trade
and then he went respectable by buying up large tracts of Manhattan
real estate with his dirty money. During his lifetime Astor played a
big role in the Committee of 300s’ deliberations. In fact, it was
the Committee of 300 who chose who would be allowed to participate
in the fabulously lucrative China opium trade, through its
monopolist BEIC, and the beneficiaries of their largess remained
forever wedded to the Committee of 300.


That is why, as we shall discover, most real estate in Manhattan
belongs to various Committee members, even as it has since the days
when Astor began buying it up. With the benefit of access to records
that would be closed to others outside of British intelligence, I
discovered that Astor had long been an asset of British intelligence
in the United States. Astor’s financing of Aaron Burr, the murderer
of Alexander Hamilton, proves the point beyond any reasonable doubt.


John Jacob Astor’s son, Waldorf Astor, had the additional
honor bestowed upon him of being appointed to the Royal Institute for International Affairs (RIIA), through which
organization the Committee of 300 controls every facet of our lives
in the United States.

 

The Astor family is believed to have selected
Owen Lattimore to carry on their association with the opium trade
which he did through the Laura Spelman-funded Institute for Pacific
Relations (IPR).
It was the IPR that oversaw China’s entry into the
opium trade as an equal partner and not merely as a supplier. It was
IPR that paved the way for the Japanese attack on Pearl Harbor.
Attempts to turn the Japanese into opium addicts met with dismal
failure.


By the turn of the century the oligarchical plutocrats of Britain
were like overgorged vultures on the Serengeti Plain at the time of
the annual Wildebeest march. Their income from the China opium trade
exceeded David Rockefeller’s income by SEVERAL BILLION DOLLARS PER
ANNUM. Historic records made available to me in the British Museum
in London and from India Office and other sources – former colleagues
in well-placed positions, proves this completely.


By 1905, the Chinese government, deeply concerned about the rise in
the number of opium addicts in China, tried to get help from the
international community. Britain pretended to cooperate, but made no
move whatsoever to abide by the 1905 protocols it had signed. Later
Her Majesty’s government did an about-face after showing China that
it was better to join them in the opium business rather than to try
and end it.


Even The Hague Convention was scoffed at by the British. Delegates
to the convention had agreed that Britain must abide by the
protocols it had signed, which was to drastically reduce the amount
of opium sold in China and elsewhere. The British, while paying lip
service, had no intention of giving up their trade in human misery,
which included the so-called “pig trade.”


Their servant, President George Bush, in prosecution of the
cruel war of genocide waged against the Iraqi nation SOLELY
for and on behalf of British interests, likewise showed his contempt
by flouting the Hague Agreement on Aerial Bombardment, and a whole slew of international conventions to which the
U.S. is a signatory, including ALL of the Geneva Conventions.


When evidence was produced two years later, notably by the Japanese,
who were growing very concerned about British smuggling of opium
into their country, that opium sales had increased instead of
decreased, then Her Majesty’s delegate to the Fifth Hague Convention
produced a set of statistics which were at variance with those
provided by Japan.

 

The British delegate turned the tables by saying
that it made a very strong case for legalizing the sale of opium
which would have the effect of doing away with what he called “the
black market.”


He suggested on behalf of Her Majesty’s government that the Japanese
government would then have a monopoly and full control of the trade.

 

THIS IS PRECISELY THE SAME ARGUMENT BEING ADVANCED BY THE FRONT MEN
FOR THE BRONFMANS AND OTHER BIG-TIME DOPE DEALERS – LEGALIZE COCAINE,
MARIJUANA AND HEROIN, LET THE U.S GOVERNMENT HAVE THE MONOPOLY AND
THEREBY STOP WASTING BILLIONS ON THE PHONY WAR ON DRUGS AND SAVE THE
TAXPAYERS BILLIONS OF DOLLARS.


In the period of 1791-1894, the number of licensed opium dens in the
Shanghai International Settlement rose from 87 to 663.

 

Opium flowing
into the United States was also stepped up. Sensing that they might
have some problems in China with the spotlight of world concern
shining upon them, the plutocrats of the Knights of St. John and the

Order of the Garter
, transferred some of their attention to Persia
(Iran).


Lord Inchcape, who founded the biggest steamship company in the
world at the turn of the 19th century, the legendary Peninsula and
Orient Steam Navigation Company, was the principal mover and shaker
in establishing the Hong Kong and Shanghai Bank, which remains the
largest and least controlled clearinghouse bank for the opium trade,
which also financed the “pig trade” with the United States.

The British had set up a scam whereby Chinese “coolies” were sent to
the U.S. as so-called indentured laborers. The rapacious Harriman
family’s railroad needed “coolies” to push the rail connection
westward to the California coast, or so they said. Strangely enough,
very few Negroes were given the manual labor jobs they were used to
at that time and could have done a better job than the emaciated
opium addicts who arrived from China.


The problem was that there was no market for opium among the Negroes
and, moreover, Lord Inchcape, son of the founder of P and O needed
the “coolies” to smuggle in thousands of pounds of raw opium into
North America, something the Negroes could not do.

 

It was the same
Lord Inchcape who in 1923 warned that there must be no diminishing
of opium poppy cultivation in Bengal.

“This most important source of
revenue must be safeguarded,” he told the commission allegedly
investigating the production of opium gum in India.

By 1846, some 120,000 “coolies” had already arrived in the U.S. to
work on Harriman’s railroad pushing westward. The “pig trade” was in
full profitable swing because, of this number, it was estimated by
the U.S. government 115,000 were opium addicts. Once the railroad
was finished, the Chinese did not go back to where they came from,
but settled in San Francisco, Los Angeles, Vancouver and Portland.
They created a huge culture problem that has never ceased to exist.


It is interesting to note that Cecil John Rhodes, a Committee
of 300
member who fronted for the Rothschilds in South Africa
followed the Inchcape pattern, bringing hundreds of thousand of
Indian “coolies” to work on the sugar cane plantations in Natal
province.

 

Among them was Mahatma Ghandi, a Communist
agitator and troublemaker. Like the Chinese coolies, they were
not returned to their country of origin once their contracts
expired. They, too, went on to create a massive social program,
and their descendants became lawyers who spearheaded the
drive to infiltrate the government on behalf of the Africa
National Congress.


By 1875 the Chinese “coolies” operating out of San Francisco had set
up an opium supply ring that resulted in 129,000 American opium
addicts. What with the known 115,000 Chinese addicts, Lord Inchcape
and his family were raking in hundreds of thou-sands of dollars a
year from this source alone which, in terms of today’s dollar would
represent at least a $100 million dollar income every year.


The very same British and American families who had combined to
wreck the Indian textile industry in the promotion of the opium
trade, and who brought African slaves to the U.S. combined to make
the “pig trade” a valuable source of revenue. Later they were to
combine to cause and promote the terrible War Between The States,
also known as the American Civil War.


The decadent American families of the unholy partnership, thoroughly
corrupted and wallowing in filthy lucre, went on to become what we
know today as the Eastern Liberal Establishment whose members, under
the careful guidance and direction of the Crown and subsequently its
foreign policy executive arm, the Royal Institute of International
Affairs
(RIIA), ran this country – and still does – from top to bottom
through their secret upper-level, parallel government, which is
tightly meshed with the Committee of 300, the ULTIMATE secret
society.


By 1923, voices were being raised against this menace that had been
allowed to be imported into the United States.

 

Believing the United
States to be a free and sovereign nation, Congressman Stephen
Porter, Chairman of the House of Representatives Foreign Affairs
Committee, introduced a bill which called for the British to account
for their opium export-import business on a country-by-country
basis. The resolution set up quotas for each country, which if
observed, would have reduced the opium made by 10%. The resolution
was passed into law and the bill accepted by the Congress of the
United States.


But the Royal Institute of International Affairs had other
ideas. Founded in 1919 in the wake of the Paris Peace Conference
held at Versailles, this was one of the earliest “foreign policy”
executors of the Committee of 300. Research I have done on the
Congressional Records, House, show that Porter was totally unaware
of the powerful forces he was up against. Porter was not even aware
of the existence of the RIIA, much less that its specific purpose
was to control every facet of the United States.


Apparently Congressman Porter received some kind of an intimation
from the Morgan Bank on Wall Street that he should drop the whole
affair. Instead, an enraged Porter took his case to the League of
Nations Opium Committee. Porter’s total un-awareness of who he was
up against is demonstrated in some of his correspondence to
colleagues on the House Foreign Affairs Committee in response to
open British opposition to his proposals.


Her Majesty’s representative chided Porter and then, acting like a
father toward an errant son, the British delegate – on instructions
from the RIIA – presented Her Majesty’s proposals to INCREASE opium
quotas to account for an increase in the consumption of opium for
medicinal purposes. According to documents that I was able to find
in The Hague, Porter was at first confused, then amazed and then
enraged. Joined by the Chinese delegate, Porter stormed out of the
plenipotentiary session of the Committee session, leaving the field
to the British.


In his absence, the British delegate got the League to rubber stamp
Her Majesty’s government proposals for a creation of a tame-tiger
Central Narcotics Board, whose chief function was information
gathering, the terms of which were purposely vague. What was to be
done with the “information” was never made clear. Porter returned to
the U.S. a shaken and much wiser man.


Another British intelligence asset was the fabulously rich William
Bingham, into which family one of the Barings married. It was stated
in papers and documents that I saw that the Baring Brothers ran the
Philadelphia Quakers and owned half of the real estate of that city,
all made possible because of the fortune the Baring Brothers had
amassed from the China opium trade.


Another beneficiary of the Committee of 300’s largess was
Stephen Girard, whose descendants inherited the Girard Bank and
Trust.


The names of the families, whose history is intertwined with that of
Boston and who would never give us ordinary folk the time of day,
were wrapped in the arms of the Committee of 300 and its vastly
lucrative BEIC China opium trade. Many of the famous families became
associated with the notorious Hong Kong and Shanghai Bank which is
still the clearing house for billions of dollars that flow from the
opium trade in China.


Such famous names as Forbes, Perkins and Hathaway appear in the
records of the British East India Company.

 

These genuine American
“bluebloods” created Russell and Company, whose main trade was in
opium, but also ran other shipping enterprises from China to
South
America
and all points in between. As a reward for their services to
the British Crown and the BEIC, the Committee of 300 granted them a
monopoly in the slave trade in 1833.


Boston owes its celebrated past to the cotton-opium-slave trade
granted to it by the Committee of 300 and it is stated in the
records I was privileged to see in London that Boston’s merchant
families were the chief supporters of the British Crown in the
United States. John Murray Forbes is mentioned as the major-domo of
the “Boston Blue Bloods” in India House records and in bank records
in Hong Kong.


Forbe’s son was the first American allowed by the Committee of 300
to sit on the board of the most prestigious drug bank in the
world – even today – the Hong Kong and Shanghai Bank. When I was in Hong
Kong in the early 1960’s as “an historian interested in the British
East India Company,” I was shown some old records, including past
board members of this notorious drug bank, and sure enough, Forbes’
name was among them.


The Perkins family, so illustrious that their name is still
mentioned in awed whispers, were deeply involved in the nefarious
filthy China opium trade. In fact Perkins the elder was one of the
first Americans to be elected to the Committee of 300.


His son, Thomas Nelson, was Morgan’s man in Boston, and as such also
an agent for British intelligence. His unsavory – 
I would say disgusting  – past was not in question when he richly
endowed Harvard University. After all, Canton and Tientsin are a
long way from Boston, and who would have cared anyway?


What helped The Perkinses a lot was that Morgan was a powerful
member of the Committee of 300, which enabled Thomas N. Perkins to
rapidly further his career in the China opium trade.

 

All the Morgans
and Perkinses were Freemasons, which was another tie that bound them
together, for only Freemasons of highest rank have any hope of
being selected by the Committee of 300. Sir Robert Hart, who for
almost three decades was chief of the Imperial Chinese Customs
Service (read the British Crown’s number one agent in the opium
trade in China) was subsequently appointed to the board of Morgan
Guarantee Bank’s Far Eastern Division.


Through access to the historical records in London and Hong Kong, I
was able to establish that Sir Robert developed an intimate
relationship with Morgan operations in the United States. It is
worthy of note that Morgan interests in the opium/ heroin trade have
continued in an unbroken line; witness the fact that David Newbigging is on the advisory board of
Morgan’s Hong Kong operation
run in conjunction with Jardine Matheson.


To those who know Hong Kong, the name of Newbigging will be familiar
as the most powerful name in Hong Kong. In addition to his
membership of Morgan’s elite bank, Newbigging doubles as an advisor
to the Chinese government.

 

Opium for missile technology, opium for
gold, opium for high-tech computers – it is all the same to Newbigging. The way these banks financial houses, trading companies
and the families who run them are intertwined would perplex Sherlock
Holmes, yet somehow they must be unraveled and followed if we are to
understand their connections with the drug trade and their
membership in the Committee of 300.


The two-track entry into the United States of alcohol and
drugs were products of the same stable occupied by the same
thoroughbreds. First, prohibition had to be introduced into the
United States. This was done by the British East India Company heirs
who, acting upon experience gained through the well-documented
China
Inland Mission
records found in India House, set up the
Women’s
Christian Temperance Union
, supposedly to oppose consumption of
alcohol in America.


We say that history repeats itself, and in a sense, this is true.
except that it repeats itself in an ever-upward spiral. Today we
find that some of the largest companies, allegedly “polluting” the
earth, are the largest contributors of funds to the
environ-mentalist movement. The “big names” send forth their
message. Prince Philip is one of their heroes, yet his son Prince
Charles owns a million acres of forested land in Wales from which
timber is regularly harvested and, in addition, Prince Charles is
one of the largest owners of slum housing in London, where pollution
thrives.


In the case of those who railed against the “evils of drink,” we
find they were financed by the Astors, the Rockefellers, the
Spelmans, the Vanderbilts and the Warburgs who had a vested interest
in the liquor trade. On the instructions of the Crown, Lord
Beaverbrook came over from England to tell these wealthy American
families that they were to invest in the WCTU. (It was the same
Lord
Beaverbrook who came to Washington in 1940 and ORDERED Roosevelt to
get involved in Britain’s war.)

 

Roosevelt complied by stationing a
U.S. Navy flotilla in Greenland that spent the 9 months prior to
Pearl Harbor hunting and attacking German U-Boats. Like his
successor, George Bush, Roosevelt thought the Congress a confounded
nuisance so, acting like a king – sense he felt strongly since he is
related to the British royal family – FDR never sought the permission
of Congress for his illegal action.

 

This is what the British are
most fond of referring to as their “special relationship with
America.”


The drug trade has a connection with the murder of President John F. Kennedy, which foul deed stains the national
character and will continue to do so until the perpetrators are
found and brought to justice. There is proof that the Mafia was
involved in this through the CIA, which brings to mind that it all
started with the old Meyer Lansky network which evolved into the
Irgun terrorist organization, and Lansky proved to be one of the
best vehicles for peddling cultural warfare against the West.


Lansky was, through more respectable fronts, associated with the
British higher-ups in bringing gambling and dope distribution to
Paradise Island in the Bahamas under the cover of The Mary Carter
Paint Company – a joint Lansky-British M16 venture. Lord Sassoon was
later murdered because he was skimming money and was threatening to
blow the whistle if he was punished. Ray Wolfe was more presentable,
representing the Bronfmans of Canada. While the Bronfmans were not
privy to Churchill’s massive Nova Scotia Project, they were and
still are nevertheless an important asset of the British royal
family in the business of dope peddling.


Sam Rothberg, close associate of Meyer Lansky, also worked with
Tibor Rosenbaum and Pinchas Sapir, all king pins in the
Lansky drug
ring.
Rosenbaum ran a drug money laundering operation out of
Switzerland through a bank he established for this purpose; Banque
du Credite International
. The bank quickly expanded its activities
and became the principal bank used by Lansky and his mobster
associates for laundering money garnered from prostitution, drugs
and other Mafia rackets.


It is worthy of note that Tibor Rosenbaum’s bank was used
by the shadowy chief of British Intelligence, Sir William
Stephenson, whose right hand man, Major John Mortimer Bloomfield, a Canadian citizen, ran Division Five of the
FBI
throughout the Second World War. Stephenson was an early
member of the 2Oth century Committee of 300, although
Bloomfield never made it that far.

 

As I revealed in my series of
monographs on the Kennedy assassination, it was Stephenson
who master-minded the operation which was run as a hands-on
project by Bloomfield. Fronting for the Kennedy assassination
was done through another drug-related front, Permanent Indus-trial
Expositions (PERMINDEX), created in 1957 and centered in the World
Trade Mart building in downtown New Orleans.


Bloomfield just happened to be the attorney for the Bronfman family.
The World Trade Mart was created by Colonel Clay Shaw and
FBI

Division Five station chief in New Orleans, Guy Bannister.

 

Shaw and
Bannister were close associates of Lee Harvey Oswald, accused of
shooting Kennedy, who was murdered by CIA contract agent
Jack Ruby
before he could prove that he was not the assassin who shot
President Kennedy. In spite of the Warren Commission and numerous
official reports, it has NEVER been established that Oswald owned
the Mannlicher rifle said to be the murder weapon (it was not) nor
that he had ever fired it. The connection between the drug trade, Shaw, Bannister and Bloomfield has been established several times,
and need not concern us here.


In the immediate post-WW II period, one of the most common methods
used by Resorts International and other drug related companies to
clean money was by courier service to a money laundering bank. Now
all that has changed. Only the small fry still use such a risky
method. The “big fish” conduit their money via the CHIPS system, an
acronym for Clearing House International Payments System, run by a
Burroughs computer system centered at the New York Clearing House.

 

Twelve of the largest banks use this system. One of them is the Hong
Kong and Shanghai Bank. Another is Credite Suisse, that oh so
respectable paragon of virtue in banking – until the lid is lifted.
Combined with the SWIFT system based in Virginia, dirty drug money
becomes invisible. Only wanton carelessness results in the FBI
getting lucky now and then, if and when it is told not to look the
other way.


Only low echelon drug dealers get caught with drug money
in their hands. The elite, Drexel Burnham, Credite Suisse, Hong
Kong and Shanghai Bank,
escape detection. But this, too, is
changing with the collapse of Bank of Credit and Commerce
International (BCCI)
which is likely to expose a great deal about
the drug trade if ever a proper investigation is carried out.


One of the largest assets in the portfolio of the Committee of 300
companies is American Express (AMEX). Its presidents regularly
occupy positions on the Committee of 300. I first got interested in
Amex when I was carrying out an on-the-spot investigation that led
me to the Trade Development Bank in Geneva. Later, this got me into
a lot of trouble. I discovered that Trade Development Bank, then run
by Edmund Safra, key man in the gold for opium trade, was supplying
tons of gold to the Hong Kong market via Trade Development Bank.


Before going to Switzerland, I went to Pretoria, South Africa, where
I talked with Dr. Chris Stals, at that time the deputy governor of
the South African Reserve Bank which controls all bulk dealings in
South African-produced gold. After several discussions over a period
of a week, I was told that the bank could not supply me with the ten
tons of gold that I was authorized to buy on behalf of clients I was
supposed to be representing. My friends in the right places knew how
to produce the documentation which passed without question.


The Reserve Bank referred me to a Swiss company whom I cannot name,
because it would blow cover. I was also given the address of Trade
Development Bank
in Geneva. The purpose of my exercise was to find
out the mechanics of how gold is moved and traded, and secondly to
test bogus documents which had been prepared for me by
ex-intelligence friends of mine who specialized in this kind of
thing. Remember “M” in the “James Bond” series? Let me assure you
that “M” does exist, only his correct initial is “C.”

 

The documents
I had consisted of “buying orders” from Liechtenstein companies with
supporting papers to match.


On approaching Trade Development Bank I was at first greeted
cordially but, as discussions progressed with more and more
suspicion until, when I felt it was no longer safe for me to visit
the bank, without telling anyone at the bank I left Geneva.


Later the bank was sold to American Express. American Express
was briefly investigated by former Attorney General Edwin Meese,
after which he was quickly removed from office and labeled
“corrupt.” What I found was that American Express was and still is a
conduit for laundering drug money and, thus far, no one has been
able to explain to me why a private company has the right to print
dollars – aren’t American Express travelers checks dollars? I
subsequently exposed the Safra-Amex drug connections which upset a
lot of people, as can be imagined.

 

Committee of 300 member
Japhet
controls Charterhouse Japhet, which in turn controls
Jardine
Matheson as a direct link to the Hong Kong opium trade. The
Japhets
are reportedly English Quakers. The Matheson family, also members of
the Committee of 300, were kingpins in the China opium trade, at
least up until 1943. The Mathesons have appeared in the Queen of
England Honors List since the early 19th century.


The top controllers of the drug trade in the Committee of 300 have
no conscience about the millions of lives they ruin each year. They
are Gnostics, Cathars, members of the cult of Dionysus, Osiris, or
worse. To them, “ordinary” people are there to be used for their
purposes. Their high-priests, Bulwer-Lytton and Aldous Huxley,
preached the gospel of drugs as a beneficial substance.

 

To quote Huxley:

“And for private everyday use, there have always been chemical
intoxicants. All the vegetable sedatives and narcotics, all the
euphorics that grow on trees, the hallucinogens that ripen in
berries, have been used by humans since time immemorial. And to
these modifiers of conscience, modern science has added its quota of
synthetics. For unrestricted use the West has permitted only alcohol
and tobacco. All other chemical Doors in the Wall are labeled DOPE.”

To the oligarchs and plutocrats of the
Committee of 300,
drugs have a two-fold purpose, firstly to bring in colossal sums
of money and secondly, to eventually turn a major part of the
population into mindless drug zombies who will be easier to control
than people who don’t need drugs, as punishment for rebellion will
mean withholding of supplies of heroin, cocaine, marijuana, etc.

 

For
this it is necessary to legalize drugs so that a MONOPOLY SYSTEM,
which has been readied for introduction once severe economic
conditions, of which the 1991 depression is the forerunner, cause
drug usage to proliferate as hundreds of thousands of permanently
jobless workers turn to drugs for solace.


In one of the Royal Institute of International Affairs top secret
papers, the scenario is laid out as follows (in part):

“…having been failed by
Christianity, and with unemployment on every hand, those who
have been without jobs for five years or more will turn away
from the church and seek solace in drugs.

 

That is when full control of the drug trade must be completed in order that
the governments of all countries who are under our jurisdiction
will have a MONOPOLY which we will control through supply…. Drug
bars will take care of the unruly and the discontent, would be
revolutionaries will be turned into harmless addicts with no will of
their own….”

There is ample evidence that the CIA and
British
intelligence
,
specially M16, have already spent at least a decade working toward
this goal.


The Royal Institute of International Affairs used the life-time work
of Aldous Huxley and Bulwer-Lytton as its blueprint to bring about a
state where mankind will no longer have wills of their own in the

One World Government-New World Order
of the fast-approaching
New
Dark Age
.

 

Again, let us see what high priest Aldous Huxley had to
say about this:

“In many societies at many levels of civilization, attempts
have been made to fuse drug intoxication with God intoxication. In
ancient Greece, for example, ethyl alcohol had its place in the
established religions. Dionysus, Bacchus, as he was often called,
was a true divinity. Complete prohibition of chemical changes can be
decreed but cannot be enforced. (THE LANGUAGE OF THE PRO-DRUG LOBBY
ON CAPITOL HILL.)


“Now let us consider another type of drug
– still undiscovered, but
probably just around the corner – a drug making people happy in
situations where they would normally feel miserable. (Is there
anyone more miserable than a person who has sought and been unable
to find work?)

 

Such a drug would be a blessing, but a blessing
fraught with grave social and political dangers.

 

By making a
harmless chemical euphoria freely available, a dictator (read
Committee of 300) could reconcile an entire population to a state of
affairs to which self-respecting human beings ought not to be
reconciled.”

Quite a dialectical masterpiece. What Huxley was
advocating and
which is official policy of the Committee of 300 and its surrogate,
RIIA, can be quite simply stated as mass mind control. As I have
often said, all wars are wars for the souls of mankind. Thus far it
has not dawned on us that the drug trade is irregular low-intensity
warfare against the whole human race of free men. Irregular warfare
is the most terrible form of warfare which, while it has a
beginning, has no ending.


Some will question the involvement of the British royal families,
past and present, in the drug trade. To see it in print appears on
the surface to be preposterous, and it is being seen in print more
often these days to make it appear exactly that, preposterous. The
oldest maxim in the intelligence business is, “If you want to hide
something, put it where everyone can see it.


F. S. Turner’s book, “BRITISH OPIUM POLICY,” published in 1876,
shows how the British monarchy and its hangers-on
family relatives were deeply involved in the opium trade. Turner was
the secretary of the Anglo Oriental Society of the Suppression of
the Opium Trade. He declined to be silenced by Crown spokesperson
Sir R. Temple. Turner stated that the government, and therefore the
Crown, had to withdraw from the opium monopoly, “and if it takes any
revenues at all, take only that which accrues from taxation honestly
meant to have a restrictive force. “


Turner was answered by a spokesman for the monarchy, Lord Lawrence,
who fought against the BEIC losing its monopoly.

“It would be
desirable to get rid of the monopoly, but I myself am disinclined to
be the agent of change. If it is question of moderate loss that we
could afford, I would not hesitate to undertake it.”

(Taken from the
Calcutta Papers 1870.)

By 1874 the war against the British monarchy and the aristocracy
over its deep involvement in the China opium trade was getting
heated.

 

The Society for the Suppression of the Opium Trade violently
assailed the aristocracy of the day and pressed home its attacks in
a fearless manner we would do well to emulate. The society said that
the Treaty of Tientsin, which Forced China to accept the importation
of enormous amounts of opium, was a dastardly crime against the
Chinese people.


There arose a mighty warrior, Joseph Grundy Alexander, a barrister
by profession who, in 1866, led a strong attack on British Crown
opium policy in China in which he openly mentioned the involvement
of the royal family and the aristocracy. For the first time
Alexander brought India, “the Jewel in the Crown,” into the picture.
He laid the blame squarely where it belonged, on the monarchy, the
so-called aristocracy and its servants in the British government.
Under the direction of Alexander, the society committed itself to
the total destruction of the cultivation of opium poppies in Bengal,
India. Alexander proved to be a doughty opponent.


Through his leadership, the drug aristocracy began to falter and,
in the face of his open denouncements of the royal family and its
hangers-on, several Members of Parliament began siding with him
Conservatives, Unionists, Labor. Alexander made it clear that the
drug trade was not a party political issue; it was for all parties
to join together in helping to eradicate the menace.


Lord Kimberly, spokesman for the royal family and the entrenched oligarchists, threatened that any attempts to interfere with what he
called “the commerce of the nation will run into serious opposition
from the cabinet.” Alexander and his society pressed on in the face
of innumerable threats and finally parliament agreed to appoint a
Royal Commission to enquire into the opium trade, with Lord
Kimberly, who was Secretary of India, as its chairman. A more
inappropriate person to head the commission could not have been
found. It was akin to Dulles being appointed to the Warren
Commission
.


In his first statement, Lord Kimberly made it clear that he would
rather resign from his august position than consent to a resolution
that would surrender Indian Opium Revenues.

 

It is worthy of note
that “Indian Opium Revenue” implied money shared by the nation. Like
the idea that the people of South Africa share in the enormous
profits from the sale of gold and diamonds, this was just not the
case. Indian opium revenues went straight into the royal coffers and
the pockets of the nobility and the oligarchists and plutocrats, and
made them billionaires.


Rowntree’s book, “THE IMPERIAL DRUG TRADE” gives a fascinating
account of how Prime Minister Gladstone and his fellow plutocrats
lied, cheated, twisted and turned to keep the astonishing truth of
the involvement of the British monarchy in the opium trade from
being exposed. Rowntree’s book is a treasure house of information on
the deep involvement of the British royal family and the lords and
ladies of England and the huge fortunes they accumulated from the
misery of the Chinese opium addicts.


Lord Kimberly, secretary of the commission of inquiry, was
himself deeply involved in the opium trade so he did everything in
his power to close the proceedings to all who sought the truth.
Finally, under a great deal of pressure from the public, the Royal
Commission was forced to open the door to this inquiry just a crack,
so that it became apparent that the highest in the land were running
the opium trade and receiving huge benefits from it.

 

But the door
was quickly slammed shut again, and the Royal Commission called no
expert witnesses, thereafter sitting for an absurdly short period of
time. The commission was nothing but a farce and a cover-up, such as
we have become accustomed to in 20th century America.


The Eastern Liberal Establishment families of the United States were
just as deeply involved in the China opium trade as were the
British, indeed they still are. Witness recent history when James
Earl Carter toppled the Shah of Iran. Why was the Shah deposed and
then murdered by the United States government? In a word, because
of DRUGS. The Shah had clamped down and virtually put an end to the
immensely lucrative opium trade being conducted out of Iran by the
British. At the time that the Shah took over in Iran, there were
already one million opium/heroin addicts.


This the British would not tolerate, so they sent the United States
to do their dirty work for them in terms of the “special
relationship” between the two countries. When Khomeini took over the
U.S. Embassy in Teheran, arms sales by the United States, which had
begun with the Shah, were not discontinued.

 

Why not? Had the United
States done so, Khomeini would have canceled the British monopoly of
the opium trade in his country.

 

To prove the point, after 1984,
Khomeini’s liberal attitude toward opium had increased the number of
addicts to 2 million, according to United Nations and
World Health
Organization
statistics.


Both President Carter and his successor, Ronald Reagan,
willingly and with full knowledge of what was at stake, went on
supplying arms to Iran even while American hostages languished
in captivity. In 1980 I wrote a monograph under the title, “What
Really Happened in Iran,” which set out the facts.

 

The arms trade
with Iran was sealed at a meeting between Cyrus Vance, a servant of
the Committee of 300, and Dr. Hashemi, which resulted in the U.S.
Air Force beginning an immediate airlift of arms to Iran, carried on
even at the height of the hostage crisis the arms came from U.S.
Army stockpiles in Germany and some were even flown directly from
the United States with refueling stops at the Azores.


With the advent of Khomeini, who was put in power in Iran by the
Committee of 300, opium production skyrocketed. By 1984 Iran’s opium
production exceeded 650 metric tons of opium per annum. What Carter
and Reagan did was ensure that there was no further interference in
the opium trade and they carried out the mandate given to them by
the oligarchical families in Britain in this connection. Iran
presently rivals the Golden Triangle in the volume of opium
produced.


The Shah was not the only victim of the Committee of 300 William
Buckley, CIA station chief in Beirut, in all his lack of experience
on who is behind the opium trade, began conducting investigations in
Iran, Lebanon and even spent time in Pakistan. From Islamabad,
Buckley began sending back damning reports to the CIA in Langley
about the burgeoning opium trade in the Golden Crescent and
Pakistan. The U.S. Embassy in Islamabad was firebombed, but Buckley
escaped the mob attack and returned to Washington because his cover
was blown by forces unknown.


Then a very strange thing happened. Contrary to all procedures laid down by the
CIA when an agent’s cover has been
blown, Buckley was sent back to Beirut. Buckley was in effect
sentenced to death by the CIA in order to silence him, and this
time the sentence was carried out. William Buckley was kidnapped
by agents of the Committee of 300.

 

Under brutal interrogation
by General Mohammed el Khouili of Syrian intelligence to
force him to disclose the names of all field officers of the DEA
in these countries, he was brutally murdered. His efforts to
expose the huge opium trade developing out of Pakistan,
Lebanon and
Iran cost Buckley his life.


If the remaining free men in this world believe that single-handedly
or in small groups they can smash the drug trade, they are sorely
mistaken. They could cut off the tentacles of the opium and cocaine
trade here and there, but never the head. The crowned cobras of
Europe and their Eastern Liberal Establishment family will not
tolerate it.

 

The war on drugs which the Bush administration is
allegedly fighting, but which it is not, is for TOTAL legalization
of ALL types and classes of drugs. Such drugs are not solely a
social aberration, but a full-scale attempt to gain control of the
minds of the people of this planet, or as the “Aquarian Conspiracy
authors put it, “to bring about radical changes in the United
States.”

 

THIS IS THE PRINCIPAL TASK OF THE COMMITTEE OF 300,
THE
ULTIMATE SECRET SOCIETY
.


Nothing has changed in the opium-heroin-cocaine trade. It is still
run by the same “upper class” families in Britain and the United
States. It is still a fabulously profitable trade where what seem to
be big losses through seizures by the authorities are written off in
paneled boardrooms in New York, Hong Kong and London over port and
cigars as “merely the cost of doing business, old boy.”


British colonial capitalism has always been the mainstay of the
oligarchical feudal system of privilege in England and remains so to
the present day. When the poor, untutored pastoral people in South
Africa
who became known as the Boers fell into the bloodstained
hands of the British aristocracy in 1899, they had no idea that the
revoltingly cruel war so relentlessly pursued by Queen Victoria, was
financed by the incredible amounts of money which came from the
“instant fortunes” of the BEIC opium trade in China into the pockets
of the plutocrats. Committee of 300 members Cecil John Rhodes,
Barney Barnato and Alfred Beit instigated and engineered the war.


Rhodes was the principle agent for the

Rothschilds
, whose
banks were awash in cash flowing from the opium trade.

 

These
robbers, thieves and liars – Rhodes, Barnato, Oppenheimer, Joel and Beit
– dispossessed the
South African Boers of their birthright, the
gold and diamonds that lay beneath their soil. The South African
Boers
received nothing out of the BILLIONS UPON BILLIONS of dollars
derived from the sale of THEIR gold and diamonds.


The Committee of 300 quickly took full control of these vast
treasures, control which it even now maintains through one of its
members, Sir Harry Oppenheimer. The average South African receives
$100 per annum per capita from the gold and diamond industry. The
BILLIONS which flow out annually go to the bankers of the Committee
of 300. It is one of the most foul and vile stories of greed, theft
and the murder of a nation ever recorded in the annals of history.


How could the British Crown have succeeded in pulling off this
stunning fraud of gigantic proportion? To accomplish such a
Herculean task requires skilled organizing with devoted
agents-in-place to carry out the daily instructions passed down from
the conspirators’ hierarchy. The first step was a press propaganda
campaign portraying the Boers as uncivilized barbarians, only
slightly human, who were denying British citizens the right to vote
in the Boer Republic.

 

Then, demands were made on Paul Kruger, leader
of the Transvaal Republic, which of course could not be met. After
that, a series of incidents were staged to provoke the Boers into
retaliation, but that didn’t work either. Then came the infamous
Jameson Raid where a certain Jameson led a party of several hundred
armed men in an attack on the Transvaal. War followed immediately
thereafter.


Queen Victoria mounted the largest and best equipped army
that the world had ever seen at that time ( 1898). Victoria thought
he war would be over in two weeks, since the Boers had no
standing army and no trained militia and would be no match for
her 400,000 soldiers drawn from the ranks of Britain’s underclasses.

 

The Boers never numbered more than 80,000
farmers and their sons  – some were as young as fourteen – 
Rudyard Kipling also thought the war would be over in less than a
week.


Instead, with rifle in one hand and the Bible in the other, the
Boers held out for three years. “We went to South Africa
thinking
the war would be over in a week,” said Kipling. “Instead, the Boers
taught us no end of a lesson.”

 

That same “lesson” could be taught to
the Committee of 300 today if we could but muster 10,000 leaders,
good men and true to lead this nation in battle against the
gargantuan monster threatening to devour everything our Constitution
stands for.

 

 

 

 


Section 5

 

After the war ended in 1902, the British Crown had to consolidate
its grip on the unimaginable fortune of gold and diamonds that lay
beneath the barren veldt of the Boer Republics of Transvaal and
Orange Free State.

 

This was done through the

Round Table
of the
legend of King Arthur and his Knights.

 

The Round Table
is strictly a
British M16 intelligence operation established by the Committee of
300
which, together with the Rhodes Scholarship program, is a dagger
in the heartland of America.


The Round Table was established in South Africa by
Cecil Rhodes and
funded by the English

Rothschild family
. Its purpose was to train
business leaders loyal to the British Crown who would secure the
vast gold and diamond treasures for the British Crown. South
Africans
had their birthright stolen from them in a coup so massive
and all pervading that it was apparent only a central unified
command could have pulled it off. That unified command was the
Committee of 300.


That this was accomplished is not in dispute. By the early 1930’s,
the British Crown had a stranglehold on the biggest supplies of gold
and diamonds ever found in the world. NOW THE COMMITTEE OF 300 HAD
AT ITS DISPOSAL BOTH THE VAST FORTUNE COMING FROM THE DRUG TRADE AND
THE EQUALLY VAST FORTUNE OF THE MINERAL AND METAL WEALTH OF SOUTH
AFRICA. Financial control of the world was complete.


The Round Table played a pivotal role in the coup.

 

The express
purpose of the Round Table, after swallowing up South Africa, was to
blunt the benefits to the United States of the American War of
Independence, and once more bring the United States under British
control. Organizing ability was essential for such an enterprise and
it was provided by Lord Alfred Milner, protégé of the London Rothschild family.

 

Using Scottish Rite Freemason principles in
selecting members of Round Table, chose chosen underwent a period of
intense training at Cambridge and Oxford Universities under the
watchful eyes of John Ruskin, a self-confessed “old school
communist,” and T. H. Green, an operative of M16.


It was Green, the son of a Christian evangelical cleric, who spawned
Rhodes, Milner, John Wheeler Bennet, A. D. Lindsay, George Bernard
Shaw and Hjalmar Schacht, Hitler’s finance minister. I pause here to
remind readers that the Round Table is only ONE SECTOR of this vast
and all-encompassing Committee of 300. Yet the Round Table itself
consists of a maze of companies, institutions, banks and educational
establishments, which in itself would take qualified insurance
actuaries a year to sort out.


Round Tablers fanned out throughout the world to take control of
fiscal and monetary policies and political leadership in all
countries where they operated. In South Africa, General Smuts, who
had fought against the British in the Boer War, was “turned” and
became a leading British intelligence, military and political agent
who espoused the cause of the British Crown.

 

In the United States,
in later years, the task of boring away at the United States from
the inside fell to William Yandell Elliot, the man who spawned
Henry
Kissinger
and who was responsible for his meteoric rise to power as
chief U.S. advisor to the Committee of 300.


William Yandell Elliot was “an American at Oxford,” who had already
served the Committee of 300 well, which is a prerequisite for higher
office in the service of the committee.

 

After graduating from Vanderbilt University in 1917,
Elliot was
drafted by the Rothschild-Warburg banking network. He worked at the
Federal Reserve Bank in San Francisco and rose to be a director.
From there he acted as a Warburg-Rothschild intelligence officer,
reporting on the important areas of the United States he was
overseeing.

 

Elliot’s “Freemason” talent spotters recommended him for
a Rhodes Scholarship and, in 1923, he went to Balliol College at
Oxford University whose “dreaming spires” hid a network of intrigue
and future traitors to the West.


Balliol College was, and still is, the center of recruiting for the
Round Table. After a thorough brainwashing conducted by the
Tavistock Institute of Human Relations representative,
A.D. Lindsay,
who had succeeded Master of Balliol T. H. Green, Elliot was received
into the Round Table and sent to The Royal Institute of
International Affairs
to be given his assignment, which was that he
return to the United States to become a leader in the academic
community.


The Round Table’s driving philosophy was to have Round Tablers in
positions to formulate and carry out social policies through social
institutions whereby what Ruskin called “the masses” could be
manipulated. Members infiltrated the highest levels of banking after
under going a course at the Tavistock Institute.

 

The course was
drawn up by Lord Leconsfield, an intimate of the British royal
family, and later run by Robert Brand who went on to manage
Lazard
Freres. The Royal Institute of International Affairs
was and
remains totally interfaced with the British monarchy.


Some of the spinoffs of the Round Table are:


  • the Bilderbergers
    ,
    set up and run by Duncan Sandys, a prominent politician and
    son-in-law of the late Winston Churchill

  • the Ditchley Foundation, a secret banker’s club which I exposed in my 1983 work,
    “International Banker’s Conspiracy: The Ditchley Foundation”

  • the

    Trilateral Commission
    , the Atlantic Council of the United
    States

  • the Aspen Institute for Humanistic Studies, whose
    well-hidden, behind the scenes founder was Lord Bullock of the
    RIIA for whom Robert Anderson fronted

The way in which Henry Kissinger, the
RllA’s chief asset in the
United States, came to power is a story of the triumph of the
institution of the British monarchy over the Republic of the United
States of America. It is a tale of horror, too long to be included
here.

 

Nevertheless, it would be remiss of me if I did not mention
just a few of the highlights of Kissinger’s rise to fame, fortune
and power.


After a stint in the United States Army, beginning with the job of
driving General Fritz Kraemer around war-torn Germany, thanks to the
Oppenheimer family Kissinger was picked to attend Wilton Park for
further training. At the time he held the rank of private first
class. In 1952 Kissinger was sent to the Tavistock Institute where
R. V. Dicks took him in hand and turned him inside out.

 

Thereafter
there was no holding Kissinger back. He was later drafted to serve
under George Franklin and Hamilton Fish of the

Council on Foreign
Relations
’ New York office.


It is believed that the official nuclear policy adopted by the
United States was delivered to Kissinger during his stay at Tavistock and further shaped by his participation in “Nuclear
Weapons and Foreign Policy,” a Round Table seminar which brought
forth the doctrine known as “flexible response,” a total
irrationality, which became known by the acronym MAD.


Thanks to William Yandell Elliot and under the tutelage of John
Wheeler Bennett, top intelligence director of the Round Table and
chief of MI6 field operations in the United States, Kissinger became
Elliot’s “favorite son” as he explained in his book, “The Pragmatic
Revolt in Politics.” Kissinger was co-opted into the Round Table to
push monetarist policies he studied at Harvard International
Seminars.


Kissinger avidly absorbed Elliot’s teachings and was no
longer recognizable as the man General Kraemer once described
as “my little Jew-boy driver.” Kissinger was inculcated with the
spirit of the Master of Balliol, becoming an ardent disciple of
decadent British aristocracy. Adopting the philosophies of
Toynbee, chief intelligence director for MI6 at the Royal Institute
of International Affairs, Kissinger used its papers to write his
undergraduate “dissertation.”


By the mid 1960’s Kissinger had proved his worth to the

Round Table

and the RIIA, and thus to the British monarchy.

 

As a reward and a
test of what he had learned, Kissinger was placed in charge of a
small group consisting of James Schlessinger, Alexander Haig and
Daniel Ellsberg. The Round Table was using to conduct a series of
experiments. Cooperating with this group was the Institute of Policy
Studies
chief theoretician Noam Chomsky.


Haig, like Kissinger, worked for General Kraemer, albeit not as a
driver, and the general found a number of varied openings in the
Department of Defense for his protégé. Once Kissinger was installed
as National Security Advisor, Kraemer got Haig the job as his
deputy.

 

Ellsberg, Haig, and Kissinger then set in motion the
RIIA’s
Watergate plan to oust President Nixon for disobeying direct
instructions. Haig played the lead role in brainwashing and
confusing President Nixon, and in effect it was Kissinger who ran
the White House during this softening up of the President. As I
mentioned in 1984, Haig was the White House go-between known as
Deep Throat,” passing information to the Washington Post team of
Woodward and Bernstein.


The Watergating of Nixon was the biggest coup yet pulled off by the
Round Table as an agency and an arm of the RIIA. All the tangled
threads led back to the Round Table; from there to the
RIIA, and
right back to the Queen of England.

 

The humiliation of Nixon was an
object lesson and a warning to future Presidents of the United
States not to imagine they could go against the Committee of 300 and
win. Kennedy was brutally murdered in full view of the American
people for the same reason; Nixon was not considered worthy enough
to suffer the same fate as John F. Kennedy.


But whatever the method used, the Committee of 300 made
sure that all would-be aspirants for the White House got the
message: “Nobody is beyond our reach.” That this message remains
just as forceful as it was when Kennedy was murdered and Nixon
hounded out of office, is evidenced by the character of President
George Bush, whose eagerness to please his masters should be cause
for grave concern among those who worry about the future of the
United States.


The purpose of the exercise was made clear in the Pentagon Papers
episode and the drafting of Schlessinger into the Nixon
Administration to act as a spoiler in the defense establishment and
a counterforce to the development of atomic energy, which role Schlessinger carried out from the shelter of his position in the
Atomic Energy Commission, one of the key factors in
deindustrializing the United States in the planned Club of Rome Post
Industrial-Zero-growth strategies.

 

From this beginning we can trace
the roots of the 1991 recession/depression which has thus far cost
the jobs of 30 million Americans.


It is virtually impossible to penetrate the Committee of 300 and the oligarchical families that go to make it up. The camouflage they
pull over themselves as protective covering is very hard to rip off.

 

This fact should be noted by every freedom-loving American: The
Committee of 300 dictates what passes for United States foreign and
domestic policies and has done so for over 200 years. Nowhere was
this more strikingly portrayed than when a cocky President Truman
had the wind knocked out of him by Churchill ramrodding the
so-called “Truman Doctrine” down the throat of the little man from
Independence, Missouri.


Some of their former members, whose descendants filled
vacancies caused by death, and present members include Sir
Mark Turner, Gerald Villiers, Samuel Montague, the Inchcapes,
Keswicks, Peases, Schroeders, Airlies, Churchills, Frasers, Lazars and Jardine Mathesons.

 

The full list of members is presented
elsewhere in this book; these people on the Committee ORDERED President Wilson to go to war against Germany in the
First World War; this Committee ordered Roosevelt to engineer
the Japanese attack on Pearl Harbor with the object of getting the
United States into the Second World War.


These people, this Committee, ordered this nation to war in Korea,
Vietnam and the Persian Gulf. The plain truth is that the United
States has fought in 5 wars this century for and on behalf of the
infamous Committee of 300. It seems that, apart from just a few, no
one has stopped to ask, “WHY ARE WE FIGHTING THESE WARS?” The big
drum of “patriotism,” martial music and waving flags and yellow
ribbons, it seems, caused a great nation to become bereft of its
senses.


On the 50th anniversary of Pearl Harbor, a new “hate Japan” campaign
is being waged, not by the Institute of Pacific Relations (IPR), but
in the most direct and brazen manner by the Bush Administration and
the Congress. The object is the same as it was when Roosevelt
inspired the attack on Pearl Harbor, paint the Japanese as
aggressors and wage economic war, then ready our forces for the next
phase – armed aggression against Japan.


This is already in the works; it is only a matter of time before
more of our sons and daughters are sent off to be slaughtered in the
service of the feudal lords of the Committee of 300. We ought to
shout from the housetops, “It is not for freedom nor for love of
country that we are going to die, but for a system of tyranny that
will shortly envelope the entire world.”


So tight is the grip of this organization on Britain that 95%
of British citizens have, since the 1700’s, been forced to accept
as their share, less than 20% of the national wealth of the
country. This is what the oligarchical feudal lords of England
like to call “democracy.”

 

These nice, proper English gentlemen
are, in reality, utterly ruthless – what they did in India, Sudan,
Egypt, Iraq, Iran and Turkey will be repeated in every country
under the
New World Order-One World Government
.

 

They will
use every nation and its wealth to protect their privileged way of
life. It is this class of British aristocracy whose fortunes are
inextricably woven and intertwined with the drug trade, the
gold, diamond and arms trades, banking, commerce and industry,
oil, the news media and entertainment industry.


Apart from the rank and file of the Labour Party (but not its
leaders), the majority of British political leaders are descendants
of titled families, the titles being hereditary and handed down from
father to eldest son. This system ensures that no “outside-ers”
aspire to political power in England. Nevertheless, some aliens have
been able to squeeze their way in.


Take the case of Lord Halifax, former British Ambassador to
Washington and the man who delivered Committee of 300 orders to our
government during the Second World War. Halifax’s son, Charles Wood,
married a Miss Primrose, a blood relative of Lord Rothschild. Behind
such names as Lord Swaythling is hidden the name of Montague,
director of the Bank of England and adviser and confidant of
the
majority stockholder of the Shell Oil Company, Queen Elizabeth II.

 

All are members of the Committee of 300. Some of the old barriers
have been broken down. Title is today not the only criteria for
admission to the Club of Rome.


It is appropriate to provide an overview of what the Committee of
300 hopes to achieve, what its aims and objectives are before we
proceed to its vast, far flung interlocking interfacing of banks,
insurance companies, corporations, etc. The following information
has taken years of investigative research to put together from
hundreds of documents and sources of mine who gave me access to some
of the papers in which the details are hidden.


The Committee of 300 consists of certain individuals specialists in
their own fields, including cultus diabolicus, mind altering drugs,
and specialists in murder by poison, intelligence, banking, and
every facet of commercial activity. It will be necessary to mention
former members since deceased, because of their former roles and
because their places were given to family members of new members
considered worthy of the honor.


Included in the membership are the:

  • old families of the
    European
    Black Nobility
    ,

  • the American Eastern Liberal Establishment (in

    Freemason
    hierarchy and the

    Order of Skull and
    Bone
    ),


  • the Illuminati
    , or as it is known by the Committee “MORIAH
    CONQUERING WIND,”

  • the Mumma Group,

  • The National and World Council of
    Churches,

  • the Circle of Initiates,

  • the Nine Unknown Men,


  • Lucis
    Trust
    ,

  • Jesuit Liberation Theologists,

  • The Order of

    the Elders of
    Zion
    ,

  • the Nasi Princes,

  • International Monetary Fund (IMF),

  • the Bank
    of International Settlements (BIS),

  • the

    United Nations
    (U.N.),

  • the
    Central,

  • British Quator Coronati,

  • Italian P2 Masonry – especially
    those in
    the Vatican
    hierarchy

  • the Central Intelligence Agency,


  • Tavistock Institute
    selected personnel,

  • various members of leading
    foundations and insurance companies named in the lists that follow,

  • the Hong Kong and Shanghai Bank,

  • the Milner Group-Round Table,

  • Cini
    Foundation,

  • German Marshall Fund,

  • Ditchley Foundation,

  • NATO,


  • Club of
    Rome
    ,

  • Environmentalists,

  • The Order of St. John of Jerusalem,

  • One
    World Government Church,

  • Socialist International,

  • Black Order,


  • Thule
    Society
    ,

  • Anenherbe-Rosicrucianists,

  • The Great Superior Ones

  • and
    literally HUNDREDS of other organizations…

What then are we looking at?

 

A loosely-knit gathering of people with
weird ideas? Certainly not. In the Committee of 300,
which has a
150-year history, we have some of the most brilliant intellects
assembled to form a completely totalitarian, absolutely controlled
“new” society only it isn’t new, having drawn most of its ideas from
the Clubs of Cultus Diabolicus.

 

It strives toward a
One World
Government
rather well described by one of its late members,
H. G.
Wells
, in his work commissioned by the Committee which Wells boldly
called:

“THE OPEN CONSPIRACY – PLANS FOR A WORLD REVOLUTION.”

It was a bold statement of intent, but not really so bold since
nobody believed Wells except the Great Superior Ones, the
Anenherbes
and those who were what we would call “insiders” today.

 

Here is an
extract of what Wells proposed:

“The Open Conspiracy will appear first, I believe as a
conscious organization of intelligent, and in some cases
wealthy men, as a movement having distinct social and political
aims, confessedly ignoring most of the existing apparatus of
political control, or using it only as an incidental implement in
the stages, a mere movement of a number of people in a certain
direction, who will presently discover, with a sort of a surprise,
the common object toward which they are all moving. In all sorts of
ways, they will be influencing and controlling the ostensible
government.”

Like George Orwell’s

1984
, Wells’ account is a mass-appeal for a
One
World Government
.

 

Summarized, the intent and purpose of the
Committee of 300 is to bring to pass the following conditions:

A One World Government and one-unit monetary system under permanent
non-elected hereditary oligarchists who self select from among their
numbers in the form of a feudal system as it was in the Middle Ages.
In this One World entity, population will be limited by
restrictions on the number of children per family, diseases, wars,
famines, until 1 billion people who are useful to the ruling class,
in areas which will be strictly and clearly defined, remain as the
total world population.


There will be no middle class,
only rulers and servants. All laws will be uniform under a legal
system of world courts practicing the same unified code of laws,
backed up by a One World Government police force
and a One World unified military to enforce laws in all former
countries where no national boundaries shall exist. The system
will be on the basis of a welfare state; those who are obedient
and subservient to the One World Government will be
rewarded with the means to live; those who are rebellious will
simply be starved to death or be declared outlaws, thus a target for
anyone who wishes to kill them. Privately owned firearms or weapons
of any kind will be prohibited.


Only one religion will be allowed and that will be in the
form of a One World Government Church, which has been in existence since 1920 as we shall see.
Satanism, Luciferianism and Witchcraft shall he recognized as legitimate
One World
Government
curricula with no private or church schools. All
Christian churches have already been subverted and Christianity will be a thing of the
past in the One World Government.


To induce a state where there is no individual freedom or any
concept of liberty surviving, there shall be no such thing as
republicanism, sovereignty or rights residing with the people.
National pride and racial identity shall be stamped out and in the
transition phase it shall be subject to the severest penalties to
even mention one’s racial origin.


Each person shall be fully indoctrinated that he or she is a
creature of the One World Government with an identification number
clearly marked on their person so as to be readily accessible, which
identifying number shall be in the master file of the NATO computer
in Brussels, Belgium, subject to instant retrieval by any agency of
the One World Government at any time.

 

The master Files of the

  • CIA

  • FBI

  • state and local police
    agencies

  • IRS


  • FEMA

  • Social Security,

…shall be vastly expanded and form the basis of personal records of
all individuals in the United States.


Marriage shall be outlawed and there shall be no family life as we
know it. Children will be removed from their parents at an early-age
and brought up by wards as state property. Such an experiment was
carried out in East Germany under Erich Honnecker when children were
take away from parents considered by the state to be disloyal
citizens.

 

Women will he degraded through the continued process
of “women’s liberation” movements. Free sex shall be mandatory.


Failure to comply at least once by the age of 20 shall be
punishable by severe reprisals against her person. Self-abortion
shall be taught and practiced after two children are born to a
woman; such records shall be contained in the personal file of
each woman in the One World Government’s regional computers. If a woman falls pregnant after she has previously given
birth to two children, she shall be forcibly removed to an abortion clinic for such an abortion and sterilization to be carried out


Pornography shall be promoted and be compulsory showing in every
theater of cinema, including homosexual and lesbian pornography. The
use of “recreational” drugs shall be compulsory, with each person
allotted drug quotas which can be purchased at One World Government
stores throughout the world.

 

Mind control drugs will be expanded
and usage become compulsory. Such mind control drugs shall be given in
food and/or water supplies without the knowledge and/or consent of
the people. Drug bars shall be set up, run by One World Government
employees, where the slave-class shall be able to spend their free
time. In this manner the non-elite masses will be reduced to the
level and behavior of controlled animals with no will of their own
and easily regimented and controlled.


The economic system shall be based upon the ruling oligar-ethical
class allowing just enough foods and services to be produced to
keep the mass slave labor camps going. All wealth shall be
aggregated in the hands of the elite members of the Committee of
300
. Each individual shall be indoctrinated to understand that
he or she is totally dependent upon the state for survival.

 

The
world shall be ruled by Committee of 300 Executive Decrees which
become instant law. Boris Yeltsin is using Committee of 300 decrees to impose the
Committee’s will on Russia as a trial run. Courts of punishment and
not courts of justice shall exist.


Industry is to be totally
destroyed along with nuclear powered energy systems. Only the
Committee of 300 members and their elitists shall have the right
to any of the earth’s resources. Agriculture shall be solely in
the hands of the Committee of 300 with food production strictly
controlled. As these measures begin to take effect, large
populations in the cities shall be forcibly removed to remote
areas and those who refuse to go shall be exterminated in the
manner of the One World Government experiment carried out by
Pol
Pot in Cambodia.

Euthanasia for the terminally ill and the
aged shall be compulsory.
No cities shall be larger than a predetermined number as described
in the work of Kalgeri. Essential workers will be moved to other
cities if the one they are in becomes overpopulated. Other
non-essential workers will be chosen at random and sent to
underpopulated cities to fill “quotas.”


At least 4 billion useless
eaters” shall be eliminated
by the year 2050 by means of limited
wars, organized epidemics of fatal rapid-acting diseases and
starvation.

 

Energy, food and water shall be kept at subsistence
levels for the non-elite, starting with the
White populations of Western Europe and North America and then
spreading to other races.

 

The population of Canada, Western Europe
and the United States will be decimated more rapidly than on other
continents, until the world’s population reaches a manageable level
of 1 billion, of which 500 million will consist of Chinese and
Japanese races, selected because they are people who have been
regimented for centuries and who are accustomed to obeying authority
without question.


From time to time there shall be artificially contrived food and
water shortages and medical care to remind the masses that their
very existence depends on the goodwill of the Committee of 300.


After the destruction of
housing, auto, steel and heavy goods industries, there shall he
limited housing, and industries of any kind allowed to remain
shall be under the direction of NATO’s Club of Rome as shall all
scientific and space exploration development, limited to the
elite under the control of the Committee of 300.
Space weapons of all former nations shall be destroyed along with
nuclear weapons.


All essential and non-essential
pharmaceutical products, doctors, dentists and health care
workers will be registered in the central computer data bank and
no medicine or medical care will he prescribed without express
permission of regional controllers
responsible for each city, town and village.


The United States will be flooded by peoples of alien cultures
who will eventually overwhelm White America, people with no concept
of what the United States Constitution stands for and who will, in
consequence, do nothing to defend it, and in whose minds the concept
of liberty and justice is so weak as to matter little.

 

FOOD and
shelter shall be the main concern.


No central bank save the Bank of International Settlement and the
World Bank shall be allowed to operate. Private banks will be
outlawed. Remuneration for work performed shall be under a uniform
predetermined scale throughout the One World Government. There shall
be no wage disputes allowed, nor any diversion from the standard
uniform scales of pay laid down by the One World Government. Those
who break the law will be instantly executed.


There shall be no cash or
coinage in the hands of the non-elite. All transactions shall be
carried out by means of a debit card which shall bear the
identification number of the holder. Any person who in any way
infringes the rules and regulations of the Committee of 300
shall have the use of his or her card suspended for varying
times according to the nature and severity of the infringement.


Such persons will find, when they go to make purchases, that their
card is blacklisted and they will not be able to obtain services of
any kind. Attempts to trade “old” coins, that is to say silver coins
of previous and now defunct nations, shall be treated as a capital
crime subject to the death penalty. All such coinage shall be
required to be surrendered within a given time along with guns,
rifles, explosives and automobiles. Only the elite and One World
Government
high-ranking functionaries will be al-lowed private
transport, weapons, coinage and automobiles.


If the offense is a serious one, the card will be seized at the
checking point where it is presented. Thereafter that person shall
not be able to obtain food, water, shelter and employment medical
services, and shall be officially listed as an outlaw.


Large bands of outlaws will thus be created and they will live in
regions that best afford subsistence, subject to being hunted
down and shot on sight. Persons assisting outlaws in any way
whatsoever, shall likewise be shot. Outlaws who fail to surrender
to the police or military after a declared period of time, shall
have a former family member selected at random to serve prison terms
in their stead.


Rival factions and groups such as Arabs and Jews and African tribes
shall have differences magnified and allowed the wage wars of
extermination against each other under the eyes of NATO and
U.N.
observers. The same tactics will be used in Central and South
America
.

 

These wars of attrition shall take place BEFORE the
take-over of the One World Government and shall be engineered on
every continent where large groups of people with ethnic and
religious differences live, such as the Sikhs, Moslem Pakistanis and
the Hindu Indians. Ethnic and religious differences shall be
magnified and exacerbated and violent conflict as a means of
“settling” their differences shall be encouraged and fostered.


All information services and print media shall be under the control
of the One World Government. Regular brainwashing control measures
shall be passed off as “entertainment” in the manner in which it was
practiced and became a fine art in the United States. Youths removed
from “disloyal parents,” shall receive special education designed to
brutalize them.

 

Youth of both sexes shall receive training to
qualify as prison guards for the One World labor camp system.

It is obvious from the foregoing that much work remains to be done
before the dawning of the New World Order can occur.

 

The
Committee
of 300
has long ago perfected plans to destabilize civilization as
we know it, some of which plans were made known by

Zbignew
Brzezinski
in his classic work “THE TECHNOTRONIC ERA” and the works
of Aurellio Peccei who founded the Club of Rome, especially in his
book, “THE CHASM AHEAD.”


In “THE CHASM AHEAD,” Peccei spelled out Committee of 300 plans to
tame man, whom he called “THE ENEMY.”

Peccei quoted what Felix Dzerzinski once said to Sydney Reilly at
the height of the Red Terror when millions of Russians were being
murdered:

 “Why should I concern myself with how many die? Even the
Christian Bible says what is man that God should be mindful of him?
For me men are nothing but a brain at one end and a shit factory at
the other.“

It was from this brutish view of man that
Emmanuel The Christ came
to rescue the world. Sydney Reilly was the MI6 operative sent to
watch over Dzerzinski’s activities. Reilly was allegedly shot by his
friend Felix while attempting to flee Russia.

 

The elaborate plot
was devised when certain members of the British Parliament raised a
hue and cry and began to loudly demand an accounting of Reilly’s
activities in Russia, which threatened to expose the role of the
Committee of 300 in gaining control of the Baku oilfields and its
major role in assisting Lenin and Trotsky during the Bolshevik
Revolution.

 

Rather than have the truth dragged out of Reilly,
MI6
thought it expedient to stage his death. Reilly lived out his days
in utter luxury in a Russia villa usually reserved for the Bolshevik
elite.


Arguing that chaos would ensue unless the “Atlantic Alliance,” a
euphemism for the Committee of 300 ruled post industrial America,
Peccei proposed a Malthusian triaging on a global scale. He
envisioned a collision between the scientific-technological-military
apparatus of the Soviet Union and the Western world. Thus the Warsaw
Pact countries were to be offered a convergence with the West in a
One World Government to run global affairs on the foundations of
crisis management and global planning.


Events unfolding in what was formerly the USSR and the
emergence of several independent states in a loose federation in
Russia, is exactly what was envisaged by Peccei and the
Club of
Rome
and this is clearly spelled out in both the books I have
mentioned. A USSR thus divided will be easier to cope with
than a strong, united Soviet nation.

 

Plans that were laid down by
the Committee of 300 for a One World Government, which
included the prospect of a divided Russia, are now approaching a
point of rapid escalation. Events in Russia at the close of 1991 are
all the more dramatic when viewed against the 1960 long-range
planning by the Committee of 300.


In Western Europe the people are working toward a federation of
states within a one government framework with a single currency.
From there the EEC system will be transferred bit by bit to the
United States and Canada. The United Nations is benign slowly but
surely transformed into a rubber stamp of One World Government, with
policies dictated to it by the United States as we saw in the case
of the Gulf War.


Precisely the same thing is happening with the British Parliament.
Discussion on Britain’s participation in the Gulf War was kept to a
ridiculously minimal level and belatedly took place only during a
motion to adjourn the House. This has never happened before in the
ancient history of parliament, where so important a decision had to
be made and so little time was allowed for discussion. One of the
most noteworthy events in parliamentary history has gone virtually
unnoticed.


We are close to the point where the United States will send its
military Forces to settle any and all disputes brought before the
United Nations. Departing Secretary General Perez de Cuellar,
heavily laden with bribe money, was the most compliant U.N. leader
in history in granting demands of the United States without
discussion. His successor will be even more inclined to go along
with whatever the U.S. government places before him. This is an
important step along the road to a One World Government.


The International Court of Justice at The Hague will be used
in increasing measure in the next two years to settle legal
arguments of all types.

 

It is of course the prototype for a One
World Government
legal system that will supplant all others. As
for central banks, essential in the planning of the New World
Order, this is already very much a fait-accompli with the Bank
of International Settlements
dominating the scene at the close of
1991. Private banks are fast disappearing in preparation for the
Big Ten banks that will control banking the world over under the
guidance of BIS and the IMF.


Welfare states abound in Europe, and the United States is fast
becoming the largest welfare state in the world. Once people come to
depend on government for their subsistence, it will be very hard to
wean them away from it as we saw in the results of the last mid-term
election held in the United States where 98% of incumbents were
returned to Washington to enjoy the good life in spite of their
utterly deplorable records.


The abolition of privately owned firearms is already in force in
three quarters of the world. Only in the United States can the
populace still own guns of all types, but that legal right is being
chipped away at an alarming rate by local and state laws which
violate the Constitutional right of all citizens to bear arms.
Private gun ownership will have become a thing of the past in the
United States by the year 2010.


Similarly, EDUCATION IS BEING ERODED AT AN ALARMING RATE. PRIVATE
SCHOOLS ARE BEING FORCED TO CLOSE BY A VARIETY OF LEGAL STRATA-GEMS
AND LACK OF FUNDING. The standard of education in the United States
has already sunk to such a deplorable level that today it can barely
be classified as education at all.

 

This is according to plan; as I
described earlier, the One World Government does not want our youth
to be properly educated.


Destruction of national identity proceeds apace. It is no longer a
good thing to be patriotic unless it is in the cause of some One
World Government
project such as the war of genocide being waged
against the nation of Iraq, or the impending destruction of Libya.
Racial pride is now frowned upon and deemed to be an illegal act in
many parts of the world, INCLUDING THE UNITED STATES, BRITAIN,
WESTERN EUROPE AND CANADA, ALL COUNTRIES HAVING THE LARGEST
CONCENTRATIONS OF THE WHITE RACE.


Led by the secret societies in America, destruction of republican forms of government has proceeded apace since the close
of WW II. A list of such governments destroyed by the U.S. is long,
and it is difficult for the non-informed to accept that government
of a country allegedly wedded to republicanism under a unique
constitution would engage in such conduct, but the facts speak for
themselves.


This is a goal which was set over a century ago by the Committee of
300. The United States has led the attacks on such governments and
continues to do so even as the United States republican base is
being steadily undermined. Starting with James Earl Carter’s legal
counsel, Lloyd Cutler, a committee of constitutional lawyers has
been working to change the U.S. Congress into a non-representative
parliamentary system.

 

Work has been in progress since 1979 on the
blueprint for such a change, and because of his devotion to the
cause, Cutler was made a member of the Committee of 300. The final
draft for a parliamentary type of government is to be presented to
the Committee of 300 at the end of 1993.


In the new parliamentary system, members will not be responsible to
their constituents, but to parliamentary whips and will vote the way
they are told to vote. Thus, by judicial and bureaucratic subversion
will the Constitution vanish as will individual liberty. Preplanned
degrading of man through licentious sexual practices will be
stepped up. New sexually degenerate cults are even now being set up
by the British Crown –  working through the SIS and
MI6
services. As
we already know, all cults operating in the world today are the
product of British intelligence acting for the oligarchical rulers.


We may think this phase of creating a whole new cult which
specializes in sexual degenerate behavior is still far off, but my
information is that it is due to be stepped up in 1992. By 1994 it
will be quite commonplace to have “live shows” in the most
prestigious clubs and places of entertainment. This type of
“entertainment” is already in the process of having its image
cleaned and brightened.


Soon the big names in Hollywood and the entertainment
world will be recommending this or that club as a “must” for live
sex shows. Lesbianism and homosexuality will not be featured. This
new socially acceptable “entertainment” will consist of heterosexual
displays and will be written up in reviews as one finds in today’s
newspapers about shows on Broadway, or the latest hit movie.


An unprecedented assault on moral values will go into high gear in
1992. Pornography will no longer be called “pornography,” but adult
sex entertainment. Sloganeering will take the form of “why hide it
when everybody does it. Let’s take away the image that public
displays of sex are ugly and dirty.” No more will those who care for
this type of unbridled sexual lust have to go to seedy porno
parlors. Instead, the upper-class supper clubs and places favored by
the rich and famous will make public sexual displays a highly
“artistic” form of entertainment. Worse yet, some church “leaders”
will even recommend it.


The voluminous all-pervading and enormous social psychiatry apparatus put in place by the
Tavistock Institute and its
huge web of related capabilities has been under the control of
one single entity, and that entity is still in control as we enter
1992.

 

That single entity, the conspirators’ hierarchy, is called
THE
COMMITTEE OF 300.

 

It is a power structure and a power center that
operates far beyond the reach of any single world leader or any
government, including the United States government and its
Presidents – as the late John F. Kennedy found out. The Kennedy murder
was an operation of the Committee of 300 and we shall return to
that.


The Committee of 300 is the ultimate secret society made up
of an untouchable ruling class, which includes:

  • the Queen of
    England

  • the Queen of the Netherlands

  • the Queen of Denmark

  • the royal families of Europe

These aristocrats decided at
the death of Queen Victoria, the matriarch of the Venetian Black Guelphs that, in order to gain world-wide control, it would be
necessary for its aristocratic members to “go into business” with
the non-aristocratic but extremely powerful leaders of corporate
business on a global scale, and so the doors to ultimate power were
opened to what the Queen of England likes to refer to as “the
commoners.”


From my days in the intelligence business I know that heads of
foreign governments refer to this all-powerful body as “The
Magicians
.” Stalin coined his own phrase to describe them: “The Dark
Forces
,” and President Eisenhower, who was never able to get beyond
the “hofjuden” (court Jew) grade, referred to it in a colossal
understatement as “the military-industrial complex.”

 

Stalin kept the USSR heavily armed with conventional and nuclear
forces because he did not trust what he called “the family.” His
ingrained mistrust and fear of the Committee of 300 proved to be
well-founded.


Popular entertainment, especially the medium of movie making, was
used to bring discredit upon those who tried to warn of this most
dangerous threat to individual liberty and freedom of mankind.
Freedom is a God-given law which man has constantly sought to
subvert and undermine; yet the yearning for freedom by each
individual is so great that up to now, no system has been able to
tear that feeling from the heart of mad. The experiments that have
gone on in the USSR, Britain and the USA, to blunt and dull mans
yearnings for freedom, have thus far proved to be unsuccessful.


But with the coming of the

New World Order-One World Government
,
far-reaching experiments will be stepped up to drive mans God-given
yearning for freedom out of his mind, body and soul.

 

What we are
already experiencing is but nothing, a mere bagatelle, when compared
with what is to come. Attacking the soul is the thrust of a host of
experiments being readied, and I regret to say that institutions in
the United States will play a leading role in the terrible
experiments which have already been carried out on local small-scale
levels at such places as Bethesda Naval Hospital and Vacaville
prison in California.


The movies we have seen thus far include the James Bond
series, the “Assassination Bureau,” the “Matarese Circle” and so on.
They were make-believe movies, designed to hide the truth that such
organizations do exist and on a far greater scale than even
Hollywood’s fertile idea-men could dream up.


Yet the Assassination Bureau is absolutely real. It exists in Europe
and the United States solely to do the bidding of the Committee of
300
to carry out high-level assassinations where all other remedies
have failed. It was PERMINDEX which ran the Kennedy assassination
under the direction of Sir William Stephenson, for years the Queen
of England’s number one “pest control” operative.


Clay Shaw, a contract agent of the CIA, ran
PERMINDEX out of the
Trade Mart Center in New Orleans. Former New Orleans District
Attorney Jim Garrison came very close to cracking the Kennedy
assassination plot up to the level of Clay Shaw until Garrison was
“dealt with” and Shaw was found not guilty of involvement in the
Kennedy assassination plot. The fact that Shaw was eliminated in the
manner of Jack Ruby, another CIA contract agent – both died of induced
quick-acting cancer – speaks volumes that Garrison was on the right
track.


A second assassination bureau is located in Switzerland and was
until recently run by a shadowy figure of whom no photo-graphs
existed after 1941. The operations were and probably still are
financed by the Oltramaire family – Swiss Black Nobility, owners of
the Lombard Odier Bank of Geneva, a Committee of 300 operation. The
primary contact man was Jacques Soustelle – this according to U.S.
Army-G2 intelligence files.


This group was also closely allied with Allen Dulles and
Jean de Menil, an important member of the Committee of 300
and a very prominent name in the oil industry in Texas. Army-G2 records show that the group was heavily involved in the
arms trade in the Middle East, but more than that, the assassination bureau made no less than 30 attempts to assassinate
General de Gaulle, in which Jacques Soustelle was directly
involved. The same Soustelle was the contact man for the
Sendero LuminosoShining Pathway guerilla group protecting the
Committee’s Peruvian cocaine producers.


When all of the best that the assassination bureau could do had
failed, thanks to the excellent work done by DGSE (French
intelligence
-formerly SDECE) the job was assigned to MI6–Military Intelligence Department Six, and also known as
Secret
Intelligence Service
(SIS), under the code name “Jackal.”
SDECE
employed clever young graduates and was not infiltrated by MI6 or
the KGB to any measurable extent. Its record in tracking down
foreign agents made it the envy of the secret services of every
nation, and it was this group that followed “Jackal” to his final
destination and then killed him before he could fire on General de
Gaulle’s motorcade.


It was the SDECE who uncovered a Soviet mole in the cabinet of
De
Gaulle, who also happened to be a liaison man with the CIA in
Langley. In order to discredit the SDECE, Allen Dulles, who hated
De
Gaulle, (the feeling was mutual) had one of its agents, Roger De Louette, caught with $12 million worth of heroin in his possession.
After a great deal of expert “interrogation,” De Louette
“confessed” but was unable to say why he was smuggling drugs into
the United States. The whole thing stank to high heaven of a set-up.


Based upon an examination of SDECE methods in protecting
De Gaulle,
especially in motorcades, the FBI, Secret Service and the CIA knew
exactly how to strip President Kennedy of his security and make it
easy for the three PERMINDEX shooters to murder him in Dealey Plaza
in November 1963.


Another example of FACT disguised as fiction is the Leon Uris novel,
TOPAZ.” In “TOPAZ” we find a factual account of the activities of
Thyraud de Vosjoli, the very KGB agent un-covered by
SDECE and
denounced as the KGB’s liaison man with the CIA. There are many
fictionalized accounts of the MOSSAD’s activities, nearly all of
which are based on fact.


The MOSSAD is also known as “The Institute.” Many
would-be writers make nonsensical statements about it, especially
one writer who is much in favor with the Christian right wing, which
is accepted as truth. One can pardon the offender because he has no
intelligence training, but that does not stop him from dropping
“Mossad names” all over the place.


Such disinformation exercises are routinely run against American
right wing patriotic groups. Originally the MOSSAD consisted of 3
groups, the Bureau of Military Intelligence, the
Political
Department of the Foreign Office
and the Department of Security
(Sherut Habitachon). David Ben Gurion, a member of the
Committee of
300
, received some considerable help from MI6 in putting it
together.


But it was not a success, and in 1951 Sir William Stephenson of
MI6
restructured it into a single unit as arm of the Political
Department of the Israeli Foreign Office, with a special operations
group for espionage and “black job” operations. British
intelligence gave further assistance in training and equipping for
servicing the Sarayet Maktal, also known as the General Staff
Reconnaissance unit, in the format of Britain’s Special Air Service
(SAS).

 

This service unit of the MOSSAD is never mentioned by name
and is known simply as “The Guys.”


The Guys” are merely an extension of British intelligence’s
SAS
unit who continually train and update them in new methods. It was
“The Guys” who killed the leaders of the P.L.0. and kidnapped Adolph Eichmann. “The Guys” and indeed ALL
MOSSAD agents, operate on a
war-time footing. The MOSSAD has a tremendous advantage over other
intelligence services in that every country in the world has a large
Jewish community.


By studying social and criminal records, the MOSSAD is
able to pick agents among local Jews it can have a hold over
AND MAKE THEM WORK FOR IT WITHOUT PAY.

 

The
MOSSAD also has the advantage of having access to the records
of all U.S. law enforcement agencies and U.S. intelligence
services The Office of Naval Intelligence (OM) ELINT services
the Mossad at no cost to Israel. Citizens of the United States
would be shocked, angered and dismayed if ever it was
discovered just how much the MOSSAD knows about the lives of
millions of Americans in every walk of life, even those who are not
political in any way.


The first head of the MOSSAD, Reuben Shiloach, was made a member of
the Committee of 300, but it is not known whether his successor
enjoyed the same privilege. Chances are that he does. The MOSSAD has
a skillful disinformation service. The amount of disinformation it
feeds to the American “market” is embarrassing, but even more
embarrassing is how it is swallowed hook, line and sinker and all.


What we are actually witnessing in the microcosm of the
MOSSAD is the extent of control exercised by the “Olympians”
over the intelligence services, entertainment, publishing, opinion-making (polls) and the television “news” media on a global
scale. Ted Turner was recently given a seat on the Committee of
300
in recognition for his “news” (making) CNN broadcasts.

 

The
Committee has the power and the means to tell the people of this
world ANYTHING, and it will be believed by the vast majority. On
every occasion that a researcher happens upon this astounding
central control group, he is either successfully bought off, or else
he undergoes some “speciality training” at the Tavistock Institute
after which he becomes a contributor to more fiction, of the James
Bond type, i.e., he is derailed and well rewarded.

 

If such a person
as John F. Kennedy should stumble onto the truth about who directs
world events, and cannot be bought, he is assassinated.


In the case of John F. Kennedy, the assassination was carried out
with great attendant publicity and with the utmost brutality to
serve as a warning to world leaders not to get out of line.

 

Pope
John Paul I was quietly murdered because he was getting close to the
Committee of 300 through Freemasons in the
Vatican hierarchy. His
successor, Pope John Paul 11, was publicly humiliated as a warning
to cease and desist – which he has done. As we shall see, certain
Vatican leaders are today seated on the Committee of 300.


It is easy to put serious researcher off track of the Committee of
300
because Britain’s MI6 (SAS) promotes a wide variety of kookery
such as the New Age, Yogaism, Zen Buddhism, Witchcraft, Delphic
Priesthood of Apollo
(Aristotle was a member) and hundreds of small
“cults” of all kinds. A group of “retired” British intelligence
agents who stayed on the track labeled the conspirators’ hierarchy
Force X,” and declared that it possesses a super-intelligence
service that has corrupted the KGB, the Vatican Intelligence, the
CIA, the ONI, DGSE, U.S. military intelligence, the State Department
intelligence service and even the most secret of all U.S.
intelligence agencies, the Office of National Reconnaissance.


The existence of the National Reconnaissance Office (NRO) was known
to only a handful of people outside of the Committee of 300, until
Truman stumbled upon it quite by accident. Churchill had a hand in
setting up the NRO and he was reportedly livid when Truman
discovered its existence.

 

Churchill more than any other servant of
the Committee of 300, considered Truman His-Little-Man from
independence “without an independence at all.” This referred to
Truman’s every move being controlled by Freemasonry. Even today, NRO’s annual budget is not known to the Congress of the United
States, and it is responsible to only a selected few in Congress.

 

But it is a creature of the Committee of 300 to whom its reports are
routinely sent every few hours.



Back to A Ponerological Profile – Henry
Kissinger

 

 

 

 


Section 6

 

Thus the fictionalized spoofs one sees about the various branches
and arms of control of the Committee were designed to take suspicion
away from the real thing, but we should never doubt that the real
thing does indeed exist.

 

Take another example of what I mean, the
book “THE DAY OF THE JACKAL,” from which a highly successful movie
was created.


The events related in the book are factual. Although for
obvious reasons the names of some of the players and the
locales were changed, but the thrust of the story, that a single
MI6 operative was assigned to get rid of General Charles De Gaulle, is absolutely correct.
General De Gaulle had become
unmanageable, refusing to cooperate with the Committee –  whose
existence he knew very well since he had been invited to join
it – came to a climax when De Gaulle withdrew France from NATO and
immediately began building his own nuclear force – the so-called
“force de frappe.”


This so angered the Committee that De Gaulle’s assassination was
ordered. But the French secret intelligence service was able to
intercept “Jackal’s” plans and keep De Gaulle safe. In the light of
the record of MI6, which I might add is the Committee of 300’s main
resource when it comes to intelligence, the work done by French
intelligence borders on the miraculous.


Military Intelligence Department Six dates back to Sir Francis Walsingham, paymaster of
Queen Elizabeth I for dirty tricks
operations. Over hundreds of years, MI6 has established a record
which no other intelligence agency can come near to duplicating. MI6
agents have gathered information from the four corners of the earth
and have carried out secret operations that would astound even the
most knowledgeable if ever they were to be made public, which is why
it rates as the Master service of the Committee of 300.


Officially, MI6 does not exist, its budget comes out of the Queen’s
purse and “private funds,” and is reported to be in a range of
$350-$500 million per annum, but no one knows for sure what the
exact amount is. In its present form MI6 dates back to 1911, when it
was under the leadership of Sir Mansfield Cumming, a captain in the
Royal Navy, who was always identified by the letter “C,” from which
“M” of James Bond fame is taken.


No official record of MI6’s failures and successes exist – it
is that secret, although the Burgess-Maclean-Blake-Blunt disasters did great damage to the morale of MI6 officers. Unlike
other services, future members are recruited from universities
and other areas of learning by highly skilled “talent scouts” as
we saw in the case of Rhodes Scholars inducted into the Round
Table
. One of the requirements is an ability to speak foreign
languages. Candidates undergo a rigorous “blooding.”


With the backing of such a formidable force, the Committee of 300
had little fear from ever being exposed, and this will go on for
decades. What makes the Committee incredible is the incredible
secrecy that prevails. None of the news media has ever made mention
of this conspiratorial hierarchy; therefore, as is to be expected,
people doubt its existence.


The Committee of 300 is for the most part under the control of the
British monarch, in this case, Elizabeth II. Queen Victoria is
believed to have been quite paranoid about keeping it secret and
went to great lengths to cover up MASONIC writings left at the scene
of “Jack the Ripper” murders which alluded to the Committee of 300’s
connections with “experiments” carried out by a family member who
was also a highly-placed member of the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry.
The Committee of 300 is filled with members of British aristocracy
which has corporate interests and associates in every country of the
world, including the USSR.


The Committee’s structure is as follows:

The Tavistock Institute at Sussex University and London sites is
owned and controlled by the Royal Institute for International
Affairs whose “hofjuden” in America is Henry Kissinger.

 

The
EAGLE
STAR GROUP
, which changed its name to the STAR GROUP after the close
of the Second World War, is composed of a group of major
international companies involved in overlapping and interfaced areas

(1)   Insurance

(2)   Banking

(3)   Real Estate

(4)   Entertainment

(5)
  High technology, including cybernetics, electronic communications,
etc…

Banking, while not the mainstay, is vitally important, especially in the areas where banks act as clearing houses and money
launderers of drug money. The main “big name banks” are The
Bank of England, the

Federal Reserve Banks
, Bank of
International Settlements, the World Bank and the Hong Kong and
Shanghai Bank. American Express Bank is a means of recycling drug
dollars. Each of these banks is affiliated with and/or controls hundreds of thousands of large and small banks throughout the
world.


Banks large and small in the thousands are in the Committee of 300
network, including Banca Commerciale d’Italia, Banca Privata, Banco
Ambrosiano, the Netherlands Bank, Barclays Bank, Banco del Colombia,
Banco de Ibero-America. Of special interest is Banca del la
Svizzeria Italiana (BSI)–since it handles flight capital
investments to and from the United States –  primarily in dollars and
U.S. bonds – located and isolated in “neutral” Lugano, the flight
capital center for the Venetian Black Nobility. Lugano is not in
Italy or in Switzerland, and is a kind of a twilight zone for shady
flight capital operations. George Ball, who owns a large block of
stock in BSI, is a prominent “insider” and the hank’s U.S.
representative.


BCCI, BNL, Banco Mercantil de Mexico, Banco Nacional de Panama,
Bangkok Metropolitan Bank, Bank Leumi, Bank Hapoalim, Standard Bank,
Bank of Geneva, Bank of Ireland, Bank of Scotland, Bank of Montreal,
Bank of Nova Scotia, Banque Paris et Pays Bas, British Bank of the
Middle East and the Royal Bank of Canada to name but a very small
number in a huge list of “speciality” banks.

The Oppenheimers of South Africa are
much bigger “heavy-weights” than the

Rockefellers
.

 

For instance, in
1981 Harry Oppenheimer, chairman of the giant Anglo American Corporation that controls gold
and diamond mining, sales and distribution in the world, stated
that he was about to launch into the North American banking market.

 

Oppenheimer promptly in-vested $10 billion in a specially created
vehicle for the purpose of buying into big banks in the U.S., among
which was Citicorp. Oppenheimer’s investment vehicle was called Minorco, which set up shop in Bermuda, a British royal family
preserve. On the board of Minorco was to be found Walter Wriston of
Citicorp and Robert Clare, its chief counsel.


The only other company to rival Oppenheimer in the field of
precious metals and minerals was Consolidated Gold Fields of
South Africa, but Oppenheimer took control of it with a 28% stake
the largest single stockholder. Thus gold, diamonds, platinum,
titanium, tantalite, copper, iron ore, uranium and 52 other metals
and minerals, many of them of absolutely vital strategic value to
United States, passed into the hands of the Committee of 300.


Thus was the vision of one of the earlier South African members of
the Committee of 300, Cecil John Rhodes, fully realized, a vision
which started with the spilling of the blood of thousands upon
thousands of White farmers and their families in South Africa, whom
history records as the “Boers.” While the United States stood by
with folded hands as did the rest of the world, this small nation
was subjected to the most vicious war of genocide in history. The
United States will be subjected to the same treatment by the
Committee of 300 when our turn comes and it will not be long in
coming.


Insurance companies play a key role in the business of the Committee
of 300
. Among these are found such top insurance companies as
Assicurazioni Generali of Venice and Riunione Adriatica di Sicurita,
the largest and second largest insurance companies in the world, who
keep their bank accounts at Bank of International Settlements in
Swiss gold francs. Both control a multiplicity of investment banks
whose turnover in stocks on Wall Street double that of U.S.
investors.


Prominent on the board of these two insurance giants are Committee
of 300 members: the Giustiniani family, Black Nobility of Rome and
Venice who trace their lineage to the Emperor Justianian; Sir
Jocelyn Hambro of Hambros (Merchant) Bank;
Pierpaolo Luzzatti Fequiz, whose lineage dates back six
centuries
to the most ancient Luzzatos, the Black Nobility of Venice, and
Umberto Ortolani of the ancient Black Nobility family of the same
name.


Other old Venetian Black Nobility Committee of 300 members and board members of ASG and RAS are the Doria family,
the financiers of the Spanish Hapsburgs, Elie de Rothschild of the
French Rothschild family, Baron August von Finck (Finck, the second
richest man in Germany is now deceased), Franco Orsini Bonacassi of
the ancient Orsini Black Nobility that traces its lineage to an
ancient Roman senator of the same name, the Alba family whose
lineage dates back to the great Duke of Alba, and Baron Pierre
Lambert, a cousin of the Belgian

Rothschild
family.


The English companies controlled by the British royal family are
Eagle Star, Prudential Assurance Company, the Prudential Insurance
Company, which own and control most American insurers, including
Allstate Insurance.

 

At the head of the list is Eagle Star, probably
the most powerful “front” for Military Intelligence Department Six
(MI6). Eagle Star, although nowhere near as large as Assicurazioni
Generale
, is perhaps equally important simply because it is owned by
members of the Queen of England’s family and, as titular head of the
Committee of 300, Eagle Star makes a tremendous impact.


Eagle Star is more than a major “front” for MI6, it is also a Front
for major British banks, including Hill-Samuels, N. M. Rothschild
and Sons (one of the gold price “fixers” who meet daily in London),
and Barclays Bank (one of the funders of the African National
Congress-ANC). It can be said with a great degree of accuracy that
the most powerful British oligarchical families created Eagle Star
as a vehicle for “black operations” against those who oppose
Committee of 300 policies.


Unlike the CIA, British law makes it a serious crime to name
MI6
officials, so the following is but a partial list of “top brass” of
MI6, who are (or were) also members of the Committee of 300:

Lord Hartley Shawcross
Sir Brian Edward Mountain
Sir Kenneth Keith
Sir Kenneth Strong
Sir William Stephenson
Sir William Wiseman

All of the fore going are (or were) heavily involved in key
Committee of 300 companies which interface with literally
thousands of companies engaged in every branch of commercial
activity as we shall see.


Some of these companies include Rank Organization, Xerox
Corporation, ITT, IBM, RCA, CBS, NBC, BBC and CBC in communications,
Raytheon, Textron, Bendix, Atlantic Richfield, British Petroleum,
Royal Dutch Shell, Marine Midland Bank, Lehman Brothers, Kuhn Loeb,
General Electric, Westinghouse Corporation, United Fruit Company and
a great many more.


MI6 ran a large number of these companies through British
intelligence stationed in the RCA building in New York, which was
the headquarters of its chief officer, Sir William Stephenson. Radio
Corporation of America (RCA) was formed by G.E., Westinghouse,
Morgan Guarantee and Trust (acting for the British crown), and
United Fruit, back in 1919 as a British intelligence center. RCA’s
first president was J.P. Morgan’s Owen Young, after whom the Young
Plan was named. In 1929 David Sarnoff was appointed to run RCA.
Sarnoff had acted as an assistant to Young at the 1919 Paris Peace
Conference where a fallen Germany was stabbed in the back by the
victorious “allies.”


A network of Wall Street banks and brokerage houses takes care of
the stock market for the Committee, and prominent among these are
Blyth, Eastman Dillon, the Morgan groups, Lazard Freres and
Kuhn
Loeb Rhodes. Nothing happens on Wall Street that is not controlled
by the Bank of England, whose instructions are relayed through the
Morgan groups and then put into action through key brokerage houses
whose top executives are ultimately responsible for carrying out
Committee directives.


Before it overstepped the limits laid down by Morgan Guarantee, Drexel Burnham Lambert was a favorite of the Commit-
tee of 300. In 1981 almost every major brokerage house on Wall
Street had sold out to the Committee, Phibro merging with
Salomon Brothers. Phibro is the business arm of the Oppenheimers of Anglo American Corporation. By this control
mechanism, the Committee of 300 ensures that its members and
their far-flung business corporations turned their investments on
Wall Street over at a rate of double that of the “non-insider”
foreign investors.


Remember, some of the richest families in the world live in Europe,
so it is natural that they should have a preponderance of members on
the Committee. The Von Thurn und Taxis family who once owned the
German postal franchise, make David Rockefeller look like a very
poor relation. The Von Thurn und Taxis dynasty dates back 300 years
and generation after generation of family members have had seats on
the Committee which they occupy to this day.

 

We have already
mentioned by name many of the most wealthy Venetian Black Nobility
members of the Committee of 300 and other names will be added as we
come across them in their various fields of endeavor. Now we shall
include some American members of the Committee of 300 and try to
trace their affiliations and connections to the British Crown.


How can these facts be verified? Actually, some of them cannot be
verified because the information comes straight out of intelligence
files, but with a lot of legwork, there are many sources which can
verify at least part of the facts. The work would involve a diligent
search of Dun and Bradstreet Reference Book of Corporations,
Standard and Poors, British and American “Who’s Who” with long hours
of hard work in cross-referencing names with their corporate
affiliations.


Committee of 300 corporations, banks, and insurance companies
operate under the unified command covering every conceivable matter
of strategy and cohesive action. The Committee is the ONLY organized
power hierarchy in the world transcending all governments and
individuals, however powerful and secure they may feel themselves to
be. This covers finance, defense matters and political parties of
all colors and types.


There is no entity the Committee cannot reach and control,
and that includes organized religions of the world. This then, is
the all powerful OLYMPIAN GROUP whose power base is in
London and the City of London’s financial centers with its grip
on minerals, metals and precious gems, cocaine, opium and
pharmaceutical drugs, rentier-financier bankers, cult promoters and
founders of rock music. The British Crown is the control point from
which all things radiate.

 

As the saying goes, “They have a finger in
every pie.”


It is obvious that the communications field is tightly con-trolled.
Going back to RCA, we find that its directorate is composed of
British-American establishment figures who feature prominently in
other organizations such as the

CFR
, NATO, the

Club of Rome
, the

Trilateral Commission
,

Freemasonry
,

Skull and Bones
,

Bilderbergers
,

Round Table
, Milner Society and

the Jesuits
-Aristotle Society.

 

Among
them was David Sarnoff who moved to London at the same time
Sir
William Stephenson moved into the RCA building in New York.


All three major television networks came as spinoffs from RCA,
especially the National Broadcasting Company (NBC) which was first,
closely followed by the American Broadcasting Company (ABC) in 1951.
The third big television network was Columbia Broadcasting System
(CBS) which, like its sister companies was, and still is, dominated
by British intelligence. William Paley was trained in mass
brainwashing techniques at the Tavistock Institute prior to being
passed as qualified to head CBS.


Thus, if we the people of the United States but knew it, all our
major television networks are subject to British oversight, and
information they provide first goes to London for clearance. It is
interesting to note that the Tavistock intelligence paper written by
Stanford Research Institute, commonly named “The Aquarian
Conspiracy
” was funded by donations from all three major television
networks.


All three major networks are represented on the Committee of 300 and
are affiliated with the giant of the mass communication business,
the Xerox Corporation of Rochester, New York, whose Robert M. Beck
holds a seat on the Committee. Beck is also a director of the
Prudential Life Insurance Company, which is a subsidiary of the
London Prudential Assurance Company Limited.

Others on the board of Xerox are Howard Clark of the American
Express Company, one of the main conduits for moving drug money
through “travelers checks,” former Secretary of the Treasury,
William Simon, and Sol Linowitz, who negotiated the Panama Canal
Treaties for the Committee. Linowitz is important to the Committee
by virtue of his long standing expertise in laundering drug money
through Marine Midland and the Hong Kong and Shanghai Bank.


Another Xerox board member is Robert Sproull, who is of real
interest because, as president of the University of Rochester, he
allowed the Tavistock Institute, working through the CIA, to use the
university’s facilities for the 20-year MK-Ultra LSD experiments.
Some 85 other universities in the U.S. also allowed their facilities
to be misused in this manner. As giant-sized as Xerox is, it is
dwarfed by the Rank Organization, a London-based conglomerate fully
controlled by members of Queen Elizabeth’s immediate family.


Notable members of the board of Rank Organization who are also
members of the Committee of 300 are the following:

Lord Helsby, chairman of the drug money clearing house, Midland
Bank. Helsby’s other positions include a directorship in the giant
Imperial Group and the Industrial and Commercial Finance
Corporation.


Sir Arnold France, a director of Tube Investments who runs the
London underground train service. France is also a director of the
BANK OF ENGLAND which has so much control over the Federal Reserve
Banks.


Sir Dennis Mountain, chairman of the mighty Eagle Star
group and a director of English Property Corp, one of the
rentier-financier companies of the British royal family. One
such member is the Honorable Angus Ogilvie, “Prince of Companies,”
who is married to Her Royal Highness Princess Alexandria, sister of the Duke of Kent, leader of the Scottish Rite of
Freemasonry and who takes the place of the Queen when she is
outside of Britain. Ogilvie is a director of the Bank of England
and chairman of the giant LONRHO conglomerate. It was LONRHO that
ended the rule of Ian Smith in Rhodesia so that he could be replaced
by Robert Mugabe. At stake was Rhodesia’s chrome mines which produce
the finest high-grade chrome ore in the world.


Cyril Hamilton, chairman of the Standard and Chartered Bank (the old
Lord Milner-Cecil Rhodes bank) and a board member of the Bank of
England. Hamilton is also on the board of the Xerox Corporation, the
Malta International Banking Cor-poration (A

Knights of Malta
bank),
a director of the Standard Bank of South Africa – the largest bank in
that country, and a director of the Banque Belge d’Afrique.


Lord O’Brien of Lotherby, past president of the British Bankers
Association, director of Morgan Grenfell – a powerful bank, director
of Prudential Assurance, director of J. P.Morgan, director of the
Bank of England, a board member of the Bank of International
Settlements, a director of the giant Unilever conglomerate. Sir Reay
Geddes, chairman of the giant Dunlop and Pirelli tyre companies,
director of the Midland and International Banks, director of the
Bank of England.

 

Note how many of these powerful men are directors
of the Bank of England which makes control of American fiscal
policies simple.

Many of these organizations and institutions, companies and banks
are so interfaced and interlocked as to make it an almost impossible
task to sort them out. On RCA’s board sits Thornton Bradshaw,
president of Atlantic Richfield and a member of NATO, World Wildlife
Fund, the Club of Rome, The Aspen Institute for Humanistic Studies,
the Council on Foreign Relations. Bradshaw is also chairman of NBC.
The most important function of RCA remains its service to British
intelligence.


It is not generally known how powerful was the role played by the
Committee of 300 in stopping the investigation into the CIA which
Senator McCarthy almost succeeded in pulling off. Had McCarthy been
successful, it is very likely that President John F. Kennedy would
be alive today.

When McCarthy said he was going to summon William Bundy to appear
before his commission of enquiry, panic swept Washington and London.
Bundy, had he been called to testify, would most probably have
cracked and opened the door to the “special relations” that existed
between British oligarchical circles and their cousins in the United
States Government.


Such a possibility could not be entertained. The Royal Institute
of International Affairs
was called in to put an end to McCarthy.
The RIIA chose Allen Dulles, a man who was totally enamored of
decadent British society, to attack McCarthy head on. Dulles put
Patrick Lyman and Richard Helms in charge of the McCarthy case.
Helms was later rewarded for his service against McCarthy by being
made head of the CIA.


General Mark Clark, a member of the CFR and a well-liked military
man in London circles, was appointed by General Eisenhower to turn
back McCarthy’s full-fledged attack on the CIA. McCarthy was
preempted when Clark announced that a special committee was to be
appointed to examine the agency. Clark, on instructions from the
RIIA, recommended a Congressional watchdog committee to
“periodically examine the work of government intelligence agencies.”

 

The whole thing was a super tragedy for America and a victory for
the British, who feared that McCarthy would accidentally stumble
onto the Committee of 300 and its control over every aspect of
United States affairs.


Lehman Brothers-Kuhn Loeb’s former chairman, Peter G.Peterson,
served under former MI6 chief Sir William Wiseman and as such was no
stranger to British royalty. Peterson is tied in with Aspen
Institute, yet another arm of British intelligence.


John R. Petty is president and chairman of the Marine Midland Bank – a
bank whose drug trade connections have been well established long
before it was taken over by the Hong Kong and Shanghai Bank,
probably the number one bank in the opium trade, a position it has
held since 1814.


But the best proof I can offer of the existence of the Committee of
300 is the Rank Organization which, in conjunction with Eagle Star,
IS THE BRITISH CROWN. It is also the black operations center of MI6
(SIS). Between them, these two Committee of 300
companies control Her Majesty’s Dominion of Canada, using the
“hofjuden” Bronfman family to carry out their orders.


Trizec Holdings, ostensibly owned by the Bronfman family, is in
reality the main asset of the Queen of England’s in Canada. The
entire Southeast Asian opium trade interfaces with the Bronfman
empire and is one of the means whereby heroin is brought to America.
In a sense, Canada is like Switzerland pristine snow-covered
landscapes, big cities, a place of great beauty, but underneath lies
a deep layer of filth and dirt arising from its massive heroin
trade.


The Bronfman family are “cut-outs”’ what is known in MI6 as “front
men” controlled from London by MI6 “deskmen,” intelligence jargon
for controllers at headquarters. Edgar Bronfman, the family leader,
was sent to “Moscow Center” –  cover name for the KGB headquarters at
2 Dzerzhinsky Square, Moscow, on a large number of occasions.


At a low level, Bronfman was probably very useful as a contact man
with Moscow. Bronfman was never at any stage a contract agent for
MI6 and so never carried the title “Paroles,” a key intelligence
word for mutual identification between agents, which greatly
disappointed the eager Bronfman family head.

 

At one stage when it
was thought that some of the family were acting suspiciously,
“watchers” – intelligence jargon for intelligence officers keeping
persons under surveillance, were put on the Bronfman family, but
found only that one of the Bronfmans had been bragging to a United
States “cousin” (the word MI6 uses for the C.I.A.) who was unaware
of the role of Edgar Bronfman. This was quickly corrected.


Two Eagle Star directors, who were also the two top MI6
operatives, took control of the Bronfman family about six months
after the war ended. Sir Kenneth Keith and Sir Kenneth Strong,
whom we have already met, legitimated the Bronfman family
by setting up Trizec Holdings.

 

There is no one in the world who
can do a better job of “fronting,” through companies, than MI6
Yet, like Switzerland, there is a dirty side to Canada that has been
well-hidden from view by the Committee of 300 under cover of the
Official Secrets Act, a carbon-copy of the British law passed in
1913. Drugs, dirty money laundering, crime and racketeering are all
covered by their infamous Act.


Not known to many is that, if charged under the Official Secrets
Act, which can be interpreted any way the Crown agents choose,
persons could face the death penalty. As I have said so many times
since 1980, Canada is not a nation like South Africa, or Holland or
Belgium; it always was, and remains tied to the Queen of England’s
apron strings. Canada, we find, is always first in carrying out
Queen Elizabeth’s wishes. Canadian troops have fought in every one
of Her Majesty’s wars, including the Boer War ( 1899- 1903).


Like its American counterpart, the Canadian Institute of
International Affairs is a child of the Royal Institute for
International Affairs (RIIA) and runs Canadian politics. Its
members have filled the position of Secretary of State ever since it
was founded in 1925. The Institute for Pacific Relations, the body
that fostered the attack on Pearl Harbor, was welcomed in Canada
after Owen Lattimore and his fellow members had their treasonous
activities exposed in 1947 and left the United States before they
could be charged.


The Canadian Institute for International Affairs is connected with
the Rank Organization through Sir Kenneth Strong, who was second in
charge of MI6 at the end of the Second World War.

 

As a member of the

Order of St. John of Jerusalem
, Strong is the number two man in
Canada for Rank and the British Crown’s commercial interests. He is
on the board of one of the most prolific drug banks in the world
after the Hong Kong and Shanghai Bank, the Bank of Nova Scotia,
through which proceeds of the Canadian heroin trade are handled.

First in line is Sir Brian Edward Mountain, the ranking member of
the Knights of the Order of St. John of Jerusalem. It is well to
remember that, when the British Crown wanted the United States to
enter the Second World War, it sent Lord Beaverbrook and Sir Brian
Mountain to meet with President Roosevelt to deliver the Crown’s
orders in this regard. Roosevelt complied by ordering the United
States Navy to operate out of a base in Greenland, from where
attacks on German submarines were carried out nine months before
Pearl Harbor. This was done without the knowledge and consent of the
Congress.


Another big name in the Rank-Canadian interfacing was Sir Kenneth
Keith, a director of Canada’s equivalent of the Hong Kong and
Shanghai Bank, the Bank of Nova Scotia, dripping in drug money
laundering. He was also on the board of Britain’s oldest and most
venerable newspaper institution, the London Times and the Sunday
Times. For over 100 years the “Times” has been the Crown’s voice on
foreign affairs, finance matters and political life in England.


Like so many Committee of 300 members, Sir Kenneth circulated
between MI6 and the opium supply chain of command in Hong Kong and
China, ostensibly on business for the Canadian Institute for
International Affairs, of which he was a member Furthermore, as a
director of the Hill Samuel banking house, his presence in China and
Hong Kong could be explained without any problem.

 

One of his closest
associates outside of MI6 circles was Sir Philip de Zuleta, the
Committee of 300’s direct controller of all British prime ministers,
both Conservative and Labor. Sir Kenneth Strong tied in all the
spokes of the drug wheel, including terrorism, production of opium,
the gold markets, dirty money laundering and banking to its central
core, the British Crown.


At the top of British Crown control of Canada was Walter
Gordon. A former member of the Queen’s hands-on oversight
committee, also known as the Privy Council, Gordon sponsored
the Institute for Pacific Relations via the Canadian Institute of
International Affairs. As a former minister of finance, Gordon was
able to place Committee of 300 selected accountants and lawyers
inside the three main chartered banks: the Bank of Nova Scotia, the
Canadian Imperial Bank and the Toronto Dominion Bank.


Through these three “Crown banks” a network of Committee of 300
agents responsible to Gordon oversaw the world’s second largest
dirty drug money laundering operation, with a direct open door to
China. Before his death, Gordon controlled James Endicott, Chester Ronning and
Paul Linn, identified by MI6 as Canada’s top “China
specialists.”

 

All three men worked closely with Chou-En-lai, who
once told Gamal Abdul Nasser that he would do to Britain and the USA
what they had done to China, i.e., turn them into nations of heroin
addicts. Chou-En-lai made good on his promise, starting with
American GI’s in Vietnam. Other close collaborators in the Canadian
heroin drug ring were John D. Gilmer and John Robert Nicholson, both
members of the Order of the Knights of St. John of Jerusalem.


Lord Hartley Shawcross, who is believed to report directly to
Queen
Elizabeth II, was on the board of the Royal Institute for
International Affairs and chancellor of Sussex University where the
notorious Tavistock Institute for Human Relations is located, with
extensive connections in Canada.


As part of Rank’s United States operation, no other single company
has been more successful for Rank than the Corning Group, owners of
the Metropolitan Life Insurance Company and the New York Life
Insurance Company. Committee of 300 members, Amory Houghton and his
brother James Houghton, have long served the British Crown through
the above named insurance companies, and Corning Glass, Dow Corning
and Corning International.

 

Both sit on the board of IBM and
Citicorp. James Houghton is a director of the Princeton Institute
for Advanced Studies, a director of the J. Pierpont Morgan Library,
a stronghold of the RIIA and the CFR, and he is also a director of
CBS.

It was the Houghton brother who donated hundreds of acres known as
Wye Plantation in Maryland to the British Crown’s Aspen Institute.
Also on the Corning Glass board sits the Bishop of the Archdiocese
of the Anglican (Episcopalian) Church of Boston. All this gives the
group its much-vaunted air of respectability, which insurance
company executive s must carry, and as we shall see, in addition to
James Houghton, Keith Funston and John Harper, both on Corning’s
board, run the Metropolitan Life Insurance Company.


The MASSIVE gridding and interfacing of just this one single unit of
the Committee of 300 will give us a good indication of the vast
power at the disposal of the conspirators’ hierarchy, before which
all knees are bowed, including the knee of the President of the
United States, whomever that happens to be.


What is important to note is how this American company, one of
HUNDREDS, is interfaced with British intelligence, with Canada, the
Far East and South Africa, not to mention its gridding of corporate
officials and directors reaching into every aspect of business and
politics in the United States.


While Metropolitan Life Insurance Company does not begin to compare
with the Committee of 300’s giant Assicurazioni Generale, it is
nevertheless a good indicator of how the Houghtons’ power
extends right across the business spectrum of the U.S. and Canada.

 

Starting with R. H. Macy, (whose floor walkers no longer wear red
carnations to honor the company’s affiliation with Communism), the
Royal Bank of Canada, National and Westminster Bank, Intertel (a virulent and
vile private intelligence agency), Canadian Pacific, The Reader’s
Digest, RCA, AT&T, the Harvard Business School, W. R. Grace Shipping
Company, Ralston Purina Company, U.S. Steel, Irving Trust,
Consolidated Edison of New York and ABC, the Houghtons’ power grid
extends as far as the Hong Kong and Shanghai Bank.


Another successful Rank company in the United States is
the Reliance Insurance Group. As an integral part of the Strategic Bombing Survey, Reliance established the initial structural
base for brainwashing, opinion-making, polling, survey and the
systems analysis used by the Tavistock Institute in the United
States. The Reliance Insurance Company, based in Philadelphia, set
up the corporate structure which enabled the Strategic Bombing
Survey to be turned against the people of the United States who,
although unaware of it, have been subjected to savage psychological
warfare for the past 45 years.


A key operative in this assault on the United States was David Bialkin of the
Committee of 300 law firm, Wilkie, Farr and
Gallagher. Bialkin ran the Anti-Defamation League (ADL) for many
years. The ADL is a British intelligence operation founded in the
U.S. by MI6 and run by Saul Steinberg and Eric Trist of Tavistock.
Saul Steinberg is the U.S. representative and business partner of
the Jacob de Rothschild family of London.


Reliance Corporation is home for Carl Lindner who succeeded Eli
Black when he “fell” from a 44th floor window of a New York
skyscraper. Reliance Company interfaces with the powerful United
Fruit Company of Boston and New Orleans run by Max Fisber who,
before be was sheepdipped, was a well-known Detroit underworld
figure.

 

United Fruit Company has long been a conveyer of heroin and
cocaine into the U.S. under the expertise of Misbulam Riklis of
Rapid American Corporation who masterminds shipments from Canada to
the U.S. Remember, all this is under the aegis of a single company,
gridding and interfacing with a myriad of smaller companies and
operations to give the Committee of 300 full control of a
multiplicity of operations, each one carefully interlocked in the
grid.


Reliance Group is a spinoff of the parent company whose function it
is to brainwash the American people through a network of pollsters
and opinion makers and relies on Operations Research for direct
links with the Tavistock Institute. Another associate company is Leasco, which is closely inter-faced with AT&T, Disclosure
Incorporated, Western Union International, Imbucon Ltd and
Yankelovich, Skelly and White.


Daniel Yankelovich is the emperor of the polling-opinion
making corporate structure in the United States, a vast apparatus
which provides “public opinions on social, economic and political
matters of substance,” to quote Edward Bernays. It was this vast
apparatus that turned the majority of Americans, who had never even
heard of Saddam Hussein and vaguely knew that Iraq was a country
somewhere in the Middle East, into a people howling for his blood
and the extermination of Iraq as a nation.


Yankelovich utilized to the full all knowledge gained during the
Second World War. As a second-generation warrior, Yankelovich has no
equal, which is why ABC polls conducted by his company are always in
the forefront of “public opinion.” The population of the United
States was targeted in the same manner of German worker housing by
attacking the sense of reality. This technique is, of course,
standard training for certain intelligence groups, which includes
the CIA.


Yankelovich’s task was to destroy traditional American values and
replace them with New Age-Age of Aquarius values. As the Committee
of 300’s most senior public opinion maker, no one can doubt that
Yankelovich has done a superb job.


Probably the best way to explain what methods are used and what
results are expected to be achieved is to quote John Naisbitt’s work
as explained in his “Trend Report.”

 

Naisbitt has acted as advisor to
Lyndon Johnson, Eastman Kodak, IBM, America Express, the Center for
Policy Study, Chase Manhattan, General Motors, Louis Harris Polls,
the White House, Institute of Life Insurance, the American Red
Cross, Mobil Oil, B.P. and a host of Committee of 300 companies and
institutions.

 

His methodology, derived from MI6 Tavistock
procedures, is of course not unique:

“I will briefly outline our methodology. In developing
Trend Report for our clients we rely mostly on a system of
monitoring local events and behavior. We are overwhelmingly impressed with the extent to which this is a
bottom-up society, so we monitor what is going on
locally, rather than what is going on in Washington or
New York. Things start in Los Angeles, in Tampa, in Hartford, in
Wichita, Portland, San Diego and Denver. It is a very much ‘from the
bottom-up’ society.


“The tracking concept employed in determining these trends has its
roots in WW II. During the war, intelligence experts sought to find
a method for obtaining information on enemy nations that public
opinion polls would normally have provided. Under the leadership of
Paul Lazarsfeld and Harold Laswell, a method was developed for
monitoring what was going on in these societies that involved doing
a content analysis of the daily press.


“Although this method of monitoring public thinking continues to be
the choice of the intelligence community the nation annually spends
millions of dollars doing newspaper content analyses in all parts of
the world…. The reason this system of monitoring changes in
society works so well is that ‘news holes’ in newspapers is a
closed system. For economic reasons the amount of space devoted to
news in a newspaper doesn’t change over time.


“So when something new is introduced into that news hole, something
or a combination of things has to go out or be omitted. The
principle involved here is classified as a forced choice within a
closed system. In this forced situation societies add new
preoccupations and forget old ones. We keep track of the ones that
are added and the ones that are given up.


“Evidently, societies are like human beings. I do not
know what the number is, but a person can only keep so
many problems and concerns in his head at any one
time. If new problems or concerns are added, some existing ones must
be given up. We keep track of what Americans have given up and have
taken up.


“The United States is rapidly shifting from a mass industrial
society to an information society and the final impact will be more
profound than the 19th century shift from an agricultural to an
industrial society. Starting in 1979, the number one occupation in
the U.S. became clerking, replacing laborer and farmer. In this
latter statement is a brief history of the United States.”

It is not by chance that Naisbitt is a member of the Club of Rome
and, as such, a “senior staffer” of the Committee of 300.

 

He is also
one of the senior vice presidents of Yankelovich, Skelly and
White.
What Naisbitt is doing is not forecasting trends but MAKING them. We
have seen how the industrial base of the United States has been
destroyed, starting with the steel industry. In 1982 I wrote a work
I called “Death of the Steel Industry,” in which I stated that by
the mid-1990’s, steel production in the U.S. will have declined to a
point of no return, and that the auto and housing industries would
go the same way.


All this has come to pass, and what we are witnessing today is not
an economic recession due not only to unsound economic policies, but
the deliberately planned destruction of our industrial base – and
along with it the destruction of America’s unique middle class – the
backbone of the country – which depends on a progressive industrial
expansion for growth and for steady employment.


This is one of the reasons why the recession, which started in earnest in January of 1991, has turned into a depression from
which the United States as we knew it in the 1960’s-1970’s will
most probably never reappear. The economy will not come out
of the depression of 1991 until at least 1995- 1996, at which time
the United States will have become an entirely different society
from the one it when the recession began.


Opinion makers have played no small part in this war on the United
States; we need to examine the role of the Committee of 300 in
bringing about these far-reaching changes and how the social
engineers have used central systems analyses to keep public opinion
from expressing anything other than the policies of the invisible
government. How and where did it all begin?


From documents covering the First World War that I was able to
gather and examine in the War Office in Whitehall, London, it
appears that the Royal Institute for International Affairs was
commissioned by the Committee of 300 to do a study of manipulating
war information.

 

This task was given to Lord Northcliffe and
Lord Rothmere and Arnold Toynbee, who was MI6’s agent at the
RIIA. Lord Rothmere’s family owned a newspaper which was used to support
various government positions, so it was thought that the paper
could change public perceptions, especially among the ranks of
growing opposition to the war.


The project was housed in Wellington House, named after the Duke of
Wellesly. American specialists drafted to help Lords Rothmere and
Northcliffe included Edward Bernays and Walter Lippman. The group
held “brain storming” sessions to work out techniques for mobilizing
mass support for the war, especially among the working class people
whose sons were expected to go to the slaughter fields of Flanders
in record numbers.


Using Lord Rothmere’s newspaper, new manipulative techniques were
tried out and, after a period of about 6 months, it was apparent
that they were a success. What the researchers discovered was that
only a very small group of people understood the process of
reasoning and the ability to observe the problem as opposed to
passing an opinion on it. This, said Lord Rothmere, was the way in
which 87% of the British public approached the war, and that the
same principle applied not only to the war, but to every conceivable
problem in society in general.


In this manner, irrationality was elevated to a high level of
public consciousness. The manipulators then played upon this to
undermine and distract the grasp of reality governing any given
situation and, the more complex the problems of a modern industrial
society became, the easier it became to bring greater and greater
distractions to bear so that what we ended up with was that the
absolutely inconsequential opinions of masses of people, created by
skilled manipulators, assumed the position of scientific fact.


Having literally stumbled upon so profound a conclusion, the
manipulators put it to one test after another during the war, so
that in spite of hundreds of thousands of the youth of Britain being
slaughtered on the battlefields of France, there was virtually no
opposition to the bloody war.

 

Records of the time show that by 1917,
just before the United States entered the war, 94% of the British
working class bearing the brunt of the war did not have the faintest
idea what they were fighting for, other than the image created by
the media manipulators that the Germans were a horrible race, bent
upon destroying their monarch and their country, and who had to be
wiped off the face of the earth.


Certainly nothing has changed because, in 1991, we had the exact
same situation created by the news media which allowed President
Bush to flagrantly violate the Constitution in waging a war of
genocide against the nation of Iraq with the full consent of 87% of
the American people. Woodrow Wilson can be credited – if that is the
proper expression to use – of jumping on the public opinion
manipulators’ band wagon and using it to further the causes
whispered in his ear by his controller, Colonel House.


On instructions from President Wilson, or rather Colonel House, the
Creel Commission was created and, as far as can be
ascertained, the Creel Commission was the first organization in
the United States to use the RIIA techniques and methodology
for polling and mass propaganda.

 

The psychological warfare
experiments perfected at Wellington House were used in the
Second World War with equal success, and have been in continuous
use in the massive psychological war against the United States
which began in 1946. The methods did not change, only the target.
Now it was not German worker housing but the middle class of the
United States that became the focus of the attack.


As so often happens, the conspirators could not contain their glee.

 

After WW II, in 1922 to be precise, Lippmann detailed the work done
by the RIIA in a book he called “PUBLIC OPINION”:

“Public opinion deals with indirect, unseen and puzzling facts, and
there is nothing obvious about them. The situations to which public
opinion refers are known only as opinions, pictures inside heads of
human beings, pictures of themselves, of others, of their needs,
purposes and relationships, are their public opinions. These
pictures which are acted upon by groups of people, or by
individuals acting in the name of groups are PUBLIC OPINION with
capital letters. The picture inside the head often misleads men in
their dealings with the world outside of their heads.”

No wonder Lippmann was chosen to make the people of the United
States “like” the Beatles when they arrived on our shores and were
thrust upon an unsuspecting country. Combined with the propaganda
sent forth night and day from radio and television it was only a
comparatively short time before The Beatles became “popular.”

 

The
technique of radio stations allegedly receiving hundreds of requests
from imaging listeners for Beatlemusic, led to charts and ratings
for first, the “top ten” and gradually escalated until, by 1992, it
has expanded to “the top 40 on the charts.”


In 1928, Lippmann’s compatriot Edward Bernays wrote a
book called “CRYSTALLIZING PUBLIC OPINION” and in
1928 a second book of his was published entitled simply
PROPAGANDA.”

 

In it Bernays described his experiences at
Wellington House. Bernays was a close friend of Master Manipulator H.G. Wells, whose many quasi-novels were used by
Bernays to help formulate mass mind control techniques.


Wells was not shy about his role as a leader in changing lower class
society, mainly because he was a close friend of members of the
British royal family, and spent a great deal of time with some of
the most highly placed politicians of the day, men like Sir Edward
Grey, Lord Haldane, Robert Cecil of the Jewish Cecil family that had
controlled the British monarchy since a Cecil became the private
secretary and lover of Queen Elizabeth I, Leo Amery, Halford
Mackinder of MI6 and later head of the London School of Economics,
whose pupil Bruce Lockhart would become MI6 controller of Lenin and
Trotsky during the Bolshevik Revolution, and even the great man
himself, Lord Alfred Milner.


One of Well’s favorite watering holes was the prestigious St. Ermins
Hotel, meeting place of the Coefficient Club, a club to which
certified gentlemen only were admitted and where they met once a
month.

 

All of the men mentioned above were members and also members
of the Souls Club. Wells claimed that any nation could be defeated,
not by direct confrontation but by understanding the human mind – what
he called, “the mental hinterlands hidden behind the persona.”


With such a powerful backer, Bernays felt confident enough to launch
his “PROPAGANDA”:

“As civilization becomes more complex, AND AS THE NEED FOR INVISIBLE
GOVERNMENT HAS BEEN INCREASINGLY DEMONSTRATED (emphasis added-JC),
the technical means have been invented and developed BY WHICH PUBLIC
OPINION MAY BE REGIMENTED (emphasis added-JC).

 

With printing press
and newspaper, the telephone, telegraph, radio and airplanes, ideas
can be spread rapidly, and even instantaneously, across the whole of
America.”

Bernays had not yet seen how much better television, which
was to follow, would do the job.

 

 

 

 

 


Section 7

“The conscious and intelligent manipulation of
organized habits and
opinions of the masses is an important element in a democratic
society. Those who manipulate this unseen mechanism of society
constitute an

INVISIBLE GOVERNMENT WHICH IS THE TRUE RULING POWER IN
OUR COUNTRY
.”

To back up his position, Bernays quoted H. G. Wells’
article published in the New York Times in which Wells
enthusiastically backed the idea of modern means of communication,

“opening up a new world of political processes which will allow the
common design to be documented and sustained against perversion and
betrayal” (of the invisible government).

To continue with the revelations contained in
“PROPAGANDA”:

“We are governed, our minds are moulded, our tastes formed, our
ideas suggested, largely by men we have never heard of. What ever
attitude one chooses to take toward this condition, it remains a
fact that in almost every act of our daily lives, whether in the
sphere of politics or business, our social conduct or our ethical
thinking, we are dominated by a relatively small number of persons,
a trifling fraction of our hundred and twenty million, who
understand the mental processes and social patterns of the masses.
It is they who pull the wires which control the public mind, and who
harness old social forces and contrive new ways TO BIND AND GUIDE
THE WORLD”

Bernays was not bold enough to tell the world who the
“THEY” are who “pull the wires which control the public
mind…,” but in this book we shall make up for his intentional
oversight by disclosing the existence of that “relatively small
number of persons,” the Committee of 300.

 

Bernays was roundly
applauded for his work by the CFR whose members voted to place him
in charge of CBS. William Paley became his “under-graduate” and
eventually replaced Bernays, having acquired thorough knowledge of
the new-science science of public opin-ion making, which made CBS
the leader of the field, a role which CBS television and radio has
never relinquished.


Political and financial control by the “relatively small number,”
as Bernays called them, is exercised through a number of secret
societies, most notably the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry, and
perhaps even more importantly, through the Venerable Or-der of the
Knights of St. John of Jerusalem, an ancient order consisting of the
British monarch’s hand-picked executives chosen for their expertise
in areas vital to the continued control of the Committee.


In my work “The Order of St. John of Jerusalem” published in 1986, I
described The Order in the following manner:

“…It is therefore not a secret society, except where its purposes
have been perverted in the inner councils like the

Order of the
Garter
, which is a prostituted oligarchical creation of the British
royal family, which makes a mockery of what the Sovereign Order of
St. John of Jerusalem stands for.


“As an example, we find the atheist
Lord Peter Carrington, who
pretends to be an Anglican Christian but who is a member of the
Order of Osiris and other demonic sects, including Freemasonry,
installed as a Knight of the Garter at St. George’s Chapel, Windsor
Castle, by Her Majesty, Queen Elizabeth II of England, of the
Black
Nobility Guelphs, also head of the Anglican Church, which she
thoroughly despises.”

Carrington was selected by the
Committee of 300 to bring
down the government of Rhodesia, sign over the mineral wealth of
Angola and South West Africa to City of London control, wreck the
Argentine and turn NATO into a leftwing political organization
beholden to the Committee of 300.


Another strange face we see attaching itself to the Holy Christian
Order of St. John of Jerusalem, and I use the word stranger as it is
used in the original Hebrew of the Old Testament to denote the
lineage of an individual, is that of Major Louis Mortimer
Bloomfield, the man who helped plan the murder of John F. Kennedy.
We see photos of this “strange” man wearing with pride the Cross of
Malta, the same cross worn on the sleeve of the Knights of the Order
of the Garter.


We have been so brainwashed that we believe the British royal family
is just a nice, harmless and colorful institution, and fail to
realize just how corrupt and therefore highly dangerous is this
institution called the British Monarchy. The Knights of the Order of
the Garter are the INNERMOST circle of the most corrupt public
servants who have utterly betrayed the trust placed in them by their
nation, their people.


The Knights of the

Order of the Garter
are the leaders of the
Committee of 300, Queen Elizabeth II’s most trusted “privy council.”
When I did my research on the Order of St. John of Jerusalem some
years ago, I went to Oxford to talk with one of the Masters who is a
specialist on ancient and modern British traditions.

 

He told me that
the Knights of the Garter are the inner sanctum, the elite of the
elite of Her Majesty’s Most Venerable Order of St. John of
Jerusalem. Let me say this is not the original order founded by the
true Christian warrior, Peter Gerard, but is typical of many fine
institutions that are taken over and destroyed from the inside,
while yet appearing to the uninitiated to be the original.


From Oxford I went to the Victoria and Albert Museum and
gained access to the papers of Lord Palmerston, one of the
founders of the Opium Dynasty in China. Palmerston, like so
many of his kind, was not only a Freemason, but a dedicated
servant of Gnosticism…. Like the present ‘royal family,’
Palmerston made a pretense of being a Christian but was in fact a
servant of Satan. Many satanists became leaders of British
aristocracy and made immense fortunes out of the China opium trade.


I learned from the papers in the museum named after Victoria that
she changed the name of the Order of St. John of Jerusalem in 1885
in order to break away from the Catholic connection of the Order’s
founder, Peter Gerard, and renamed it the “Protestant Most Venerable
Order of Jerusalem.” Membership was open to every oligarchical
family that had made its fortune in the China opium trade and every
thoroughly decadent family received place in the ‘new order.’


Many of these venerable gentlemen were responsible for overseeing
the prohibition era in the United States from Canada, where several
of its members supplied the whisky ferried to the United States.
Notable among this group was Committee of 300 member
Earl Haig, who
gave his whisky franchise to old Joe Kennedy. Both prohibition and
the distilleries who met the demand for alcohol were creations of
the British Crown acting through the Committee of 300. It was an
experiment which became the forerunner of today’s drug trade, and
the lessons learned from the prohibition era are being applied to
the soon to be legalized drug trade.


Canada is the route most used by Far East heroin suppliers. The
British Monarchy sees to it that this information never becomes
public. Using her powers, Queen Elizabeth rules over Canada through
the Governor-General (one wonders how modern Canadians can accept
such an archaic arrangement?), who is the Queen’s PERSONAL
representative, and on down the line to the Privy Council (yet
another archaic hang-over from colonialist days) and the Knights of
St. John of Jerusalem, who control Canadian commerce in all of its
facets.


Opposition to British rule is suppressed. Canada has some
of the most restrictive laws in the world, including so-called
“hate crime” laws imposed upon the country by Jewish members of the House of Lords in England.

 

At present there are four
major trials in various stages in Canada involving persons charged
with “hate crimes.”

 

These are the Finta, Keegstra, Zundel and Ross
cases. Anyone who dares to try and show proof of Jewish control of
Canada (which the Bronfmans exercise), is immediately arrested and
charged with so-called “hate crimes.” This will give us some idea of
the vastness of the reach of the Committee of 300 which quite
literally sits on top of everything n this world.


Testifying to the truth of this statement is the fact that the
Committee of 300 set up the International Institute for Strategic
Studies (IISS) under the auspices of the

Round Table
. This institute
is the vehicle for M16-Tavistock black propaganda and wet jobs (an
intelligence cover name denoting an operation where bloodshed is
required), nuclear and terrorist, which goes to the world’s press
for dissemination, as well as to government and military
establishments.


Membership of IISS includes representatives of 87 major wire
services and press associations as well as 138 senior editors and
columnists drawn from international newspapers and magazines.

 

Now
you know where your favorite columnist gets all of his information
and opinions from. Remember Jack Anderson, Tom Wicker, Sam
Donaldson, John Chancellor, Mary McGrory, Seymour Hersh, Flora Lewis and Anthony Lewis, et al? The information provided by IISS,
especially scenarios like those prepared to blacken President
Hussein and to justify the coming attack on Libya and condemn the
PLO are all specially tailor-made for the occasion. The Mai Lai
massacre story published by Seymour Hersh came straight out of IISS,
just in case we wrongly suppose that men like Hersh do their own
research work.


The International Institute for Strategic Studies is nothing
more than a higher echelon opinion-maker as defined by
Lippmann and Bernays. Instead of writing books, newspapers
report opinions presented by chosen columnists, and IISS was
formed to be a coordinating center for not only creating opinions, but to get those opinions and scenarios out much faster and to
a greater audience than could be reached by a book, for example.
IISS is a good example of the gridding and interfacing of Committee
of 300 institutions.


The idea of bringing IISS into being arose at the 1957

Bilderberger

meeting. It will be recalled that the Bilderberger Conference is a
creation of M16 under the direction of the Royal Institute of
International Affairs.

 

The idea came from Alastair Buchan, son of
Lord Tweedsmuir. Buchan was chairman at the time, and a board member
of the RIIA and a member of the Round Table reportedly very close to
the British royal family This was the same conference that welcomed
Labour Party leader Dennis Healey to its ranks. Others in attendance
were Francois Duchene, whose mentor, Jean Monet Duchenes, ran the
Trilateral Commission
under the tutelage of H. V. Dicks from Tavistock’s Columbus Center.


Among the governing council of this gigantic propaganda
opinion-making apparat is included the following:

  • Frank Kitson, a one time controller of The IRA PROVISIONALS,
    the man who started the Mau-Mau insurgency in Kenya

  • Lazard Freres, represented by Robert
    Ellsworth

  • N. M. Rothschild, represented by John Loudon. Paul Nitze,
    representative of Schroeder Bank. Nitze has played a very prominent
    and substantial role in mat-ters of Arms Control agreements, which
    have AL-WAYS been under the direction of the RIIA. C. L. Sulzberger
    of the New York Times

  • Stansfield Turner, a former director
    of the CIA

  • Peter Calvocoressi, representing
    Penguin Books. Royal Institute for International Affairs,
    represented by Andrew Schoenberg

  • Columnists and Reporters,
    represented by Flora Lewis, Drew Middleton, Anthony Lewis, Max
    Frankel. Daniel Ellsberg

  • Henry Kissinger

  • Robert Bowie, a former director of the ClA’s National
    Intelligence Estimates.

Flowing from the 1957 Bilderberger meeting,
Kissinger was instructed
to open a Round Table office in Manhattan, the nucleus of which
consisted of Haig, Ellsberg, Halperin, Schlessinger, McNamara and
the McBundy brothers.

 

Kissinger was directed to fill all executive
positions in the Nixon administration with Round Tablers, loyal to
the RIIA and therefore to the Queen of England. It was no accident
that Kissinger chose President Nixon’s old hangout, the Hotel
Pierre, as his center of operations.


The significance of the

Round Table
-Kissinger operation was thus: On
orders of the RIIA chairman Andrew Schoeberg, a block was placed on
all agencies involved in intelligence, pre-venting them from giving
information to President Nixon.

 

This meant Kissinger and his staff
were getting ALL INTELLIGENCE, FOREIGN AND DOMESTIC, LAW ENFORCEMENT INFORMATION, INCLUDING FBI DIVISION 5, be-fore any of
it was released to the President. This made certain that all
M16-controlled terrorist operations in the U.S. would have no chance
of being leaked.

 

This was Halperin’s bailiwick.


By working this methodology, Kissinger at once established hegemony
over the Nixon presidency, and after Nixon was disgraced by the
Kissinger group and hounded from office, Kissinger emerged with
unprecedented powers such as have not been equaled before or since
Watergate.

 

Some of these seldom enumerated powers included the
following:

Kissinger ordered National Security Decision Memorandum No. I to be
drafted by Halperin, who got the actual wording directly from the
RIIA through Round Table circles. The memorandum appointed Kissinger
as the supreme U.S. author-ity, chairman of the Verification Panel.
All SALT negotiations were directed from here, using Paul Nitze,
Paul Warnke and a nest of traitors inside the Arms Control mission
at Geneva.


In addition, Kissinger was appointed to The Vietnam Special
Studies Group, which oversaw and made evaluations of all reports,
civilian and military, including intelligence reports coming out of
Vietnam. Kissinger also demanded and got over-sight of the “40
Committee,” a super-secret agency that has the task of deciding when
and where to initiate covert activities and then monitors the
progress of operations it sets in motion.


Meantime Kissinger ordered a blizzard of wire-taps by the
FBI, even
on his closest assistants, so as to give the impression that he was
on top of everything. Most of his circle were told that wiretaps on
them were in force. This nearly backfired was an M16 operative by
the name of Henry Brandon was ordered wiretapped, but was not
informed by Kissinger. Brandon was doubling as a reporter for the
London Times and Kissinger very nearly got thrown out because nobody
does this to the London Times.

The full story of the Ellsberg break-in and the subsequent
Watergating of Nixon is too long to be included here.

 

Suffice to
say, Kissinger had control of Ellsberg from the day that Ellsberg
was recruited while at Cambridge. Ellsberg had always been a
hardliner in favor of the Vietnam War, but was gradually
“con-verted” to a radical leftist activist. His “conversion” was
only a shade less miraculous than St. Paul’s Damascus Road
experience.


The entire spectrum of the new left in the United States was the
work of British intelligence M16 acting through Round Table assets
and the Institute for Policy Studies (IPS). Just as it did with all
countries with a republican base, whose policies had to be changed,
LPS played a leading role, even as it does today in South Africa and
South Korea. Much of IPS’s activities are explained in my work “IPS
Revisited” published in 1990.


IPS had one main function, that being to sow discord and
spread disinformation resulting in chaos. One such program,
aimed at America’s youth, centered on drugs.

 

Through a series
of IPS fronts, acts like the stoning of Nixon’s motorcade and a
large number of bombings, a climate of deception was effectively created which led a majority of Americans to believe that
the United States was under threat from the KGB, the
GRU and
Cuban DGI. The word went out that a lot of these imaginary agents
had close ties to the Democrats through George McGovern. It was in
fact, a model disinformation campaign for which M16 is justly
famous.


Haldeman, Ehrlichman and Nixon’s closest aides had no clue as to
what was happening, hence a flurry of statements emanating from the
White House that East Germany, The Soviet Union, North Korea and
Cuba were training terrorists and funding their operations in the
United States. I doubt whether Nixon knew very much about IPS, let
alone suspected what it was doing to his presidency. We suffered the
same kind of disinformation during the Gulf War when the word went
out that terrorists of all stripes were about to invade the United
States and blow up everything in sight.


President Nixon was literally left in the dark. He didn’t even know
that David Young, a Kissinger pupil, was working in the basement of
the White House, supervising “leaks.” Young was a graduate of Oxford
and a long-time Kissinger associate through Round Table assets such
as the law firm of Milbank Tweed. President Nixon was no match for
the forces arrayed against him under the direction of M16 on behalf
of the Royal Institute for International Affairs and hence the
British royal family.


About the only thing that Nixon was guilty of, in so far as
Watergate is concerned, was his ignorance of what was going on all
around him. When James McCord “confessed” to Judge John Sirica,
Nixon should have been on to it like a flash that McCord was playing
a double game. He ought to have challenged Kissinger about his
relationship with McCord there and then. That would have thrown a
spanner in the works and derailed the whole M16-Watergate operation.


Nixon did not abuse his presidential powers. His crime was
not defending the Constitution of the United States of America and
not charging Mrs. Katherine Meyer Graham and Ben Bradley with conspiracy to commit insurrection. Mrs. Katherine
Meyer Graham’s pedigree is of the most doubtful kind, as
“Jessica Fletcher” of “Murder She Wrote” would soon have discovered.

 

But even knowing that, Mrs. Graham’s controllers in the

Round Table

would have fought hard to keep the lid on things. The role of the
Washington Post was to keep the pot boiling by one “revelation”
after another, thereby engendering a climate of public distrust of
President Nixon, even when there was not one shred of evidence to
support wrong doing by him.


Yet it shows the immense power of the press, as Lippman and
Bernays
had quite properly anticipated, in that Mrs. Graham, long suspected
of the murder of her husband, Philip L. Graham – officially classed
as “suicide” – should have retained any credibility at all. Other
traitors who should have been indicted for insurrection and treason
were Kissinger, Haig, Halperin, Ellsberg, Young, McCord, Joseph
Califano and Chomsky of IPS and those CIA operatives who went to
McCord’s house and burned all of his papers.

 

Again, it is worth
repeating that Watergate, like many other operations we do not have
the space to include here, demonstrated the COMPLETE CONTROL
exercised over the United States by the Committee of 300.


While Nixon kept company with people like Earl Warren and some Mafia
dons who had built Warren’s house, that does not mean that he should
have been disgraced over the Watergate Affair. My dislike of Nixon
stems from his willingness to sign the infamous ABM Treaty in 1972
and his all-too-cozy relation-ship with Leonid Brezhnev.

 

One of the
sorriest slip-ups of the Minority Council was its abject failure to
expose the dirty role played by INTERTEL, the Corning Group’s ugly
private intelligence agency whom we have already met, who “leaked”
a lot of Watergate material to Edward Kennedy. Private intelligence
agencies like INTERTEL have no right to exist in the United States.
They are a MENACE to our right to privacy and an insult to all free
men everywhere.


Blame must also fall on those who were supposed to protect
President Nixon from the kind of steelmesh net that was thrown
around him to isolate him. The intelligence personnel around
Nixon were a poor lot who had no knowledge of just how thorough
British intelligence operations are; indeed, they had no inkling
that Watergate was a British intelligence operation in its entirety.
The Watergate plot was a coup-d’etat against the United States of
America, as was the murder of John F. Kennedy.

 

Although this fact is
not recognized as such today, I am confident that when all the
secret papers are finally opened, history will record that two
coup-d’etats, one against Kennedy and one against Nixon, did indeed
take place, and which in their wake brought the most violent rape
and assault on the institutions upon which the Republic of the
United States stands.


The individual who most deserves the title of traitor and who is
most guilty of sedition is General Alexander Haig. This desk-man
office-colonel whose paper-shuffling career did not include
commanding any troops in battle, was suddenly thrust upon the scene
by the invisible upper-level parallel government President Nixon
once described him as a man who had to ask Kissinger’s permission to
go to the bathroom.


Haig was a product of the

Round Table
. He was noticed by Round Tabler Joseph Califano, one of Her Majesty’s most trusted Round
Tablers in the United States. Joseph Califano, legal council of the
Democratic National Convention, had actually interviewed Alfred
Baldwin, one of the plumbers A MONTH BEFORE THE BURGLARY TOOK PLACE.
Califano was stupid enough to write a memorandum on his interview
with Baldwin, in which he gave details of information on McCord’s
background and why McCord had selected Baldwin to be on the “team.”


Even more damaging, Califano’s memorandum contained
full details of transcripts of wiretaps of conversations between
Nixon and the reelection committee, all this BEFORE the break-in occurred. Califano should have been indicted on a score of
federal offenses; instead he got away cleanly with his criminal
activity. Sanctimonious Sam Ervin refused to allow Fred
Thompson, Minority Council, to introduce this highly damaging evidence at the Watergate hearings
– on the spurious grounds
that it was “too speculative.”


On Round Table orders, Kissinger had Haig promoted from colonel to
four-star general in the most meteoric rise ever re-corded in the
annals of United States military history, in the course of which
Haig was leap-frogged over 280 senior U.S. Army generals and
high-ranking officers.


During Haig’s “promotion,” and as a result of it, 25 senior generals
were forced to resign. As a reward for his treachery toward
President Nixon, AND THE UNITED STATES, Haig was subsequently given
the plum job of Commanding General of the North Atlantic Treaty
Organization forces (NATO), al-though he was THE LEAST QUALIFIED
COMMANDER EVER TO HOLD THAT POSITION. Here again he was leap-frogged
over 400 senior generals from NATO countries and the United States.


When the news of his appointment reached the Soviet Armed Forces
High Command, Marshall Orgakov recalled his three top Warsaw Pact
generals from Poland and East Germany, and there was much
merrymaking, clinking of glasses and quaffing of champagne until
well into the night. All through Haig’s tenure as commander of NATO
forces the professional elite cadre of the Soviet Armed Forces, men
who have never been anything else but professional soldiers, held
Haig in the utmost contempt and openly referred to him as the
“office manager of NATO.” They knew that Haig owed his appointment
to the RIIA and not to the United States military.


But before his military promotion took him out of Washington, let it be known that Alexander Haig, in conjunction with
Kissinger, all but destroyed the office of the President of the
United States and its government. The chaos left by Kissinger
and Haig in the wake of Watergate has never been chronicled to
the best of my knowledge.

 

On the insistence of the RIIA, Haig
virtually took over the management of the Government of the
United States after the April 1973 coup d’etat. Bringing 100Round Table agents chosen from the Brookings Institution,
Institute Policy Studies and the

Council on Foreign Relations
, Haig
filled the top one hundred posts in Washington with men who, like
himself, were beholden to a foreign power. In the ensuing debacle,
the Nixon Administration was torn asunder and the United States
along with it.


Thrusting aside the pious platitudes and posturings of de-fending
the Constitution, Senator Sam Ervin did more to change the United
States than anything President Nixon was alleged to have done, and
the United States has not yet recovered from the near-mortal wound
of Watergate, a Committee of 300 sponsored operation conducted by
the Royal Institute for International Affairs, the Round Table and
“hands on” M16 officers based in the United States.


The way President Nixon was first isolated, surrounded by traitors
and then confused, followed to the letter the Tavistock method of
gaining full control of a person according to the methodology laid
down by Tavistock’s chief theoretician, Dr. Kurt Lewin.

 

I have
already given details of Lewin’s methodology elsewhere in this
book, but in view of the text-book case of President Richard M.Nixon, I think it is worth repeating:

“One of the main techniques for breaking morale through a strategy
of terror consists in exactly this tactic – keep the person hazy as to
where he stands and just what he may expect. In addition, if
frequent vacillations between severe disciplinary measures and
promises of good treatment together with the spreading of
contradictory news, make the cognitive structure of this situation
utterly unclear, then the individual may cease even to know a
particular plan would lead toward or away from his goal. Under these
conditions even those individuals who have definite goals and are
ready to take risks are paralyzed by severe inner conflict in regard
to what to do.”

Kissinger and Haig followed Tavistock training manuals to
the letter. The result was a distraught, confused, frightened and
demoralized President Nixon, whose only course of action – he was told
by Haig – was to resign. In 1983 I wrote two works, “The Tavistock
Institute: Sinister and Deadly” and “The Tavistock Institute:
Britain’s Control of U.S. Policy,” based upon Tavistock secret
manuals which had fallen into my hands. Tavistock Institute’s
methods and actions are spelled out in these two works.


So successfully were Tavistock methods applied to unseat President
Nixon that the people of this nation fully believed the calumny of
lies, distortions and set-piece contrived situations mounted by the
conspirator as truth, when in fact Watergate was a diabolical lie
from end to end. It is important to stress this because we have
certainly not seen the last of Watergate-type operations.


What were the alleged impeachable offenses committed by President
Nixon, and the so-called “smoking gun” evidence which was supposed
to back up the charges? First, the “smoking gun.” This piece of
FICTION was created by Kissinger and Haig around the June 23rd tape,
which Haig coerced Nixon into surrendering to Leon Jaworski.


Haig spent hours convincing President Nixon that this tape would
sink him, because it proved “beyond any doubt” that Nixon was guilty
of serious wrong doing and a co-conspirator in the Watergate
break-in. President Nixon’s first response was to tell Haig, “It’s
utter nonsense to make such a big deal of this,” but Haig chipped
away until Nixon became convinced that he could not make a
successful defense before the Senate, based solely on this
particular June 23rd tape!


How had Haig accomplished his mission? Acting out a
scenario prepared for him by his Round Table controllers, Haig
had an unedited transcript of the “smoking gun” tape typed by
his staff. In reality there was nothing in the tape that President
Nixon could not have explained. Sensing this, Haig then circulated his unauthorized unedited transcript of the tape among
Nixon’s staunchest supporters in the House and Senate and the
Republican Party high command. Peppered with “smoking gun”
and “devastating,” and coming from Nixon’s trusted aide, the
transcript had the effect of a falcon hitting a flock of pigeons;
Nixon’s supporters panicked and ran for cover.


Following up his sedition and insurrection, Haig summoned to his
office Congressman Charles Wiggins, a staunch Nixon supporter who
had agreed to lead the fight in the House to head off impeachment
proceedings. In a bare-faced blatant lie, Wiggins was informed by
Haig, “The fight is lost.”

 

After that Wiggins lost all interest in
defending Nixon, believing that Nixon himself had agreed to give up.
Haig then dealt with Senator Griffin, a leading supporter of the
president in the Senate in the same way.

 

AS A RESULT OF HAIG’S
SEDITIOUS, TREASONOUS ACTIVITIES, SENATOR GRIFFIN IMMEDIATELY WROTE
A LETTER TO PRESIDENT NIXON CALLING UPON HIM TO RESIGN.


THREE MONTHS EARLIER,

Round Table

controlled Institute for Policy
Studies, child of James Warburg, founder and a fellow, Marcus Raskin, delivered EXACTLY the same ultimatum that President Nixon
resign, using the British intelligence propaganda journal, The New
York Times of May 25th to deliver the ultimatum.

 

The Watergate
tragedy was a step in the irreversible transition to barbarism
which is enveloping the United States, and which is leading us into
the
One World Government-New World Order
. The United States is now
at the same place that Italy found itself when Aldo Moro tried to
rescue it from created instability.


With what wrongdoing was Nixon charged? John Doar, whose brutish
character was well-suited to his task of bringing so-called articles
of impeachment against the president, was the author and finisher of
one of the most far-reaching ILLEGAL domestic surveillance
counterintelligence operations ever run in the United States.


Heading the Interdepartmental Intelligence Unit (IDIU), Doar
garnered information from every conceivable agency of the federal
government, including the Internal Revenue Service.


The program was linked to the Institute for Policy Studies. One of
the highlights of John Doar’s career was to provide the CIA – which is
forbidden by law to engage in domestic surveillance, with
10,000-12,000 names of citizens he suspected as political
dissidents, for further investigation.


On July 18th, 1974, this great upholder of the law, with measured
pomposity, delivered the “charges” against President Nixon, which
episode was nationally televised. THERE WAS NOT A SINGLE PIECE OF
EVIDENCE THAT NIXON HAD DONE ANYTHING IMPEACHABLE; indeed, Doar’s
pathetic litany of Nixon’s alleged “crimes” were so trivial that it
is a wonder the proceedings went beyond this point.

 

Income tax
fiddling, unauthorized bombing of Cambodia and a vague “abuse of
power” charge that would never have stuck in a court of law was the
best that Doar could do. The United States was as unstable as it
would ever be when President Nixon resigned on August 8th, 1974.


Nowhere more so than in our economic and fiscal policies. In 1983
the international bankers met in Williamsburg, Virginia to work out
a strategy to prepare the United States for a total disintegration
of its banking system. This planned event was to stampede the U.S.
Senate into accepting control of our monetary and fiscal policies
by the International Monetary Fund (IMF). Dennis Weatherstone of
Morgan Guarantee on Wall Street stated that he was convinced this
was the only way for the United States to save itself.


The proposal was endorsed by the Ditchley Group which had its
beginning in May of 1982 at Ditchley Park in London. On January
lOth-11th, l983, this alien group met in Washington D.C., in
violation of the Sherman Anti-Trust Act and the Clayton Act, and
conspired to overthrow the sovereignty of the United States of
America in its monetary and financial freedom. The United States
Attorney General knew of the meeting and its purpose. Instead of
charging members of the group with conspiracy to commit a federal
crime, he simply looked the other way.

Under the abovementioned acts, proof of a conspiracy is all that is
needed for a felony conviction, and there was ample evidence that a
conspiracy did indeed take place. But as the Ditchley Foundation had
met at the request of the Royal Institute for International Affairs
and was hosted by the Round Table, no one in the Justice Department
had the courage to take action as required by those who had sworn to
uphold the laws of the United States.


The Ditchley Plan to usurp control of the fiscal and monetary
policies of the United States was the brainchild of Sir Harold
Lever, a strong backer of Zionism and a close confidant of members
of the British royal family and a member of the Committee of 300.

 

Sir Harold Lever was a director of the giant UMILEVER conglomerate,
an important Committee of 300 company. Lever’s plan called for the
IMF’s influence to be broadened so that it could influence central
banks of all nations, including the U.S. and guide them into the
hands of a One World Government bank.


This was considered a vital step in bringing about a situation where
the IMF would become the supreme arbiter of world banking. The
ultra-secret January meeting was preceded by an earlier meeting in
October 1982, and was attended by representatives of 36 of the
world’s top banks who met at the New York Vista Hotel. Security for
the October 26th-27th seminar was as tight as anything ever seen in
the Big Apple. This earlier Ditchley Group meeting also violated
United States law.


Addressing the meeting, Sir Harold Lever said it was essential that
national sovereignty as an archaic hang-over must be ended before
the year 2000. “The United States will soon have to realize that it
will be no better than any Third World country when the IMF takes
control,” said Sir Harold. It was later reported to the delegates
that plans to appoint the IMF as the controller of United States
fiscal policies were being readied to bring before the United States
Senate by the year 2000.


Rimmer de Vries, speaking for Morgan Guarantee, said it
was high time that the United States became a member of the Bank of
International Settlements. “There must be a reconsideration of U.S.
hesitancy over the past 50 years,” De Vries declared. Some British
and German bankers, fearing possible violations of U.S. law, said
that the Ditchley Group is nothing but a committee to iron out
exchange rate problems. Felix Rohatyn also spoke of the great need
to change U.S. banking laws so that the IMF could play a greater
role in this country. Rohatyn headed Lazard Freres, a Club of Rome
bank and part of the Eagle Star Group which we have already met.


Round Tablers William Ogden and Werner Stang spoke enthusiastically
in support of surrendering U.S. fiscal sover-eignty to the
International Monetary Fund and the Bank of International
Settlements. Delegates representing the Alpha ranking Group, a P2
Freemasonry bank, said the United States must be forced to surrender
to “the higher authority of a world bank,” before any progress
toward the New World Order could be made.


On January 8th, 1983, before their big meeting on January lOth-11th,
Hans Vogel, a leading Club of Rome member, was received at the White
House. President Ronald Reagan had invited George Schultz, Caspar
Weinberger, George Kennan and Lane Kirkland to be present at his
meeting with Vogel, who explained to President Reagan what the aims
and objectives of the Ditchley Group were.

 

From that day, President
Reagan did an about face and worked with the Committee of 300’s
various agencies to advance the International Monetary Fund and the
Bank of International Settlements as the authority on U.S domestic
and foreign monetary policies.


The invisible government of the Committee of 300 has put
tremendous pressure on America to change its ways – for the
worse. America is the last bastion of freedom and unless our
freedoms are taken away from us, progress toward a One World
Government will be considerably slowed.

 

Such an undertaking
as a One World Government is a massive one, requiring a great
deal of skill, organizing abilities, control of governments and
their policies. The only organization that could possibly have
undertaken this mammoth task with any hope of success is the
Committee of 300, and we have seen just how far it has come toward
total success.


Above all, the battle is a spiritual one. Unfortunately, the
Christian churches have become little more than social clubs run by
the infinitely evil World Council of Churches (WCC), whose
beginnings lie not in Moscow but in the City of London, as we see
from the chart at the end of the book which gives the structure of
the One World Government Church. This body was set up in the 1920’s
to serve as a vehicle for One World Government policies, and stands
as a monument to the long-range planning capabilities of the
Committee of 300.


Another corrupt body similar in structure and design to the WCC is
the Union of Concerned Scientists, set up by the Trilateral
Commission, and funded by the Carnegie Endowment Fund, the Ford
Foundation and Aspen Institute. This is the group that has led the
fight to prevent the United States from mounting an effective
deterrent against Soviet Cosmospheres, space-based laser beam
weapons which can destroy selected targets in the United States or
elsewhere from outer space.


The United States SDI program was designed to counter the threat
posed by Soviet Cosmospheres, a threat which still exists in spite
of the assurances that “communism is dead.” Soviet spokesman Georgi
Arbatov told a meeting of the Union of Concerned Scientists that it
is important for them to oppose the SDI program, because if the SDI
program became operational, “it will be a military catastrophe.”

 

Year after year the Union of Concerned Scientists has opposed every
budget which included funding for the vital SDI program, until by
the end of 1991, there is not even enough money to fund further
research still required let alone place the system in orbit. The
Union of Concerned Scientists is run by the Royal Institute for
International Affairs and is heavily infiltrated with M16 British
intelligence agents.

There is not one single aspect of life in America that is not
watched over, steered in the “right” direction, manipulated, and
controlled by the invisible government of the Committee of 300.
There is not one elected official or political leader that is not
subject to its rule. No one thus far has got away with defying our
secret rulers, who do not hesitate to make “a horrible ex-ample” of
anyone, including the President of the United States of America.


From 1776 when Jeremy Bentham and William Petty, the Earl of
Shelburne, fresh from the triumph of the French Revolution which
they planned and ran, were drafted by the British Crown to bring
their combined experience to bear against the colonists, to 1812
when the British sacked and burned Washing-ton, destroying secret
documents that would have exposed the treason being worked against
the young United States of America to the Watergating of President
Nixon and assassination of President Kennedy, the hand of the
Committee of 300 is clearly visible.

 

This book is an attempt to open
the eyes of the American people to this terrible truth: We are not
an independent nation, nor can we ever be, as long as we are ruled
by an invisible government, the Committee of 300.

 

Posted in Uncategorized | Leave a comment

Intelligence in Action – Cyber Security & Cyber Defence

mcis2012.pdf
Download this file
Posted in Uncategorized | Leave a comment

Cosmic Trigger : The Final Secret of the Illuminati

cosmic_trigger.pdf
Download this file
Posted in Uncategorized | Leave a comment

CIA Psychologist’s Notes Reveal True Purpose Behind Bush’s Torture Program

This diagram was included in
a paper written by Dr. Bruce Jessen’s

and shows his view of the
conflicting psychological pressures bearing down on a prisoner

who is held captive by an
enemy.
 

Dr. Bruce Jessen’s handwritten notes
describe some of the torture techniques that were used to “exploit” “war on
terror” detainees in custody of the CIA and Department of Defense.

Bush administration officials have long asserted that the torture techniques
used on “war on terror” detainees were utilized as a last resort in an
effort to gain actionable intelligence to thwart pending terrorist attacks
against the United States and its interests abroad.
 

 

 

Jason Leopold interviews Jessen’s former SERE
Colleague

Retired Air Force Capt. Michael Kearns
 

[blip.tv http://blip.tv/play/jyGCqJsWAg%5D

 

 

But the handwritten notes obtained exclusively
by TruthOut drafted two decades ago by Dr. John Bruce Jessen, the
psychologist who was under contract to the CIA and credited as being one of
the architects of the government’s top-secret torture program, tell a
dramatically different story about the reasons detainees were brutalized and
it was not just about obtaining intelligence.

 

Rather, as Jessen’s notes explain, torture was
used to “exploit” detainees, that is, to break them down physically and
mentally, in order to get them to “collaborate” with government authorities.

 

Jessen’s notes emphasize how a “detainer” uses
the stresses of detention to produce the appearance of compliance in a
prisoner.
 


 

Indeed,

a report released in 2009
by the Senate Armed Services Committee
about the treatment of detainees in U.S. custody said Jessen was the author of
a “Draft Exploitation Plan” presented to the Pentagon in April 2002 that was
implemented at Guantanamo and at prison facilities in Iraq and Afghanistan.
But to what degree is unknown because the document remains classified.

 

Jessen also co-authored a memo in February 2002
on “Prisoner Handling Recommendations” at Guantanamo, which is also
classified. (pg.11
– SASC Report – February 28, 2002
)

Moreover, the Armed Services Committee’s report noted that torture
techniques approved by the Bush administration were based on survival
training exercises U.S. military personnel were taught by individuals like Jessen if they were captured by an enemy regime and subjected to “illegal
exploitation” in violation of the Geneva Conventions.

Jessen’s notes, prepared for an Air Force survival training course that he
later “reverse engineered” when he helped design the Bush administration’s
torture program, however, go into far greater detail than the Armed Services
Committee’s report in explaining how prisoners would be broken down
physically and psychologically by their captors.

 

The notes say survival training students could,

“combat interrogation and torture” if they
are captured by an enemy regime by undergoing intense training
exercises, using “cognitive” and “exposure techniques” to develop
“stress inoculation.”


[PDF file of Jessen’s
handwritten notes
.]

The documents stand as the first piece of hard
evidence to surface in nine years that further explains the psychological
aspects of the Bush administration’s torture program and the rationale for
subjecting detainees to so-called “enhanced interrogation techniques.”

Jessen’s notes were provided to TruthOut by retired Air Force Capt.

Michael
Kearns
, a “master” SERE instructor and

decorated veteran
who has previously
held high-ranking positions within the Air Force Headquarters Staff and
Department of Defense (DoD).

Kearns and his boss, Roger Aldrich, the head of the Air Force Intelligence’s
Special Survival Training Program (SSTP), based out of Fairchild Air Force
Base in Spokane, Washington, hired Jessen in May 1989.

 

(See: 

Part 1 – NYT Misses Full Story on Mitchell-Jessen



Part 2 – Expanding the Investigation into SERE Torture



Part 3 – Roger Aldrich, the Al Qaeda Manual and the
Origins of Mitchell-Jessen
)

 

Kearns, who was head of operations at SSTP and
trained thousands of service members, said Jessen was brought into the
program due to an increase in the number of new survival training courses
being taught and,

“the fact that it required psychological
expertise on hand in a full-time basis.”

 

“Special Mission
Units”

Jessen, then the chief of Psychology Service at the U.S. Air Force Survival
School, immediately started to work directly with Kearns on,

“a new course
for special mission units (SMUs), which had as its goal individual
resistance to terrorist exploitation.”

The course, known as SV-91, was developed for the
Survival Evasion
Resistance Escape
(SERE) branch of the
U.S. Air Force Intelligence Agency,
which acted as the Executive Agent Action Office for the Joint Chiefs of
Staff.

 

Jessen’s notes formed the basis for one part of SV-91, “Psychological
Aspects of Detention.”
 


Capt. Michael Kearns (left)
and Dr. Bruce Jessen

at Fort Bragg’s Nick Rowe
SERE Training Center, 1989

(Photo courtesy of retired
Air Force Capt. Michael Kearns)
 

Special mission units fall under the guise of
the DoD’s clandestine Joint Special Operations Command (JSOC) and engage in
a wide-range of highly classified counterterrorist and covert operations, or
“special missions,” around the world, hundreds of who were personally
trained by Kearns.

 

The SV-91 course Jessen and Kearns were
developing back in 1989 would later become known as “Special Survival for
Special Mission Units.”

Before the inception of SV-91, the primary SERE course was SV-80, or Basic
Combat Survival School for Resistance to Interrogation, which is where
Jessen formerly worked.

 

When Jessen was hired to work on SV-91, the vacancy
at SV-80 was filled by psychologist Dr. James Mitchell, who was also
contracted by the CIA to work at the agency’s top-secret black site prisons
in Europe employing SERE torture techniques, such as the controlled drowning
technique know as waterboarding, against detainees.
 

Listen below to Jason Leopold discuss
this report on The Peter B. Collins show.


 

http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/musica/player3.swf

 

 

While they were still under contract to the CIA,
the two men formed the “consulting” firm

Mitchell, Jessen & Associates
in
March 2005.

 

The “governing persons” of the company included,

  • Kearns’ former boss, Aldrich

  • SERE contractor David Tate

  • Joseph Matarazzo, a former president of
    the American Psychological Association

  • Randall Spivey, the ex-chief of
    Operations, Policy and Oversight Division of JPRA

Mitchell, Jessen & Associates’ articles of
incorporation have been “inactive” since October 22, 2009 and the business
is now listed as “dissolved,” according to Washington state’s Secretary of
State

website
.
 

 


Lifting the “Veil of
Secrecy”

Kearns was one of only two officers within DoD qualified to teach all three
SERE-related courses within SSTP on a worldwide basis, according to a copy
of a 1989 letter written by Aldrich, who nominated Kearns

officer of the
year
.

He said he decided to come forward because he is outraged that Jessen used
their work to help design the Bush administration’s torture program.

“I think it’s about time for SERE to come
out from behind the veil of secrecy if we are to progress as a moral
nation of laws,” Kearns said during a wide-ranging interview with
TruthOut.

 

“To take this survival training program and
turn it into some form of nationally sanctioned, purposeful program for
the extraction of information, or to apply exploitation, is in total
contradiction to human morality, and defies basic logic. When I first
learned about interrogation, at basic intelligence training school, I
read about Hans Scharff, a Nazi interrogator who later wrote an article
for Argosy Magazine titled ‘Without Torture.’ That’s what I was taught –
torture doesn’t work.”

What stands out in Jessen’s notes is that he
believed torture was often used to produce false confessions.

 

That was the end result after one high-value
detainee who was tortured in early 2002 confessed to having information
proving a link between the late Iraqi dictator Saddam Hussein and al-Qaeda,
according to one former Bush administration official. (see “The
Truth About Richard Bruce Cheney
“)

It was later revealed, however, that the prisoner, Ibn al-Shaykh al-Libi,
had simply provided his captors a false confession so they would stop
torturing him. Jessen appeared to be concerned with protecting the U.S.
military against falling victim to this exact kind of physical and
psychological pressure in a hostile detention environment, recognizing that
it would lead to, among other things, false confessions.

In a paper Jessen wrote accompanying his notes, “Psychological Advances in
Training to Survive Captivity, Interrogation and Torture,” which was
prepared for the symposium, “Advances in Clinical Psychological Support
of National Security Affairs, Operational Problems in the Behavioral
Sciences Course,” he suggested that,

additional “research” should be
undertaken to determine, “the measurability of optimum stress levels in
training students to resist captivity.”

“The avenues appear inexhaustible” for further research in human
exploitation, Jessen wrote.

Such “research” appears to have been the main
underpinning of the Bush administration’s torture program.

 

The experimental nature of these interrogation
methods used on detainees held at Guantanamo and at CIA black site prisons
have been noted by military and intelligence officials.

 

The Armed Services Committee report cited a
statement from Col. Britt Mallow, the commander of the Criminal
Investigative Task Force
(CITF), who noted that Guantanamo officials Maj.
Gen. Mike Dunleavy and Maj. Gen. Geoffrey Miller used the term “battle lab”
to describe the facility, meaning,

“that interrogations and other procedures
there were to some degree experimental, and their lessons would benefit
[the Department of Defense] in other places.”

What remains a mystery is why Jessen took a
defensive survival training course and helped turn it into an offensive
torture program.

TruthOut attempted to reach Jessen over the past two months for comment, but
we were unable to track him down.

 

Messages left for him at a security firm in
Alexandria, Virginia he has been affiliated with were not returned and phone
numbers listed for him in Spokane were disconnected.
 

 


A New Emphasis on
Terrorism

SV-91 was developed to place a new emphasis on terrorism as SERE-related
courses pertaining to the cold war, such as SV-83, Special Survival for
Sensitive Reconnaissance Operations (SRO), whose students flew secret
missions over the Soviet Union, Eastern Bloc, and other communist countries,
were being scaled back.

 



The official patch and coin of the Special Survival Training Program

(Photo
courtesy of retired Air Force Capt. Michael Kearns)
 

SSTP evolved into the Joint Personnel Recovery Agency (JPRA), the DoD’s
executive agency for SERE training, and was

tapped by DoD
General Counsel
WilliamJimHaynes in 2002 to provide the agency with a list of
interrogation techniques and the psychological impact those methods had on
SERE trainees, with the aim of utilizing the same methods for use on
detainees.

 

Aldrich was working in a senior capacity at JPRA
when Haynes contacted the agency to inquire about SERE.

The Army also runs a SERE school as does the Navy, which had utilized
waterboarding as a training exercise on Navy SERE students that JPRA
recommended to DoD as one of the torture techniques to use on high-value
detainees.

Kearns said the value of Jessen’s notes, particularly as they relate to the
psychological aspects of the Bush administration’s torture program, cannot
be overstated.

“The Jessen notes clearly state the totality
of what was being reverse-engineered – not just ‘enhanced interrogation
techniques,’ but an entire program of exploitation of prisoners using
torture as a central pillar,” he said.

 

“What I think is important to
note, as an ex-SERE Resistance to Interrogation instructor, is the focus
of Jessen’s instruction. It is exploitation, not specifically
interrogation.

“And this is not a picayune issue, because if one were to
‘reverse-engineer’ a course on resistance to exploitation then what one
would get is a plan to exploit prisoners, not interrogate them. The CIA/DoD
torture program appears to have the same goals as the terrorist
organizations or enemy governments for which SV-91 and other SERE
courses were created to defend against: the full exploitation of the
prisoner in his intelligence, propaganda, or other needs held by the
detaining power, such as the recruitment of informers and double agents.
Those aspects of the U.S. detainee program have not generally been
discussed as part of the torture story in the American press.”

Ironically, in late 2001, while the DoD started
to make inquiries about adapting SERE methods for the government’s
interrogation program, Kearns received special permission from the U.S.
government to work as an intelligence officer for the Australian Department
of Defence to teach the Australian Special Air Service (SAS) how to use SERE
techniques to resist interrogation and torture if they were captured by
terrorists.

 

Australia had been a staunch supporter of the
invasion of Afghanistan and sent troops there in late 2001.

Kearns, who recently waged an unsuccessful Congressional campaign in
Colorado, was working on a spy novel two years ago and dug through boxes of
“unclassified historical materials on intelligence” as part of his research
when he happened to stumble upon Jessen’s notes for SV-91.

 

He said he was,

“deeply shocked and surprised to see I’d
kept a copy of these handwritten notes as certainly the originals would
have been destroyed (shredded)” once they were typed up and made into
proper course materials.

 

“I hadn’t seen these notes for over twenty
years,” he said.

 

“However, I’ll never forget that day in
September 2009 when I discovered them. I instantly felt sick, and
eventually vomited because I felt so badly physically and emotionally
that day knowing that I worked with this person and this was the
material that I believe was ‘reverse-engineered’ and used in part to
design the torture program. When I found the Jessen papers, I made
several copies and sent them to my friends as I thought this could be
the smoking gun, which proves who knew what and when and possibly who
sold a bag of rotten apples to the Bush administration.”

Kearns was, however, aware of the role SERE
played in the torture program before he found Jessen’s notes, and in July
2008, he sent an email to the chairman of the Armed Services Committee, Sen.
Carl Levin, who was investigating the issue and offered to share information
with Levin about Jessen and the SERE program in general.

 

The Michigan Democrat responded to Kearns saying
he was “concerned about this issue” and that he “needed more information on
the subject,” but Levin never followed up when Kearns offered to help.

“I don’t know how it went off the tracks,
but the names of the people who testified at the Senate Armed Services,
Senate Judiciary, and Select Intelligence committees were people I
worked with, and several I supervised,” Kearns said.

 

“It makes me sick
to know people who knew better allowed this to happen.”

Levin’s office did not return phone calls or
emails for comment.

 

However,

the report he released
in April 2009, “Inquiry Into the Treatment of Detainees in
U.S. Custody,” refers to SV-91.

 

The report includes a list of acronyms used
throughout the report, one of which is “S-V91,” identified as “the
Department of Defense High Risk Survival Training” course.

 

But there is no other mention throughout the
report of SV-91 or the term “High Risk Survival Training,” possibly due to
the fact that sections of the report where it is discussed remain
classified.

 

Still, the failure by Levin and his staff to
follow up with Kearns – the key military official who had retained Jessen’s
notes and helped develop the very course those notes were based upon that
was cited in the report – suggests Levin’s investigation is somewhat
incomplete.
 

 


Control and Dependence

A copy of the syllabus for SV-91, obtained by TruthOut from another source
who requested anonymity, states that the class was created,

“to provide special training for selected
individuals that will enable them to withstand exploitation methods in
the event of capture during peacetime operations… to cope with such
exploitation and deny their detainers useable information or
propaganda.”

Although the syllabus focuses on propaganda and
interrogation for information as the primary means of exploiting prisoners,
Jessen’s notes amplify what was taught to SERE students and later used
against detainees captured after 9/11.

 

He wrote that a prisoner’s captors seek to
“exploit” the prisoner through control and dependence.

“From the moment you are detained (if some
kind of exploitation is your Detainer’s goal) everything your Detainer
does will be contrived to bring about these factors: CONTROL,
DEPENDENCY, COMPLIANCE AND COOPERATION,” Jessen wrote.

 

“Your detainer will work to take away your
sense of control. This will be done mostly by removing external control
(i.e., sleep, food, communication, personal routines etc.)…Your detainer
wants you to feel ‘EVERYTHING’ is dependent on him, from the smallest
detail, (food, sleep, human interaction), to your release or your very
life… Your detainer wants you to comply with everything he wishes. He
will attempt to make everything from personal comfort to your release
unavoidably connected to compliance in your mind.”

Jessen wrote that cooperation is the “end goal”
of the detainer, who wants the detainee,

“to see that [the detainer] has ‘total’
control of you because you are completely dependent on him, and thus you
must comply with his wishes. Therefore, it is absolutely inevitable that
you must cooperate with him in some way (propaganda, special favors,
confession, etc.).”

Jessen described the kinds of pressures that
would be exerted on the prisoner to achieve this goal, including “fear of
the unknown, loss of control, dehumanization, isolation,” and use of sensory
deprivation and sensory “flooding.”

 

He also included “physical” deprivations in his
list of detainer “pressures.”

“Unlike everyday experiences, however, as a
detainee we could be subjected to stressors/coercive pressures which we
cannot completely control,” he wrote.

 

“If these stressors are
manipulated and increased against us, the cumulative effect can push us
out of the optimum range of functioning. This is what the detainer
wants, to get us ‘off balance.'”

“The Detainer wants us to experience a loss of composure in hopes we can
be manipulated into some kind of collaboration…” Jessen wrote.

 

“This
is where you are most vulnerable to exploitation. This is where you are
most likely to make mistakes, show emotions, act impulsively, become
discouraged, etc. You are still close enough to being intact that you
would appear convincing and your behavior would appear ‘uncoerced.'”

Kearns said, based on what he has read in
declassified government documents and news reports about the role SERE
played in the Bush administration’s torture program, Jessen clearly
“reverse-engineered” his lesson plan and used resistance methods to abuse
“war on terror” detainees.

The SSTP course was,

“specifically and intentionally designed to
assist American personnel held in hostile detention,” Kearns said.

It was,

“not designed for interrogation, and
certainly not torture. We were not interrogators we were ‘role-players’
who introduced enemy exploitation techniques into survival scenarios as
student learning objectives in what could be called Socratic-style
dilemma settings.

 

More specifically, resistance techniques
were learned via significant emotional experiences, which were intended
to inculcate long-term valid and reliable survival routines in the
student’s memory. The one rule we had was ‘hands off.’ No (human
intelligence) operator could lay hands on a student in a ‘role play
scenario’ because we knew they could never ‘go there’ in the real
world.”

But after Jessen was hired, Kearns contends,
Aldrich immediately trained him to become a mock interrogator using,

“SERE harsh resistance to interrogation
methods even though medical services officers were explicitly excluded
from the ‘laying on’ of hands in [resistance] ‘role-play’ scenarios.”

Aldrich, who now works with the
Center for
Personal Protection & Safety
in Spokane, did not return calls for comment.
 

 


“Torture Paper”

The companion paper Jessen wrote included with his notes, which was also
provided to TruthOut by Kearns, eerily describes the same torturous
interrogation methods U.S. military personnel would face during detention that
Jessen and Mitchell “reverse engineered” a little more than a decade later
and that the CIA and DoD used against detainees.

Indeed, in a subsection of the paper, “Understanding the Prisoner of War
Environment,” Jessen notes how a prisoner will be broken down in an attempt
to get him to “collaborate” with his “detainer.”

“This issue of collaboration is ‘the most
prominent deliberately controlled force against the (prisoner of war),”
Jessen wrote.

 

“The ability of the (prisoner of war) to successfully
resist collaboration and cope with the obviously severe
approach-avoidance conflict is complicated in a systematic and
calculated way by his captors.

“These complications include: Threats of death, physical pressures
including torture which result in psychological disturbances or
deterioration, inadequate diet and sanitary facilities with constant
debilitation and illness, attacks on the mental health via isolation,
reinforcement of anxieties, sleeplessness, stimulus deprivation or
flooding, disorientation, loss of control both internal and external
locus, direct and indirect attack on the (prisoner of war’s) standards
of honor, faith in himself, his organization, family, country, religion,
or political beliefs… Few seem to be able to hold themselves
completely immune to such rigorous behavior throughout all the
vicissitudes of long captivity. Confronted with these conditions, the
unprepared prisoner of war experiences unmanageable levels of fear and
despair.”

“Specific (torture resistance) techniques,” Jessen wrote, “taught to and
implemented by the military member in the prisoner of war setting are
classified” and were not discussed in the paper he wrote.

 

He added,
“Resistance Training students must leave training with useful resistance
skills and a clear understanding that they can successfully resist
captivity, interrogation or torture.”

Kearns also declined to cite the specific
interrogation techniques used during SERE training exercises because that
information is still classified.

 

Nor would he comment as to whether the
interrogations used methods that matched or were similar to those identified
in the

August 2002 torture memo
(or download it

from here
) prepared by former Justice Department
attorneys John Yoo and Jay Bybee.

However, according to the Senate Armed Services Committee report “SERE
resistance training… was used to inform” Yoo and Bybee’s torture memo,
specifically, nearly a dozen of the brutal techniques detainees were
subjected to, which included waterboarding, sleep deprivation, painful
stress positions, wall slamming and placing detainees in a confined space,
such as a container, where his movement is restricted.

 

The CIA’s Office of Technical Services told Yoo
and Bybee the SERE techniques used to inform the torture memo were not
harmful, according to declassified government documents.

Many of the “complications,” or torture techniques, Jessen wrote about,
declassified government documents show, became a standard method of
interrogation and torture used against all of the high-value detainees in
custody of the CIA in early 2002, including Abu Zubaydah and self-professed
9/11 mastermind Khalid Sheikh Mohammed, as well as detainees held at
Guantanamo and prison facilities in Iraq and Afghanistan.

The issue of “collaborating” with one’s detainer, which Jessen noted was the
most important in terms of controlling a prisoner, is a common theme among
the stories of detainees who were tortured and later released from
Guantanamo.

For example, Mamdouh Habib, an Australian citizen who was rendered to Egypt
and other countries where he was tortured before being sent to Guantanamo,
wrote in his memoir, “My Story: the Tale of a Terrorist Who Wasn’t,” after
he was released without charge, that interrogators at Guantanamo,

“tried to make detainees mistrust one
another so that they would inform on each other during interrogation.”

Binyam Mohamed, am Ethiopian-born British
citizen, who the U.S. rendered to a black site prison in Morocco, said that a
British intelligence informant, a person he knew and who was recruited, came
to him in his Moroccan cell and told him that if he became an intelligence
asset for the British, his torture, which included scalpel cuts to his
penis, would end.

 

In December 2009, British government officials
released documents that show Mohamed was subjected to SERE torture
techniques during his captivity in the spring of 2002.

Abdul Aziz Naji, an Algerian prisoner at Guantanamo until he was forcibly
repatriated against his wishes to Algeria in July 2010, told an Algerian
newspaper that,

“some detainees had been promised to be
granted political asylum opportunity in exchange of [sic] a spying role
within the detention camp.”

Mohamedou Ould Salahi, whose surname is
sometimes spelled “Slahi,” is a Mauritanian who was tortured in Jordan and
Guantanamo.

 

Investigative journalist Andy Worthington

reported
that Salahi was subjected to,

“prolonged isolation, prolonged sleep
deprivation, beatings, death threats, and threats that his mother would
be brought to Guantanamo and gang-raped” unless he collaborated with his
interrogators.

Salahi finally decided to become an informant
for the U.S. in 2003.

 

As a result, Salahi was allowed to live in a
special fenced-in compound, with television and refrigerator, allowed to
garden, write and paint,

“separated from other detainees in a cocoon
designed to reward and protect.”

Still, despite collaborating with his detainers,
the U.S. government mounted a vigorous defense against Salahi’s petition for
habeas corpus. His case continues to hang in legal limbo.

 

Salahi’s fate speaks to the lesson Habib said he
learned at Guantanamo:

“you could never satisfy your interrogator.”

Habib felt informants were never released,

“because the Americans used them against the
other detainees.”

Jessen’s and Mitchell’s multimillion dollar
government contract was terminated by CIA Director Leon Panetta in
2009.

 

According to an Associated Press report, the CIA
agreed to pay – to the tune of $5 million – the legal bills incurred by
their consulting firm.

Recently a complaint filed against Mitchell with the Texas State Board of
Examiners of Psychologists
by a San Antonio-based psychologist, an attorney
who defended three suspected terrorists imprisoned at Guantanamo and by Zubaydah’s attorney Joseph Margulies.

 

Their complaint sought to strip Mitchell of his
license to practice psychology for violating the board’s rules as a result
of the hands-on role he played in torturing detainees,

was dismissed
due to
what the board said was a lack of evidence. Mitchell, who lives in Florida,
is licensed in Texas. A similar complaint against Jessen may soon be filed
in Idaho, where he is licensed to practice psychology.

Kearns, who took a graduate course in cognitive psychotherapy in 1988 taught
by Jessen, still can’t comprehend what motivated his former colleague to
turn to the “dark side.”

“Bruce Jessen knew better,” Kearns said, who
retired in 1991 and is now working on his Ph.D in educational
psychology. “His duplicitous act is appalling to me and shall haunt me
for the rest of my life.”

Posted in Uncategorized | Leave a comment

Diplomacy by Deception

6 –
Tavistock and “Operation Research” – Undeclared War

The founder for the

Tavistock Institute
for Human Relations, John
Rawlings Reese
, was to perfect a system that would subvert and then
control the thinking of human beings so that they could be channeled
in any direction so desired by the Committee of 300, also known as
the Olympians. It must be said that to do this, one must introduce
an automated mentality into the bulk of the targeted population.
This is an objective with very far-reaching implications nationally
and internationally.

The end result of Reese’s objectives were and remain, control of all
human life; its destruction when deemed desirable, whether it be
through mass genocide or mass slavery. We are witnessing both today.
One is the Global 2000 genocidal plan, which calls for the deaths of
more of 500 million people by the year 2010; the other is slavery by
an economic means. Both systems are fully operational and working
side-by-side in today’s America.

Reese began his Tavistock experiments in 1921; it soon became clear
to him that his system could be applied both domestically and
militarily. Reese said that the solution to the problems he foresaw
needed a ruthless approach, without concern for religious or moral
values. He later added another area to his list that of nationalism.

Reese is known to have studied the work of the Nine Unkown Men, as
referred to in 1860 by the French writer Jacolliot. Among
Jacolliot’s remarks were that the Nine Unknown Men knew about the
liberation of energy, sterilization by radiation, propaganda and
psychological warfare, all of which were absolutely unheard of in
that century. Jacolliot said that the technique of psychological
warfare was “the

When it became obvious that British politicians were bent on solving
the country’s economic problems by means of another war, Reese was
given 80,000 British Army recruits to use as guinea pigs. Operation
Research
was the name given to his project, and basically, it was
designed to develop a methodology (logistics) in military management that would make the best use of limited military resources sea,
air and land defense systems against Britain’s foreign enemies.

Thus, the original program was a military-management one, but by
1946, Reese had developed Operation Research to the point that it
could be applied as a civilian management program. Reese had
“arrived,” insofar as social engineering was concerned, but his work
is concealed in top secret files at Tavistock. Technically, the
Reese Tavistock manual, of which I have a copy, is a full
declaration of war against the civilian population of any targeted
country. Reese said that it had to be understood that “whenever any
government, groups, persons in positions of power” use his methods
without the consent of the people, it is understood by these
governments or groups of people that conquest is the motive, and
that domestic warfare exists between them and the public.

Reese discovered that with social engineering comes the greater need
for information that can be rapidly collected and correlated. One of
the earlier statements attributed to Reese was the necessity to stay
ahead of society and predict its moves by engineering situations. A
big breakthrough for Reese and his social tinkerers came with the
discovery of linear programming by George B. Danzig in 1947. This
came at a time when Reese was engaged in a war with the American
nation, a war which is still ongoing, and which was greatly
facilitated by the invention of the transistor by Bardeen, Brittain
and Shockley in 1948.

Enter the Rockefellers, who gave a huge grant to Tavistock to enable
Reese to press ahead with a study of the American economy, using
Operation Research methods. Simultaneously, the Rockefeller Foundation
gave Harvard University a four-year grant to create its own American
economy model. The year was 1949, and Harvard pressed ahead with its
own economic model, based on Tavistock’s.

The only stipulation Reese made as a condition of his cooperation
with Harvard, was that Tavistock methods be followed throughout.
These were based upon the Prudential Assurance Bombing Survey Study,
which led to saturation bombing of German worker housing as a means
of bringing about the capitulation of the German war machine. These
methods were now ready to be applied in a civilian context.

Reese made a detailed study of America’s entry into WWI, which he
deemed to be the beginning of the 20th century. Reese realized that
for America to be seduced away from so-called “isolationism,”
American thinking would have to be drastically changed. Woodrow
Wilson had dragged America into European affairs in 1916 with
corruption and corrupting policies. Wilson sent American forces to
fight on Europe’s battlefields, in spite of the warnings issued by
the Founding Fathers, to stay out of foreign entanglements.

The
Committee of 300
, was determined to keep the United States entangled
in European and indeed world affairs forever after.

Wilson did not change Europe, but Europe changed America. The
banishing of power politics, which is what Wilson thought he could
do, was not possible, because power is politics and politics is
economic power. This has been so since the earliest recorded history
of politics: those of the city-states of the Sumer and Akkad of
5,000 years ago, right down to Hitler and the USSR. Economics is
only an extension of a natural energy system, but that system, the
elitists have always said, belongs under their control.

In order for an economy to be under the control of elite body, it
has to be an economy that is predictable and totally manipulatable.
This is what the Harvard model set out to accomplish, backed by the
social dynamics of the Reese Operation Research. Reese had
discovered that to achieve total predictability in population
groups, the elements of society had to be brought under control
under a yoke of slavery, and dispossessed of the means of
discovering their predicament, so that
not knowing how to unite or a joint defense, they would not know
where to turn to for help.

That Tavistock methodology is at work can be found everywhere in the
United States. People, not knowing where to turn to understand the
predicament they find themselves in, turn to the worst place of all
for supposed help: the government. The Harvard Economic Research
Project, which began in 1948, embodied all the Reese principles,
which, in turn, came out of the Prudential Bombing Survey and
Operations Research. By joining forces,

the elite
felt that a means
of controlling a nation’s economy and the population was now
available with the coming of the computer age — both a blessing and
a terrible curse for mankind.

All science is only a means to an end, and man is knowledge
(information), which ends in control. Who the beneficiaries of that
control are was decided by the Committee of 300 and its antecedents
300 years ago. The war waged against the American people by
Tavistock is now 47 years old and shows no signs of letting up. As
energy is the key to all life on this planet, through diplomacy by
deception and outright strong-arm methods, the Committee has gained
control of most energy resources.

The Committee, by deception and dissembling, has also gained control
of social energy, which is expressed in economic terms. Provided
that the ordinary citizen could be kept ignorant of the real
economic methods of bookkeeping, then the citizens would be doomed to
lead a life of economic slavery. This is what has happened. We, the
people, gave our consent to the economic controllers of our lives
and became slaves of the elite. As Reese once said, people who will
not use their intelligence have no better rights than dumb animals
who have no intelligence at all. Economic slavery is essential if
good order is to be maintained, and the ruling class may enjoy the
fruits produced by slave labor.

Reese and his team of social scientists and social engineers went to
work on the American public by learning first, then understanding,
and then attacking, the social energy (economics) and the mental and
physical weaknesses of the nation. Earlier, I said that the computer
is both a blessing and a curse for mankind. On the positive side,
there are many emerging economists who, through the use of
computers, are starting to wake up to the fact that the Harvard
model is a blueprint for economic slavery.

If this new breed of economic programmers can get its message out to
the American people fast enough, the

New World Order
(of slavery)
can still be stopped. This is where diplomacy by deception plays
such a vast role in subverting through the media, education and
influencing the way we think by distracting us with issues of
absolutely no importance, while the truly important issues are
glossed over. In a major policy study meeting ordered by the
Committee of 300 in 1954, it was made clear to economic experts,
high-ranking government officials, bankers, and leaders of commerce
and industry, that the war against the American people was to be
stepped up.

Robert McNamara was one of those who said that, because peace and
good order was being threatened by an out-of-control population, the
wealth of the nation had to be moved away from the undisciplined
masses and into the control of the self-disciplined few.

 

McNamara
savagely attacked overpopulation, which he said threatened to change
the world in which we live and make it ungovernable:

“We can begin with the most critical problems of population growth.
As I have pointed out elsewhere, short of nuclear war itself, it is
the gravest issue that the world faces in the decades ahead. If
current trends continue, the world as a whole will not reach
replacement level fertility – in effect an average of two children per
family – until about the year 2020. That means that the world’s
population would finally stabilize at about 10 billion, compared
with today’s 4.3 billion.

“We call it stabilized, but what kind of stability would be
possible? Can we assume that the levels of poverty, hunger, stress,
crowding and frustration that such a situation could cause in the
developing nations which by then would contain 9 out of 10 human
beings on earth would be likely to assure social stability? Or,
for that matter, military stability?

“It is not a world that any of us would want to live in. Is such a
world inevitable? It is not but there are only two possible ways in
which a world of 10 billion people can be averted. Either the
current birthrate must come down more quickly, or the current death
rates must go up. There is no other way.

There are, of course, many ways in which the death rates can go up.
In a thermonuclear age, war can accomplish it very quickly and
decisively. Famine and disease are nature’s ancient checks on population growth, and neither one has disappeared from the scene.”

In 1979 McNamara repeated his message to the leading bankers from
around the world, and Thomas Enders, a high-ranking State Department official, made the following statement:

“There is a single theme behind all of our work. We must reduce
population growth. Either they do it our way, through nice, clean
methods, or they will get the kind of a mess that we have in El
Salvador, or Iran, or Beirut. Once population growth is out of
control, it requires authoritarian government, even fascism, to
reduce it. Civil war can help things, but it would have to be greatly
expanded. To reduce population quickly, you have to pull all males
into the fighting and kill significant numbers of fertile,
child-bearing-age females.”

The solution to the problem of a world in which the elite would not
want to live is mass genocide. The

Club of Rome
was ordered to
produce a blueprint that would wipe out 500 million of excess
population. The plan was called

Global 2000
, and it was activated by
spreading the AIDS virus throughout Africa and Brazil
. Global 2000
was officially accepted as U.S. policy by President James Carter.

The conference members agreed that the,

“low-class element of society
must be brought under total control, trained and assigned to duties
at an early age, which can be accomplished by the quality of
education, which must be the poorest of the poor. The lower-classes
must be trained to accept their position, long before they have an
opportunity to query it.”

“Technically, children must be ‘orphaned’ in day care centers under
government control. With such an initial handicap, the lower-classes
will have little hope of upward mobility away from their assigned
positions in life. The form of slavery we have in mind is essential
for good social order, peace and tranquility.

“We have the resources to attack the vitality, options and mobility
of the individuals in society by knowing through our social
scientist, understanding and manipulating and attacking their
sources of social energy (income), and therefore, their physical,
mental and emotional strengths and weaknesses. The general public
refuses to improve its own mentality. It has become a herd of
proliferating barbarians, and a blight on the face of the earth.

“By measuring the economic habits by which the sheep try to run from
their problems and escape from reality via the medium of
‘entertainment’, it is absolutely possible, applying Operation
Research
methods, to predict the probable combination shocks
(created events) which are necessary to bring about complete control
and subjugation of the population by subverting the economy. The
strategy includes the use of amplifiers (advertising), and when we
speak on television in the manner that a ten year old can relate to,
then because of the suggestions made, that person will purchase that
production impulse, the next time he comes across it in a store.

“The balance of power will provide the stability that the world of
the 21st century is likely to achieve, rent as it will be, by
passionate tribalism and by such seemingly insoluble issues like
that posed by mass migration from the South to the North, and from
farm to city. There may be mass transfers of population, such as
those between Greece and Turkey in the aftermath of the First World
War; really mass murders. It will be a time of troubles, in need of
a unifier; an Alexander or Mohammed.

“A great change that will come about as a result of emerging
conflicts between peoples who live side by side — and which will, by
their intensity, take primacy over their other conflicts — is that
political rivalry will be within regions, rather than between them.
This will
bring about a turning back from global politics. After a decade in
which the U.S. and the Soviet Union dueled across oceans, the powers
will focus on protecting themselves against forces on their
frontiers — or within them.

“The American people do not know economic science and care little
about it, hence, they are always ripe for war. They cannot avoid
war, notwithstanding their religious morality, nor can they find in
religion the solution to their earthly problems. They are knocked
out of shape by economic experts who cause Shockwaves that wreck
budgets and buying habits. The American public is yet to realize
that we control their buying habits.”

There we have it. Split up nations into tribal factions, keep the
populace struggling to make a living and concerned with regional
conflicts so that they will never have an opportunity to get a clear
view of what is going on, let alone challenge it, and at the same
time, bring about a drastic lowering of the world’s population.

 

We
see this happening in the former Yugoslavia, where the country is
being forced into small, tribal entities, and we see it in America,
where the average family has both parents working, and yet cannot
make ends meet. These parents do not have time to pay careful
attention to how they are being deceived and led into economic
slavery. It is all a set-up.

Today, we observe — if we have the time— that the United States
stand at the threshold of progressive dissolution as the result of
Tavistock’s silent “control” war against the American nation.
The
Bush presidency was a total disaster, and the Clinton presidency
will be even more of a shock
. This is the way the blueprint is
drawn, and we, the people, are fast losing faith in our institutions
and our ability to remake America into what it was intended to be —
a very far cry from what it is now — overrun by foreign people who
threaten to engulf the nation — a South-North invasion right here in
our own country.

We have surrendered our real wealth for a promise of greater wealth,
instead of compensation in real terms. We have fallen into the toils
of the Babylonian system of “capitalism,” which isn’t capitalism at
all, but an appearance of capital, as typified by currency which is
in fact
negative capital. This is deceptive and destructive. The U.S. dollar
has the appearance of currency, but it is in fact a token of debt
and indebtedness.

Currency as we know it will be balanced by war and genocide—which is
what is happening in front of our very eyes. Total goods and
services is real capital, and currency can be printed up to this
level, but not beyond it. Once currency is printed beyond the level
of goods and services, it becomes a destructive, subtractive force.
War is the only way to “balance” the system by killing those
creditors, which the people docilely gave up true value in exchange
for inflated currency.

Energy (economics) is the key to all earthly activities. Hence the
often repeated statement I have made that all wars are economic in
origin. The thrust of the One World Government-New World Order must,
of necessity, be to obtain a monopoly of all goods and services, raw
materials, and control over the manner in which economics is taught.
Only in this framework can the New World Order gain full control. In
the United States, we are constantly helping the One World Government to obtain control of the world’s natural resources by being
tricked into giving part of our income for this purpose. It is
called “foreign aid.”

Tavistock’s Operation Research project states as follows:

“Our research has established that the simplest mode of gaining
control of people is to keep them undisciplined and in the dark of
basic systems and principles while at the same time keeping them
disorganized, confused and distracted by issues which are of
relatively little import

“In addition to our less direct long-range penetration methods, this
can be accomplished by a disengagement of mental activities and
providing low quality programs of public education in mathematics,
logic, system designs and economics and by discouraging technical
creativity.

“Our mode calls for emotional stimulus, increased use of amplifiers
which induce self-indulgence, whether direct (television programs)
or advertising. We at Tavistock have found that the best way to
accomplish the goal is through an unremitting and unrelenting
emotional affrontation and attack (mental rape) through a constant
barrage of sex, violence, wars, racial strife both in the electronic
and print media. This steady diet could be called ‘mental junk
food’.

“Of primary importance is the revision of history and law and
subjecting the populace to the deviant creation, thus shifting
thinking from personal needs to constructed, fabricated outside
priorities. The general rule is that there is profit in confusion,
the greater the confusion, the greater the profit. One of the ways
in which this can be accomplished is to create problems and then
offer solutions.

“It is essential to divide the people, keep the adults’ attention
away from real issues and overcome their thinking with matters of
relatively little importance. The young must be kept ignorant of
mathematics; the proper teaching of economics and history must never
be made available. Keep all groups so occupied with an endless round
of issues and problems that they have no time to think clearly, and
here, we rely on entertainment which should not reach beyond the
mental capacity of a child in the sixth grade.

“When government is able to seize private property without just
compensation, it is certain that people are ripe for surrender and
consenting to slavery and legal encroachment. Energy sources which
support a primitive economy are a supply of raw materials, the
consent of people to labor, and assume a certain place, position,
level in the social structure viz., provide labor at various levels
of the structure.

“Each class, therefore, guarantees its level of income and hence
controls the class immediately below it, thereby preserving the
class structure. One of the best examples of this was found in the
caste system in India
, in which rigid control was exercised,
ensuring that upward mobility which could threaten the elite at the
top, was constrained. In this method is security and stability
attained, and also a government from the top.

“The sovereignty of the elite is threatened when the lower classes,
through communications and education become informed and envious
of the power and possessions of the class above them. As some of
them become better educated, they seek to rise higher through a real
knowledge of economics-energy. This presents a real threat to the
sovereignty of the elite class.

“It follows that the rise of the lower classes must be postponed
long enough for the elite class to achieve energy (economic)
dominance
, labor by consent becoming a lesser economic source. Until
such economic dominance is achieved to the fullest extent possible,
the consent of people to labor and let others handle their affairs
has to be taken into account. Failure to achieve this goal would
result in interference in the final transfer of energy sources
(economic wealth) to the control of the elite.

“Until such times, it is essential to recognize that public consent
is still the essential key to the release of energy in the process
of economic amplification. A consent of energy release system is
therefore vital. Artificial security must be provided in the absence
of the mother’s womb, which can take the form of withdrawal,
protective devices and shelters. Such shells will provide a stable
environment for stable and unstable activity, and provide a shelter
for the evolutionary processes of growth, that is to say, survival
in a shelter that gives defensive protection against offensive
activities.

“It applies equally to the elite and the lower classes, but there is
a definite difference in the manner in which both these classes
approach the solution of the problem. Our social science scientists
have made out a very compelling case that the reason why individuals
create a political structure is because they have a subconscious
desire to perpetuate their childhood-dependency relationship.

“In the simplest of terms, what the subconscious longing demands is
an earthly god to eliminate risks from their lives, put food on the
table and pat them on the back in a comforting way when things don’t
go well. The demand for an earthly problem-solver-risk-eliminator is
insatiable, which has given rise to a substitute earthly god: the
politician. The insatiable public demand for ‘protection’ is met
by promises, but the politician actually delivers little or
nothing on his promises.

“Ever present in humans is a desire to control or subdue others who
disturb their daily existence. However, they are unable to cope with
the moral and religious issues such actions would raise, so they
give the task to professional ‘hit men’, which we collectively call
politicians.

“The services of politicians are engaged for a number of reasons,
which, in the main are listed in the following order:

1) To obtain the longed-for security without managing it.

2) To
obtain action without the need to act, and without having to give
the desired action thought.

3) To avoid responsibility for their
intentions.

4) To obtain the benefits of reality without exerting
the necessary discipline of learning.

“We can readily divide a nation into two sub-categories, the
Political Sub Nation and the Docile Sub-Nation. The politicians hold quasi-military jobs, of which the lowest is the police force, next
come attorneys. The presidential level is run by the international
bankers. The docile sub-nation finances the political machine by
consent, that is to say, through taxation. The sub nation remains
attached to the political sub-nation, the latter feeding off it and
growing stronger, until the day comes when it is strong enough to
devour its creator, the people.”

When read in conjunction with the systems outlined in my book, the
Committee of 300“, it is relatively easy to see just how far
Tavistock’s Operation Research project has succeeded, and nowhere
more so than in the United States.

 

Recent statistics show that 75
percent of sixth grade school children were unable to pass what was
called “the maths test.” The maths test consisted of elementary
simple arithmetic, which ought to tell us something. Mathematics did
not come into the test at all. Cause for alarm?

 

You be the judg

Posted in Uncategorized | Leave a comment

Tavistock Institutions in The United States

by
Dr. John Coleman

from

Conspirators’ Hierarchy – The Story of the
Committee of 300

 

  • FLOW LABORATORIES

    Gets contracts from the National Institute of Health.

     

     

  • MERLE THOMAS CORPORATION

    Gets contracts from the U.S. Navy, analyzes data from satellites.

     

     

  • WALDEN RESEARCH

    Does work in the field of pollution control.

     

     

  • PLANNING RESEARCH CORPORATION, ARTHUR D. LITTLE, G.E. “TEMPO,”
    OPERATIONS RESEARCH INC.
     

    Part of approximately 350 firms who
    conduct research and conduct surveys, make recommendations to
    government. They are part of what President Eisenhower called “a
    possible
    danger to public policy that could itself become captive of a
    scientific-technological elite.”

     

     



  • // Open to size
    //

    var newWin1=null;

    function getPage(thePage,wt,ht)
    {
    leftPos= 0;
    topPos = 0;

    if ( newWin1 && !newWin1.closed )
    {
    newWin1.close();
    }

    newWin1 = window.open(thePage,’aWin’,’toolbars=no, resizeable=no,scrollbars=yes,left=’+leftPos+’,top=’+topPos+’,width=’+wt+’,height=’+ht);
    }


    BROOKINGS INSTITUTION

     

    Dedicates its work to what it calls a “national agenda.” Wrote
    President Hoover’s program, President Roosevelt’s “New Deal,” the
    Kennedy Administration’s “New Frontiers” program (deviation from it
    cost John F. Kennedy his life), and President Johnson’s “Great
    Society.” Brookings has been telling the United States Government
    how to conduct its affairs for the past 70 years and is still doing
    so on behalf of

    the Committee of 300
    .

     

     

  • HUDSON INSTITUTE


    Under the direction of
    Herman Khan, this institution has done more to shape the way
    Americans react to political and social events, think, vote and
    generally conduct themselves than perhaps any except the BIG
    FIVE. Hudson specializes in defense policy research and
    relations with the USSR. Most of its military work is classified as
    SECRET. (One idea during the Vietnam War was to build a moat around
    Saigon.) Some of its earlier papers were entitled “Stability and
    Tranquility Among Older Nations,” and “Analytical Summary of U.S.
    National Security Policy Issues.”


    Hudson prides itself on its diversity; it helped NASA with its space
    programs and helped to promote new youth fashions and ideas, youth
    rebellion and alienation for the Committee of 300, ostensibly funded
    by Coca Cola. Hudson may be quite properly classified as one of the
    Committee of 300’s BRAIN-WASHING establishments. Some of its nuclear
    war scenarios make for very interesting reading and, if they can be
    obtained, I would recommend “The 6 Basic Thermonuclear Threats” and
    “Possible Outcomes of Thermonuclear War” and one of its more
    frightening papers entitled “Israeli-Arab Nuclear War.”


    Hudson also does corporate advising for
    Committee of 300 companies,
    Rank, Xerox, General Electric, IBM and General Motors, to name but a
    few of them, but its really big client remains the U. S. Department
    of Defense which includes matters of civil defense, national
    security, military policy and arms control. To date it has not got
    into “wet NASA,” that is to say, the National Oceanographic Agency.

     

     

  • NATIONAL TRAINING LABORATORIES


    NTL is also known as the International Institute for Applied
    Behavioral Sciences. This institute is definitely a brainwashing
    center based on Kurt Lewin principles which include so-called
    T-Groups (training groups), artificial stress training whereby
    participants suddenly find themselves immersed in defending
    themselves against vicious accusations. NTL takes in the National
    Education Association, the largest teacher-group in the United
    States.


    While officially decrying “racism,” it is interesting to note that
    NTL, working with NEA, produced a paper proposing education vouchers
    which would separate the hard-to-teach children from the brighter
    ones, and funding would be allocated according to the number of
    difficult children who would be separated from those who progressed
    at a normal rate. The proposal was not taken up.

     

     

  • UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA, WHARTON

    SCHOOL OF FINANCE & COMMERCE


    Founded by Eric Trist, one of the “brain trusts” of
    Tavistock,
    Wharton has become one of the more important Tavistock institutions
    in the U.S. in so far as “Behavioral Research” is concerned. Wharton
    attracts clients such as the U.S. Department of Labor—which it
    teaches how to produce “cooked” statistics at the Wharton
    Econometric Forecasting Associates Incorporated. This method is
    very much in demand as we come to the close of 1991 with millions
    more out of work than is reflected in USDL statistics.


    Wharton’s ECONOMETRIC MODELING is used by every major


    Committee of 300

    company in the United States, Western Europe and by the

    International Monetary Fund
    , the

    United Nations
    and the

    World Bank
    .
    Wharton has produced such note-worthy persons as George Schultz and
    Alan Greenspan.

     

     

  • INSTITUTE FOR SOCIAL RESEARCH


    This is the institute set up by “brain trusters” from
    Tavistock
    Rensis Likert, Dorwin Cartwright and Ronald Lippert. Among its
    studies are:

    • “The Human Meaning of Social Change”

    • “Youth in
      Transition”

    • “How Americans View Their Mental Health”

    Among the
    institute’s clients are

    • The Ford Foundation

    • U.S. Department of Defense

    • U.S. Postal Service and the U.S.Department of Justice

     

  • INSTITUTE FOR THE FUTURE


    This is not a typical Tavistock institution in that it is funded by
    the Ford Foundation, yet it draws its long-range forecasting
    methodology from the mother of all think tanks. Institute for the
    Future projects what it believes to be changes that will be taking
    place in time frames of fifty years. The institute is supposed to be
    able to forecast socioeconomic trends and to blow the whistle on any
    departures from what it has laid down as normal.


    Institute for the Future believes it is possible and normal to
    intervene now and give decisions for the future. So-called “Delphi
    Panels
    ” decide what is normal and what is not, and prepare position
    papers to “steer” government in the right direction to head off such
    groups as “people creating civil disorder.”

     

    (This could be patriotic
    groups demanding abolition of graduated taxes, or demanding that
    their right to bear arms is not infringed.)


    The institute recommends actions such as liberalizing
    abortion
    laws, drug usage and that cars entering an urban area pay tolls,
    teaching birth control in public schools, requiring registration of
    firearms, making the use of drugs a non-criminal offense, legalizing
    homosexuality, paying students for scholastic achievements, making
    zoning controls a preserve of the state, offering bonuses for family
    planning and last, but by no means least, a Pol Pot Cambodia-style
    proposal that new communities be established in rural areas. As
    will be observed, many of the Institute for the Future’s goals have
    already been more than fully realized.

     

     

  • INSTITUTE FOR POLICY STUDIES (IPS)


    One of the “Big Three,” IPS has shaped and reshaped United
    States policies, foreign and domestic, since it was founded by
    James P. Warburg and the Rothschild entities in the United States,
    bolstered by Bertrand Russell and the British Socialists through
    its networks in America which include the League for Industrial
    democracy in which Leonard Woodcock played a leading, if
    behind-the-scenes role. Local lead players in the League for
    Industrial Democracy included “conservative” Jeane Kirkpatrick,
    Irwin Suall (of the ADL), Eugene Rostow (Arms Control negotiator),
    Lane Kirkland (Labor leader), and Albert Shanker.


    For record purposes only, IPS was incorporated in 1963 by
    Marcus Raskin and Richard Barnett, both highly-trained Tavistock Institute
    graduates. Most of the funding came from Rothschild associates in
    America like the James Warburg Family, the Stern Family Foundation
    and the Samuel Rubin Foundation. Samuel Rubin was a registered
    member of the Communist Party who stole the Faberge name (Faberge
    was “Jeweler of the Imperial Russian Court”) and made a fortune out
    of the Faberge name.


    The objectives of IPS came from an agenda laid down for it by the
    British
    Round Table
    , which agenda in turn came from
    Travistock
    Institute, one of the most notable being to create the “New Left” as
    a grass roots movement in the U.S. IPS was to engender strife and
    unrest and spread chaos like a wildfire out of control, proliferate
    the “ideals” of left wing nihilistic socialism, support unrestricted
    use of drugs of all types, and be the “big stick” with which to beat
    the United States political establishment.


    Barnett and Raskin controlled such diverse elements as,

    • the Black
      Panthers

    • Daniel Ellsberg

    • National Security Council staff member Halperin

    • The Weathermen Underground

    • the Venceramos

    • the
      campaign staff of candidate George McGovern

    No scheme was too big
    for IPS and its controllers to take on and manage.


    Take the plot to “kidnap” Kissinger, which was in the hands
    of Eqbal Ahmed, a British MI-6 intelligence agent of Pakistani
    origin, laundered through “TROTS” (Trotskyite terrorists based
    in London). The “plot” was “discovered” by the FBI so that it could not go too far. Ahmed went on to become the director of
    one of IPS’s most influential agencies, The Transnational Institute which, chameleon-like, changed from its former name,
    Institute of Race Relations, when intelligence agents of BOSS
    (Bureau of State Security) in South Africa unmasked the fact
    that it was tied directly to Rhodes Scholarship-Harry Oppenheimer
    and Anglo-American-British mining interests in South Africa. BOSS
    also discredited the South Africa Foundation at the same time.


    Through its many powerful lobbying groups on Capitol Hill, IPS
    relentlessly used its “big stick” to beat Congress. IPS has a
    network of lobbyists, all supposedly operating independently but in
    actual fact acting cohesively, so that Congressmen are pummeled from
    all sides by seemingly different and varied lobbyists. In this way,
    IPS was, and is still, able to successfully sway individual
    Representatives and Senators to vote for “the trend, the way things
    are going.” By using key point men on Capitol Hill, IPS was able to
    break into the very infrastructure of our legislative system and the
    way it works.


    To give only a single concrete example of what I am talking about:
    in 1975, an IPS point man persuaded representative John Conyers
    (D-Michigan) and forty-seven members of the House to request IPS to
    prepare a budget study that would oppose the budget being prepared
    by President Gerald Ford. Although not adopted, the request was
    reinstated in 1976, 1977, and 1978 gathering sponsors as it went.


    Then in 1978, fifty-six Congressmen signed their names to sponsor an
    IPS budget study. This was prepared by Marcus Raskin. Raskin’s
    budget called for a fifty percent cut in the Defense Budget, a
    socialist housing program “that would compete with and steadily
    replace private housing and mortgage markets,” a national health
    service, “radical changes in the educational system that would
    disrupt capitalist control over the distribution of knowledge,” and
    several other radical ideas.


    The influence of IPS on Arms Control negotiations was a
    major factor in getting Nixon to sign the treasonous ABM Treaty in
    1972, which left the United States virtually defenseless against ICBM attack for almost 10 years. IPS became, and
    remains to this day one of the most prestigious “think tanks”
    controlling foreign policy decisions, which we, the people, foolishly believe are those of our law makers.


    By sponsoring militant activism
    at home and with links to revolutionaries abroad, by engineering
    such victories as “The Pentagon Papers,” besieging the
    corporate structure, bridging the credibility gap between
    underground movements and acceptable
    political activism, by penetrating religious organizations and using
    them to sow discord in America, such as radical racial politics
    under the guise of religion, using the establishment media
    to spread IPS ideas, and then supporting them, IPS has lived up to
    the role which it was founded to play.

     

     

  • STANFORD RESEARCH INSTITUTE


    Jesse Hobson
    , the first president of
    Stanford Research
    Institute,
    in a 1952 speech made it clear what lines the institute was to
    follow.

     

    Stanford can be described as one of the “jewels” in Tavistock’s Crown in its rule over the United States. Founded in
    1946 immediately after the close of WW II, it was presided over
    by Charles A. Anderson, with emphasis on mind control re-search
    and “future sciences.” Included under the Stanford umbrella was
    Charles F. Kettering Foundation which developed the “Changing
    Images of Man” upon which the Aquarian Conspiracy rests.


    Some of Stanford’s major clients and contracts were at first
    centered around the defense establishment but, as Stanford grew, so
    did the diversity of its services:

    • Applications of Behavioral Sciences to Research

    • Management

    • Office of Science and Technology

    • SRI Business Intelligence Program

    • U.S. Department of Defense Directorate of Defense

    • Research and Engineering

    • U.S. Department of Defense Office of Aerospace Research

    Among corporations seeking Stanford’s services were

    • Wells
      Fargo Bank

    • Bechtel Corporation

    • Hewlett Packard

    • Bank of
      America

    • McDonnell-Douglas Corporation

    • Blyth

    • Eastman
      Dillon

    • TRW Company

    One of Stanford’s more secret projects was
    extensive work on chemical and bacteriological warfare (CAB)
    weapons.


    Stanford Research is plugged into at least 200 smaller “think tanks”
    doing research into every facet of life in America. This is known as
    ARPA networking and represents the emergence of probably the most
    far-reaching effort to control the environment of every individual
    in the country. At present Stanford’s computers are linked with 2500
    “sister” research consoles which include the Central
    Intelligence Agency (CIA), Bell Telephone Laboratories, U.S.
    Army Intelligence, the Office of Naval Intelligence (ONI),
    RANI, MIT,
    Harvard and UCLA. Stanford plays a key role in that it is the
    “library,” cataloging all ARPA documentation.


    “Other agencies”—and one can use one’s imagination here, are allowed
    to search through SRI’s “library” for key words, phrases, look
    through sources and update their own master files with those of
    Stanford Research Center. The Pentagon, for instance, uses SRI’s
    “master files” extensively, and there is little doubt that other
    U.S. Government agencies do the same. Pentagon “command and control”
    problems are worked out by Stanford.


    While ostensibly these apply only to weapons and soldiers, there is
    absolutely no guarantee that the same research could not, and will
    not, be turned to civilian applications. Stanford is known to be
    willing to do anything for anyone, and it is my belief that if ever
    SRI were to be fully exposed, the hostility which would arise from
    revelations as to what it actually does would most probably force
    SRI to close.

     

     

  • MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY,
    ALFRED P. SLOAN SCHOOL OF MANAGEMENT



    This major institute is not generally recognized as being a part of
    Tavistock U.S.A. Most people look upon it as a purely American
    institution, but that is far from being the case. MIT-Alfred Sloan
    can be roughly divided into the following groups:

    • Contemporary Technology

    • Industrial Relations

    • Lewin Group Psychology

    • NASA-ERC Computer Research
      Laboratories

    • Office of Naval Research
      Group, Psychology

    • Systems Dynamics.

    Forrestor and Meadows wrote


    The
    Club of Rome’s “Limits of Growth” zero growth study
    .

     

    Some of MIT’s clients include the following:

    • American Management
      Association

    • American Red Cross

    • Committee for Economic
      Development

    • GTE

    • Institute for Defense
      Analysis (IDA)

    • NASA

    • National Academy of Sciences

    • National Council of Churches

    • Sylvania

    • TRW

    • U.S. Army

    • U.S. Department of State

    • U.S. Navy

    • U.S. Treasury

    • Volkswagen Company

    So vast is the reach of IDA that it would take hundreds of pages to
    describe the activities in which it is engaged, and IDA is fully
    described in my book on the role played by Institutions and
    Foundations in committing treason against the United States of
    America, which will be published early in 1992.

     

     

  • RAND RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
    CORPORATION



    Without a doubt, RAND is THE think tank most beholden to
    Tavistock
    Institute
    and certainly the RIIA’s most prestigious vehicle for
    control of United States policies at every level.


    Specific RAND policies that became operative include our ICBM
    program, prime analyses for U.S. foreign policy making, instigator
    of space programs, U.S. nuclear policies, corporate analyses,
    hundreds of projects for the military, the Central intelligence
    Agency (CIA) in relation to the use of mind altering drugs like
    peyote, LSD (the covert

    MK-Ultra operation
    which lasted for 20
    years).


    Some of RAND’s clients include the following:

    • American Telephone and
      Telegraph Company (AT&T)

    • Chase Manhattan Bank

    • International Business
      Machines (IBM)

    • National Science Foundation

    • Republican Party

    • TRW

    • U.S. Air Force

    • U.S. Department of Energy

    • U.S. Department of Health

    There are literally THOUSANDS of
    highly important companies,
    government institutions and organizations that make use of RAND’s
    services, and to list them all would be an impossible task. Among
    RAND’s “specialities” is a study group that predicts the timing and
    the direction of a thermonuclear war, plus working out the many
    scenarios based upon its findings.

     

    RAND was once accused of being
    commissioned by the USSR to work out terms of surrender of the
    United States Government, an accusation that went all the way to the
    United States Senate, where it was taken up by Senator Symington and
    subsequently fell victim to articles of scorn poured out by the
    establishment press. BRAIN WASHING remains the primary function of
    RAND.

To summarize, the major Tavistock institutions in the United States
engaged in brainwashing at all levels, including government, the
military, business, religious organizations and education are the
following:

  • Brookings Institution

  • Hudson Institute

  • Institute for Policy
    Studies

  • Massachusetts Institute
    of Technology

  • National Training
    Laboratories

  • Rand Research and
    Development Corporation

  • Stanford Research
    Institute

  • Wharton School at University of Pennsylvania

It is estimated by sources of mine that the total number of
people employed by these institutions is in the region of 50,000
with funding close to $10 billion dollars.

Posted in Uncategorized | Leave a comment